JP7319126B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that executes pending change, pseudo-continuation, SP reach development, etc. by opening a displayed present box (see Patent Document 1, for example). Also, there is known a gaming machine that displays a suggestion image (stock) that suggests execution of a certain effect (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2015-134097 A Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-50980

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, although the present box has multiple roles (suggestion of pending change execution, suggestion of pseudo-continuation execution, suggestion of SP reach development, etc.), it is a common display mode. , The variation was scarce and the interest was insufficient. In the gaming machine of Patent Document 2, since the presentation of the suggestion target and the display mode of the suggestive image are in a one-to-one relationship, the presentation to be executed later is easily recognized by the suggestive image, which is not sufficiently interesting. there were. In addition, depending on the situation, it is also necessary to limit the scenes in which the suggestive images are displayed (in the case where a large number of suggestive target effects are executed, the display of the suggestive images becomes complicated).

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A game machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects that suggest being controlled to the advantageous state,
Before the specific effect is executed, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggested effects related to the execution of the specific effect,
ending the suggestive effect related to execution of the specific effect when the specific effect is executed;
The plurality of types of specific effects are
A first specific effect that can be executed at a predetermined timing;
a second specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing;
and a third specific effect that can be executed at a timing after the predetermined timing,
The plurality of types of suggested productions are
The first suggestion production and
a second suggestive effect in which the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first suggestive effect,
When the first suggesting effect is continuously executed until the predetermined timing, the first specific effect can be executed in relation to the first suggesting effect, and the first suggesting effect is started from the predetermined timing. When it is continuously executed until a later timing, it is possible to execute the second specific effect in relation to the first suggestive effect,
When the second suggestive effect is continuously executed until the predetermined timing, the first specific effect can be executed in relation to the second suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is started from the predetermined timing. When the execution continues until a later timing, the third specific effect can be executed in relation to the second suggestive effect,
When the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are executed at the predetermined timing, at least
a second suggestive continuation pattern for executing the first specific effect in relation to the first suggestive effect, ending the first suggestive effect, and continuing the second suggestive effect;
The specific effect can be executed in a first suggestive continuation pattern in which the first specific effect is executed in relation to the second suggestive effect, the second suggestive effect is terminated, and the first suggestive effect is continued. can be,
The second suggestive continuation pattern is
The first specific effect is executed in relation to the first suggestive effect at the predetermined timing, and the second specific effect is executed in relation to the second suggestive effect after the predetermined timing. 1 pattern and
The first specific effect is executed in relation to the first suggestive effect at the predetermined timing, and the third specific effect is executed in relation to the second suggestive effect at a timing later than the predetermined timing. 2 patterns, and
When executing the first specific effect in relation to the first suggestive effect, a plurality of execution periods of the first suggestive effect are provided until the first specific effect is executed, and a plurality of the first suggestive effects are provided. Controllable to the advantageous state regardless of which execution period is selected from among the execution periods of the suggestive effect ,
The first suggestive effect can be changed to the second suggestive effect during execution of the first suggestive effect,
The first suggestive effect includes a normal mode and a special mode,
The first suggestive effect of the special mode has a higher rate of change to the second suggestive effect than the first suggestive effect of the normal mode,
When executing the first specific effect, the ratio of executing the first specific effect in relation to the first suggestive effect, and the ratio of executing the first specific effect in relation to the second suggestive effect. is different,
The suggestive effect can be started at any one of a plurality of timings, and the timing at which to start differs depending on the type of the suggestive effect.
(1) In order to achieve the above object, the other gaming machine is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state, bonus game, etc.), It is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects suggesting control to be in an advantageous state, and before the execution of the specific effects, a plurality of types of suggestive effects related to the execution of the specific effects are generated. A plurality of types of specific effects that can be executed include a first specific effect that can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, the pseudo consecutive notice effects shown in FIGS. 13-8 and 13-9, etc.), and a A second specific effect that can be executed later (for example, a battle rising effect shown in FIGS. 13-10, 13-11, etc.), and a third specific effect that can be executed after the predetermined timing Effect (for example, relief effect shown in FIG. 13-12, etc.), and the plurality of types of suggestive effects include first suggestive effect (for example, effect by up card shown in FIG. 13-7 (A) etc.), and a second suggestive effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card shown in FIG. 13-7 (B), etc.) that is more expected to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first suggestive effect, When the first suggestive effect (for example, effect by upcard, etc.) is continuously executed until a predetermined timing, the first specific effect is associated with the first suggestive effect (for example, effect by upcard, etc.). (For example, a pseudo consecutive notice effect, etc.) can be executed, and when the first suggestive effect is continuously executed until a timing after a predetermined timing, the first suggestive effect (for example, by an up card) 13-7 (C), 13-9 (G4) to 13-9 ( L4), Figures 13-11 (B3) to Figure 13-11 (G3), Figures 13-14, Figures 13-15, Figures 13-16, Figures 13-17, Figures 13-22, etc.), the second suggestion When the effect (for example, effect by cancel card, etc.) is continuously executed until a predetermined timing, the first specific effect (for example, pseudo ) can be executed, and when the second suggestive effect is continuously executed until a timing after a predetermined timing, the second suggestive effect (for example, a cancel card effect, etc.) can be executed. Relatedly, the third specific effect (for example, relief effect, etc.) can be executed (for example, FIG. 13-7 (C), FIG. 13-9 (G5) to FIG. 13-9 (L5), FIG. 12 (B2) ~ Figure 13-12 (G2), Figure 13-13, Figure 13-15, Figure 13-16, Figure 13-17, Figure 13-22, etc.), the first suggestion effect at a predetermined timing (for example , production by up card, etc.) and the second suggestive production (for example, production by cancel card, etc.) are executed, at least at a predetermined timing, the first suggestive production (for example, production by up card, etc.) The first specified effect (for example, simulated continuous notice effect, etc.) is executed in relation to the above, and the second suggestive effect (for example, effect by cancel card, etc.) is executed at a timing later than a predetermined timing. In a first pattern (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a battle effect pattern including a battle rise) that executes a second specific effect (for example, a battle rise effect, etc.), an up card is determined with the pseudo-continuous effect as a target, and the battle rises When a cancel card is determined as a target (see FIGS. 13-14 and 13-16), etc.), and at a predetermined timing, the first suggestion effect (for example, effect by up card, etc.) Along with executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo consecutive notice effect, etc.), at a timing later than a predetermined timing, the third specific effect (for example, A second pattern for executing a relief effect, etc. (for example, in a battle effect pattern including a pseudo-continuous effect and a relief effect, if the up card is determined with the pseudo-continuous effect as the target and the cancel card is determined with the relief effect as the target ( 13-13, FIG. 13-16), etc.), and when executing the first specific effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice effect, etc.), the first suggestion The ratio of executing the first specific effect in relation to the effect (for example, effect by up card, etc.), and the execution of the first specific effect in relation to the second suggestive effect (for example, effect by cancel card, etc.) 13-15, 13-16).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the first specific effect in relation to the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect in accordance with the player's psychology.

(2) The gaming machine of (1) above includes the first suggestive effect (for example, effect by up card, etc.)
When executing the first specific effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice effect etc.) in relation to the second
When executing the first specific effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice effect, etc.) in relation to the suggestive effect (for example, effect by cancel card, etc.), the first specific effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice effect, etc.) is performed in a different manner production, etc.) may be executed (Fig. 13-9).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the type of suggestive effect when the first specific effect is executed.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1) and (2) above executes the first suggestive effect (for example, an effect using an up card, etc.) and the second suggestive effect (for example, an effect using a cancel card, etc.) at a predetermined timing. If it is, and at a predetermined timing, the second suggestion effect (for example,
The ratio of whether the second suggestive effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card, etc.) is continuously executed until the timing after the predetermined timing is different between the case where only the effect by the cancel card, etc.) is executed. (Figures 13-13 to 13-16). For example, before the start of the pseudo-continuous effect, if the up card and the cancel card are stocked, or if only the cancel card is stocked, after the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the cancel card is stocked. are not the same (Figures 13-13 to 13-16
are intentionally not the same). Alternatively, the up card is unlikely to be determined as a target for the rise of the battle, and the cancel card is unlikely to be determined as a target for the pseudo-continuous effect, so if the up card and the cancel card are stocked before the start of the pseudo-continuous effect , there is a high possibility that the up card is the target of the pseudo-continuous effect, and there is a high possibility that the cancel card is stocked at the end of the pseudo-continuous effect. On the other hand, if only the cancel card is stocked before the start of the pseudo-continuous effect, since the pseudo-continuous effect occurs more frequently than the battle rise (since the pseudo-continuous effect is executed even in normal reach), the cancellation The possibility that the card is the target of the pseudo-continuous effect is relatively high, and the possibility that the cancel card is stocked at the end of the pseudo-continuous effect is not high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the first suggestion effect is being executed.

(4) In the gaming machine (1) to (3) above, the third specific effect (for example, relief effect, etc.)
is executed after the timing at which the second specific effect (for example, the effect of rising up in battle, etc.) is executed (FIGS. 13 to 17, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(5) The game machine described in (1) to (4) provides a notification effect (for example, the activation effect shown in FIGS. 13 to 17) for notifying that the specific effect will be executed in relation to the suggestive effect. can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-23(H) to 13-24(F), in connection with the up card being stocked (that is, when the stocked up card is 13-25(C) to 13-25(H), it is possible to display an activation image 011SHHD1 that informs that the pseudo continuous effect is executed. , the activation image 011SHHD2 can be displayed to inform that the battle rise will be executed in relation to the stock of cancel cards (that is, in relation to the use of the stocked cancel cards). In addition, Figures 13-28 (A) to Figure 13-23 (G
), in relation to the up card being stocked (that is, in relation to the use of the stocked up card) an activation image that notifies that a pseudo-continuous effect will be executed 011SHHD1 can be displayed. In addition, Figure 13-31 (F) ~ Figure 13
- As shown in 32 (E), it notifies that a relief effect will be executed in relation to the stock of cancel cards (that is, in relation to the use of the stocked cancel cards). Activation image 011SHHD2 can be displayed), and the notification effect can be executed even when the suggestion effect is not executed (for example, FIG. 13-30 (
B)-As shown in FIG. 13-30(G), the activation image 011SHH is displayed even when the up card is not stocked (that is, when the up card is used as an emergency activation).
D1 can be displayed), and when the notification effect is executed when the suggestive effect is not executed, the specific effect equal to or greater than a predetermined expected value is executed. For example, Fig. 13-15
In the example shown in Fig. 2, the decision ratio of making the target of the pseudo continuous effect without stocking the up card is 12% for normal reach (loss) and 15% for normal reach (big hit), and the up card is stocked. The percentage of decisions made as targets for pseudo-continuous effects is 73% (26% + 47%) for normal reach (loss) and 7 for normal reach (jackpot).
0% (25%+45%). Therefore, the reliability of the pseudo-continuous effect when an unstocked upcard is used and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is Higher than performance reliability. In other words, when an unstocked upcard is used and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the reliability of the jackpot by the pseudo-continuous effect is a predetermined expected value (a pseudo-continuous effect when the stocked upcard is used). Reliability of the big hit by the pseudo-continuous effect when is executed) or more.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (1) to (5) above, the suggestive effect can be started at a plurality of types of timing, and the suggestive effect can be executed at any timing according to the type of the suggestive effect. The ratio of whether to start the
Different types of cards have different percentages for determining when they are used (i.e. target)).

According to such a configuration, since the suggestive effect is executed at various timings during the game, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation at various timings.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of stop design decision processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example regarding a setting suggestion effect execution determination table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example and a setting example regarding a setting suggestion pattern; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the execution example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on the characteristic part 027SH. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of the game machine related to the characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which illustrates the variation pattern of the gaming machine based on the characteristic part 027SH. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an advance notice effect; It is a production example of each advance notice production. It is a production example of each advance notice production. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of the advance notice effect, and the like; It is an explanatory view explaining item image production. It is a display example of each item image. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of item image effects and the like; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various timings; It is a specific example of various timings. It is a specific example of various timings. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process in the pachinko game machine based on the characteristic part 027SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process in the pachinko game machine based on the characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining setting value suggestion in a game machine related to the characteristic portion 027SH; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining setting value suggestion in a game machine related to the characteristic portion 027SH; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an advance notice effect; This is an example of the advance notice effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of the advance notice effect, and the like; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of the advance notice effect, and the like; It is an example of a display, such as a present box image. It is an example of a display, such as a present box image. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of a present box; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting suggesting effect (hot character effect, eye-catching effect); FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of a hot character effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of an eye-catching effect; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various timings; It is a specific example of various timings. It is a specific example of various timings. It is a specific example of various timings. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of effect determination processing A for determining an advance notice effect and a present box effect. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of effect determination processing A for determining an advance notice effect and a present box effect. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of effect determination processing A for determining an advance notice effect and a present box effect. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of effect determination processing B for determining a setting suggestion effect (hot character effect, eye-catching effect); FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which illustrates the variation pattern of the gaming machine based on the characteristic part 011SH. It is an example of the determination ratio of the pseudo consecutive notice effect. It is an explanatory view explaining a battle production. It is an explanatory view explaining a battle production. It is an example of production of each scene of battle production. It is an explanatory view explaining a determination ratio of battle production. It is an explanatory view explaining item image production. It is an example of an effect operation related to the pseudo consecutive notice effect. It is an example of an effect operation related to the pseudo consecutive notice effect. It is an example of the production operation related to the title display of the battle production. It is an example of the production operation related to the title display of the battle production. It is an example of the production operation related to the relief production. It is an example of the determination ratio of the presence/absence, type, and acquisition timing of items targeting relief. This is an example of determining ratios of the presence/absence, type, and acquisition timing of items targeting battle risers. It is an example of the determination ratio of the presence/absence, type, and acquisition timing of items targeting pseudo-trains. It is an example of the determination ratio of the presence/absence, type, and acquisition timing of items targeting pseudo-trains. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various timings; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various timings; It is a specific example of various timings. It is a specific example of various timings. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect|effect determination process which determines about a pseudo run, a battle effect pattern, and an item. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect|effect determination process which determines about a pseudo run, a battle effect pattern, and an item. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 011SH.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game and the second special game,
Variable display of decoration patterns (designs showing numbers etc.) as a plurality of types of decoration identification information different from special patterns is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game,
Decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled or updated) in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended,
A display area may be provided for displaying active representations corresponding to the variable representations being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example,
An electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces is provided, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces approach the winning ball device 6A, A closed state in which game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as a second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area), the normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3
is provided, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effect is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. )
A batted ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. Stick controller 31
A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 is, for example, a 7-segment LED
It is sufficient that it is configured using a display device. Display monitor 29 and display switch 30
is arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls to the first and second big prize openings (attackers). Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls won by winning the 2nd starting prize mouth (electric chew) and the number of prize balls by winning the 1st big prize mouth and the 2nd big prize mouth (attacker) account for the total number of prize balls. percentage. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 displays the pachinko game machine 1
It is possible to display the setting value in The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are
Operation from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 is impossible. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. The security cover 500A protects the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed.
The right side of the is covered from the back side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if the normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern is "normal pattern losing".
becomes. When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, such as "7") is selected as a fixed special symbol.
, The actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type, which will be described later. ) is stop-displayed, it is a "big win", and if a predetermined special pattern (small-win pattern, for example, "2") different from the big-win pattern is stop-displayed, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, the opening mode of the big prize opening (
A plurality of types of game states (normal state, time saving state, probability variable state, etc.) after the jackpot game state are prepared, and jackpot types are set according to these. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning port (
high opening control, high base control) are also executed. The time saving state is a special pattern (especially the second special pattern)
This state is advantageous to the player because the efficiency of the variation of is improved.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is a low-probability base state,
The probability variable state is also called a high probability high base state, and the normal state is also called a low probability low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. note that,
The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and lighting of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. or extinguishing, the action of the movable body 32, or a presentation using any presentation device including some or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example,"
The same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are stop-displayed in line on predetermined effective lines in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (
For example, "6" etc.) may be stop-displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C,
A decoration pattern constituting a chance eye is stopped and displayed on a predetermined pay line in 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo consecutive notice effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition,
Various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100 V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. For example, the power supply board 17 converts alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC
), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (for example, 12 V DC or 5 V DC).

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.
and so on.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A
access memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and a random number circuit 10
4 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, the ROM 10
1 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation Control (drive) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the normal drawing reservation display 25C, etc.
and an output port for transmitting a signal to drive the solenoid.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal
It is an operation stop signal for putting the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, a system reset IC
It is sufficient if it can be output using any of The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 30 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 is connected to the glass door frame 3a.
The opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including is detected.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the performance control board 12 . The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). ))
, game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the commands specifying the occurrence of errors, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, ROM
Various data (data such as various tables) stored in the RAM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 includes the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35.
The display control unit 123 may be instructed to execute an effect based on a detection signal from B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected and appropriately indicates the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character G
generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby displaying the effect image on the image display device 5.
to display. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . or lamp signal
are supplied to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 stores various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects.
Updatable numeric data indicating is counted. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S
6) is executed, setting change processing (step S7) is executed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started.
The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, the shooting of the game ball by operating the batted ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started.
The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, the effect control board 1 from the main board 11
2, a setting change end command is transmitted.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, similarly to when it is in the setting confirmation state,
The pachinko game machine 1 may be brought into a game stop state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. for example,
A predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 is periodically interrupted by the timer every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).
Set the register of the CTC built in (step S9), and enable the interrupt (
step S10). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 10
3, first, by executing a predetermined switch process, detection signals from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23 are detected through the switch circuit 110. Determination of presence/absence of reception (step S2
1). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22).
). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU1
03 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and the small win game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26
). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, C
PU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process processing, the CPU 103
, first, a starting winning judgment process is executed (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103
Depending on the value of the special figure process flag provided in, one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 is selected and executed. In addition, each processing of the special symbol process processing (step S110 ~
In S120), transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

In the special symbol normal process of step S110, the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value)
is executed when In this special symbol normal process, the first
A determination is made as to whether or not to start the special game or the second special game. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the display result is "big hit" or "small hit"
It includes a process of determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for And the display result is "big hit"
If it is, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special process flag is "8
". Also, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of a round in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit execution number. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . And when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is "5"
On the other hand, when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending production as a production operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state has passed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When these settings are made, the value of the special process flag will be "
0", and the jackpot ending process is terminated.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The process during the small hit opening of step S119 is performed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this small winning opening process, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. here,
When the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the set value consists of 6 levels from 1 to 6, 6 being the highest probability of winning the big win, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the probability of winning the big win. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage in stages. .
If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value.
While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. In Figure 7 (A), the fluctuation special figure is the first
A configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used in the case of a special figure is shown in FIG.
) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the variable special figure is the second special figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. random number M
R1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In the case, 1238 so as to continue from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value
, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot", so that only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 is set.
In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as a non-common numerical range of big hit determination values so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of big hit determination values.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, 32767 to 3309 out of the hit determination values
The range up to 4 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, 32767 to 3342 out of the hit determination values
The range up to 1 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The number of set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320, the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the high base medium (
During time-saving control), the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the game property is controlled to a big hit game state (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when the playability is changed according to the set value.
Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73).
). The timer interrupt flag is set for a predetermined time (for example, 2
milliseconds) has passed. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on,
The effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes
s), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, the main board 1
After reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, setting and control corresponding to the read production control commands are performed. will be For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like.
22 is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120, for example, the RAM 12
2, the following steps S170-S1
77 processes are selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. Image display device 5
If it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern in , the value of the production process flag is set to "
1”, and terminates the variable display start waiting process.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120
By instructing the display control unit 123, an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the movable body 32 is driven, and the sound control board 13 is operated. By outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the speaker 8L, 8
During the variable display of decorative patterns, such as outputting a voice or sound effect from R, and turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 or decorative LED by outputting a command (electrical decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various production controls are executed. After performing such production control,
For example, when an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decoration pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or when a command specifying to stop display the fixed decoration pattern is received from the main board 11, A fixed decorative pattern as a display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3",
The effect processing during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. There is a "5"
, and the effect processing during the small hit is terminated.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end production process, the production control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small-hit game state is set, and various performance controls are executed at the end of the small-hit game state based on the set contents. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, effect control CPU120
sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and executes various effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol is displayed during variable display of special symbols (for example, a symbol indicating "-")
The variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).
.

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, A
The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of RT and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (“high”, “
Expressions such as "low", "different", etc.) may include that one is at a percentage of "0%". For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of characteristic part regarding setting suggestion effect)
Characteristic portions relating to setting suggestion effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below. In this characteristic portion, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 at a predetermined rate during execution of the variable display.

FIG. 10-1 shows step S17 of effect control process processing as variable display start setting processing.
1 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in 1; In the variable display start setting process,
Stop symbol determination processing is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination processing makes it possible to decide the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggesting effect.

After the announcement effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, a notice production control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various production executions. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result of the notice effect determination process in step S202. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern and the notice production control pattern, but one production control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production is set. There may be.

When the production control pattern is determined by step S203, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initialization of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of RAM122 set the value (step S
204). Also, a setting is made to start changing the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step S203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. Image display device 5
"Left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the screen of
It is sufficient to start the variation of the decoration pattern with .

Subsequently, a pending display update setting at the start of variable display is set (step S206). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display portion (leftmost display portion) corresponding to the pending number “1” is erased (digested), and other pending numbers “2” to "4"
Move (shift) the pending display in the display area corresponding to , one by one, to the left. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. In addition, when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, the active display area will be displayed without updating the pending display. A setting may be made to update the active display in the . After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed (step S221). Whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example.

When the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol for non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is terminated. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "losing". The normal reach includes a case where the variable display result is "big hit" and a case where the variable display result is "loss". In the non-ready-to-win state in which the variable display mode of the decoration design does not become the ready-to-win mode, the fixed decoration design of the non-ready-to-win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop design. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined so that the "left" and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R are different (mismatched) ornamental symbols. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decorative pattern of the reach-losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reach-losing. The final stop pattern at the time of reach loss is determined so as to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "big hit", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win. The final stop pattern at the time of the big hit is "left", "middle", "right"
The decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are determined to have the same (matching) decorative design.

When the ready-to-win effect of super-ready-to-win is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol for super-to-win is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "loss". At the time of super reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decoration pattern of the reach losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reaching losing. When the variable display result is "big win", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win.

At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "losing", the same (matching) decorative design in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R is It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decoration pattern. The left and right decoration patterns that constitute such a reach-losing combination or a big-hit combination are also called reach patterns. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-win patterns may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decoration pattern corresponding to the number may be only the effect image showing the number, or may be the effect image showing various characters in addition to the number. The reach pattern is
Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the ready-to-win pattern, by referring to the ready-to-win pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, one of a plurality of decoration patterns is determined. good. RA
Any one or both of the random counter provided in M122 and the random number circuit 124 may be used for updating.

In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win". For example, when the variable display result is "losing", the determination rate of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As it becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative design becomes lower, and the determination ratio of the decorative design corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "big hit", the determination rate of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2, number 3, number 4, number 5, and number 6 are the lowest. The higher the number, the higher the percentage of decoration design decisions, and the higher the percentage of decoration design decisions corresponding to the number 7. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result becomes "big win" and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state becomes the highest. , 5, 4, 3, and 2, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern becomes "big win", and the ratio of control to the big win game state is low. Thus, when the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result becomes "big win", and the ratio of control to the big win game state becomes the lowest. In addition, in the reach pattern determination table, the variable display result is "losing"
The number of determination values assigned to decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may be the same, regardless of whether it is a win or a "big hit". The number of determination values assigned to each decorative design to be a ready-to-win pattern may be different, or the number of determination values to be assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative design to be a ready-to-win design. Depending on the type of jackpot, the determination ratio of decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may be different.

After step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decoration symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. If the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a setting suggestion effect according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S225).
). The setting suggestion effect is based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution, R
By referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table which is stored in advance in the OM 121 and prepared, the presence or absence of execution may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . As for the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect, "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect, or "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect,
Either is decided.

Based on the result of determination in step S225, it is determined whether or not it is determined that "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect (step S226). "No production" that does not execute the setting suggestion production
(Step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. If it is determined that there is an effect (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 may receive a setting value notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11 side when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . Accordingly, in step S227, the setting values stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, after determining the suggested setting pattern (step S228),
The stop symbol determination process is terminated. The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random values for determining the suggested setting pattern. It should be determined by Numerical data indicating random values for setting suggestion pattern determination is stored in the RAM
Any one or both of the random counter provided in 122 and the random number circuit 124 may be used for updating.

FIG. 10-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. For example R
The OM 121 pre-stores table data constituting a determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 10-3 as a setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01. In the determination table TA01, the variable display result is "loss" or "big hit".
The number of determination values assigned to presence/absence of setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether or not.
For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of "with effect" for executing the setting suggesting effect is higher than when the variable display result is "losing". In the setting of such a determination ratio, when the setting suggesting performance is executed, the variable display result becomes ``big hit'' and the ratio of being controlled to the big winning game state becomes higher than when the setting suggesting performance is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the variable display result is "losing" or "big hit"
, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of setting suggestion effects may be the same.

FIG. 10-4(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggested contents depending on whether or not the symbol display color is to be changed, and the display color when it is to be changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win symbol, and can be changed to suggestive display colors including copper color, silver color, and gold color in addition to the normal display color red. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, suggesting that the player has a low expectation, which is an advantageous set value. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting confirmation of 6, which is the highest setting. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 according to whether or not the pattern display color has changed and the pattern display color after the change.

FIG. 10-4(B) shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 pre-stores table data forming a determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 10-4(B) as a suggested setting pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, a suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern varies depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

When the setting suggesting performance using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of control to the big win game state is high. When the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the degree of expectation, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low, and when the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. One thing is certain. In addition, when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-2, the degree of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is high, and when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-3, the set value is the highest. 6 is determined. In this way, the ready-to-win symbols when the variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode include a symbol display mode for suggesting control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode for 7. A pattern display mode for suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 while suggesting the control of the jackpot game state such as the decoration pattern corresponding to the number is included. When the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, the ready-to-win pattern is displayed in the normal display color to suggest control of the jackpot game state, and then the pattern display color is changed. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are continuously made, and suggestions regarding the set values are made.

The setting-suggestion effect can be executed in different effect modes according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the pattern display color is not changed to copper because the pattern RE-1 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, as a pattern display mode when the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, the pattern display color is changed to copper color or not. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the pattern display color is not changed to gold because the pattern RE-3 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. In this way, depending on whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the pattern display color is changed to gold as a pattern display mode when the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7. It depends on whether or not it is changed to

The setting suggesting effect is instead of changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decoration symbol stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win symbol, or in addition to changing the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape and pattern of the decoration pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image, or any other effect image, output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of decorative light emitters such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, and the like. It may be one that changes the rendering mode by any rendering device, such as a combination of some or all. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko game machine 1 are arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data combining these are predetermined for effect execution. It suffices if it can be executed when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the game is controlled to the big win game state, and a pattern that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to the big win game state. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "loss", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-
3 may be determined at a predetermined rate only when the variable display result is "big hit", and may not be determined when the variable display result is "losing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the current setting.

FIG. 10-5 shows step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process performed in. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step S241). When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, the image display device 5
display a predetermined effect image on the screen of , output a predetermined sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, turn on, turn off, or blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED,
It suffices if various effects can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating the movable members for effect such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of them.

In the effect processing during variable display, it is determined whether or not it is the notice effect period (step S242).
. If it is the notice effect period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the notice effect (step S243). If it is not the notice performance period (step S242; N
o) After performing the control of step S243, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244). If it is the reach effect period (step S244; Yes),
Control for executing the ready-to-win effect is performed (step S245). By the control of step S245, when the ready-to-win performance after changing the symbol display color is executed after the decoration pattern to be the ready-to-win pattern is stop-displayed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are made, and the pachinko game machine 1 is operated. Suggestions regarding settings can be made.

When it is not the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; No), or after performing the control of step S245, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be determined in advance as an effect execution period for changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. When it is the change effect period (step S246; Yes), control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). If it is not a change effect period (step S246; No), after performing the control of step S247, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, etc., Other, variable of the decorative pattern After performing control for executing an effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect processing during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to different time lengths according to the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and pattern R
In the case of E-2, the change effect period is set to the third period longer than the second period, and the pattern RE
In the case of -3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when an effect (advantageous effect) is executed, the player shoots an image or video of the effect with a portable terminal owned by the player, and sends it to SNS (Social Networking Service
There is a tendency to post on membership registration websites such as e) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, the production (
Unfavorable production) does not arouse the desire to shoot, so if the execution period of the disadvantageous production is long,
On the contrary, there is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the photographing time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking an effect that is advantageous to the player, and to secure the shooting time. In addition, since the photographing time can be secured, the photographed images and moving images are made public by the players on the Internet, and public interest in the pachinko game machine 1 can be heightened. In addition, in many cases, since the pictures including which pachinko game machine 1 in which game hall were photographed are disclosed, from the game hall side, the game hall is advertised by the player. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested, synergistic effects are brought about not only for the player but also for the game arcade side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a design confirmation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S249). If no pattern confirmation command is received (step S249; No), the effect process during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the design determination command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop design (determined decoration design) which is the display result in the variable display of the decoration design (step S250). continue,
A certain period of time is set in advance as a wait time for receiving a jackpot start designation command (step S251). In addition, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure "
After updating to 3″ (step S252), the effect processing during variable display ends.

FIG. 10-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 10-6(A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the form of variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode and ready-to-win is established. "
When the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed in the left and right decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the ready-to-win is established and the ready-to-win performance of the normal ready-to-win is executed. Figure 10-
6(B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is advanced to the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decoration pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect image in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is displayed. FIG. 10-6(C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect as a setting suggestion effect is executed. A performance display corresponding to the change performance is displayed superimposed on the stop-displayed ready-to-win pattern. In addition, by displaying an effect image announcing a message such as "Change the symbol display color!", a suggestion to change the symbol display color is made.

FIG. 10-6 (D1) is an effect execution example H in which the pattern display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0.
D111 is shown. FIG. 10-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color changes to copper by the pattern RE-1. Figure 10-6 (D3) shows the pattern RE
-2 shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to silver. Figure 10-6
(D4) is an effect execution example HD113 in which the pattern display color changes to gold according to the pattern RE-3.
is shown. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the ready-to-win pattern does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and remains red, which is the normal display color. In this way, a failure effect (fake effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the player's expectation, which is an advantageous set value, is low. In effect execution example HD112, pattern RE-1 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. In effect execution example HD113, pattern RE-2 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to silver, suggesting that the player has a high expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. Production execution example HD1
At 14, pattern RE-3 changes the display color of the ready-to-win symbol to gold, suggesting that 6, which is the highest set value, is fixed.

The setting suggesting effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit by any desired effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a pre-reading notice effect, in addition to a change effect in which the display color of the ready-to-win pattern can be changed, and the set value of the pachinko game machine 1. You may enable it to make a suggestion about. It may be an effect in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested after the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is performed during execution of the variable display. In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, a case where the suggestion regarding the control of the big win game state is continuously made after making the suggestion concerning the control of the big win game state, or the suggestion concerning the control of the big win game state is continuously made and the pachinko game is performed. It may also include a case of suggesting a set value of the gaming machine 1 . In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, after making a suggestion about the control of the big win game state, when the suggestion ends, and when the suggestion about the control of the big win game state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is made. It may include a case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion about the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether or not the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by suggesting the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate. can be diversified to improve amusement.

During execution of the variable display, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state may be made, while suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the big hit start production (fanfare production) or the big hit production (
The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested along with the execution of the effects corresponding to the first round and the second round. There may be a case where the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot game state.

In place of part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, or together with part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, a suggestion about control of a state advantageous to the player different from the big win game state is provided. can be anything. For example, it may suggest a variable probability state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as the advantageous state, a suggestion may be made according to whether or not control is to be performed regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 027SH)
Next, the game machine related to the characteristic portion 027SH will be described. The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 027SH is a gaming machine capable of playing games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH includes game control means and effect execution means. Game control means is realized by the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11, for example. The effect execution means is realized by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12, for example. The effect executing means performs various effects (for example, various advance notice effects, item image effects, etc., which will be described later)
is executable.

FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 11-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH has a general winning opening 10 arranged in the left game area of the game board 2, and a passage gate 41 and a passage gate 41 in the right game area.
A variable winning ball device 6B, a general winning hole 10, and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. again,
Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A is arranged. A plurality of obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. As shown in FIG. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area is a variable winning ball. It is possible to win the second start winning opening formed by the device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 027SH includes, for example, a movable body 027SH32 which is an accessory in the vicinity of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Note that the characteristic portion 02
Other configurations of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 related to 7SH are the same as those of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. For example, in FIG. 11-1, the first suspension display 25A and the like are omitted.

FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH. Specifically, FIG. 11-2 (A) shows the set value (
Set value "1" to "6") shows another big hit probability and small hit probability. FIG. 11-2(B) shows the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability for each set value (set value "1" to "6") when the gaming state is a high probability state. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH is different from the game state (whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state), and according to the setting value (setting value "1" to "6"
), a plurality of types of display result determination tables for special figures corresponding to each (each includes FIG. 11-
2 (A) and 12 types of display result determination table for special figures, in which the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value are assigned so that the big hit probability and the small hit probability shown in (A) and (B) are stored. For example, the CPU 103 uses one special figure display result determination table among the plurality of types of special figure display result determination tables in the winning random number value determination process to determine whether a big hit or a small win is achieved. It suffices to judge whether it is a hit or (whether it is a loss).

FIG. 11-2(C) shows the types of jackpots. FIG. 11-2(D) shows the distribution of the jackpot for the first special symbol. FIG. 11-2(E) shows the allocation of the jackpot for the second special symbol. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH has a plurality of types of jackpot type determination tables (each has , The judgment value corresponding to the first jackpot, the judgment value corresponding to the second jackpot, and the judgment value corresponding to the third jackpot are assigned so as to be distributed as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D) and (E). For example, the CPU 103 stores two types of jackpot type determination tables), and for example, in the winning random number value determination process, when the CPU 103 determines that it will be a jackpot based on the special figure display result determination table, the above-mentioned multiple The type of jackpot (jackpot type) may be determined using a corresponding jackpot type determination table among the types of jackpot type determination tables.

FIG. 11-3 is a diagram exemplifying the variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 027SH. FIG. 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing types of variation patterns (variation times). Variation pattern #10 is a non-reach variation pattern. Variation pattern #11 is a non-reach deviation (for shortening) variation pattern. Variation pattern #12 is a variation pattern of deviation from normal reach. Variation pattern #13 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and eventually loses. Variation pattern #14 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and eventually loses. Variation pattern #15 is a small hit variation pattern. Variation pattern #16 is a variation pattern for a normal reach jackpot. Variation pattern #17 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally becomes a big hit. Variation pattern #18 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally becomes a big hit.

FIG. 11-3(B) is an example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. The degree of expectation (reliability) of a big hit is super reach B>super reach A>normal reach. The degree of expectation of a certain effect a is, for example, (probability that effect a will be executed when a big win occurs)×(probability of a big win)/{(probability of effect a being executed when a big win occurs)×( Probability of hitting the jackpot) + (
It is calculated by (probability of execution of performance a when no big win)*(probability of no big win)} (when the expected degree of big win is "1", it always becomes "big win").

For example, the reliability of Super Reach A is (0.3×1/320)/
{(0.3*1/320)+(0.009*319/320)}=about 9.5%. Also, the reliability of Super Reach A is (0.3×1/295)/{(0
. 3*1/295)+(0.009*294/295)}=about 10.2%.

Also, the reliability of super reach B is (0.6×1/320)/{
(0.6*1/320)+(0.001*319/320)}=about 65.3%. In addition, the reliability of super reach B is (0.6×1/295)/{(0
. 6*1/295)+(0.001*294/295)}=about 67.1%.

According to the example of FIG. 11-3(B), the variation pattern #11 is not determined during the low base, but the variation pattern #11 is determined during the low base according to the number of reserved memories, for example. can be Also, according to the example of FIG. 11-3(B), during high bass, the variation pattern #1
Although 0 is not determined, variation pattern #10 may be determined even during high base according to the number of reserved memories, for example.

FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the advance notice effect. FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 are examples of respective advance notice effects. The pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH is shown in FIG.
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects as shown in -4. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be specified by the advance notice effect pattern.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A1” shown in FIG. 11-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH, for example, as shown in FIG. , weak cut-in image 027S
Display HYKE-JCI.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A2” shown in FIG. 11-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH, for example, as shown in FIG. , strong cut-in image 027S
Display HYKE-KCI.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-B” shown in FIG. 11-4 is a group notice effect (display of group images). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH has a notice production pattern "
YEP-B”, for example, a group image 027SHYKE-GN as shown in FIG. 11-5(C) is displayed.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C1” shown in FIG. 11-4 is a button notice effect (button image display→pressing→weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH is shown in FIGS. A button image 027SHYKE-BU and a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI are displayed. The weak cut-in image displayed in the button announcement effect may be different from the weak cut-in image displayed in the cut-in announcement effect.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C2” shown in FIG. 11-4 is a button notice effect (button image display→pressing→strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH is, for example, shown in FIGS. A button image 027SHYKE-BU and a strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI are displayed. The strong cut-in image displayed in the button announcement effect may be different from the strong cut-in image displayed in the cut-in announcement effect.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-D" shown in FIG. 11-4 is the character notice effect (
action). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH has a notice production pattern "
YEP-D”, for example, (E) (F) (G) in Figures 11-6
, the movable body 027SH32 is operated.

FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the decision ratio of the advance notice effect and the like. Figure 11-7 (A
) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image or display of a strong cut-in image). According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the super reach is lost (when it becomes either of the fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 14), execution is determined at a rate of 40%, and the super reach jackpot If (variation pattern #17, #1
8), the execution is determined at a rate of 50%. For example, feature 027
The pachinko game machine 1 related to SH has a cut-in notice effect execution presence/absence determination table for super reach loss, in which 40% of the whole is assigned as a judgment value corresponding to execution, and 5
A cut-in notice effect execution presence/absence determination table for the super reach jackpot, in which 0% is assigned as a determination value corresponding to execution, is stored. The execution/non-execution of the cut-in notice effect is decided by using the cut-in notice effect execution/non-execution decision table for the super reach loss, and the cut-in notice effect execution/non-execution decision table for the super reach big hit is used in the case of the super reach big hit. may determine whether or not to execute the cut-in announcement effect. Other announcements (group announcements,
The same applies to the determination of whether or not to execute the button announcement effect, character object announcement effect). In addition, if it does not become a super reach (if it becomes one of the fluctuation patterns #10, #11, #12, #15, #16), the execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute ).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH, when it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect, the notice effect pattern ("YEP-A1", "YEP-A") related to the cut-in notice effect
2”). FIG. 11-7(B) shows the notice effect patterns (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) of the cut-in notice effect when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect.
) is an example of the determination ratio. According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7(B), when super reach is lost, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at 20%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of a super ready-to-win jackpot, the notice performance pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the notice performance pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 80%. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the feature part 027SH allocates 80% of the total as the determination value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" and assigns 20% of the whole as the decision value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2". A cut-in notice effect pattern decision table for super reach loss assigned as a judgment value, and 20% of the total is assigned as a decision value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1", and 80% of the whole is the notice effect pattern " A super reach jackpot cut-in notice effect pattern determination table assigned as a judgment value corresponding to "YEP-A2" is stored. Determine the notice effect pattern of the cut-in notice effect by using the cut-in notice effect pattern decision table for losing, and cut in using the cut-in notice effect pattern decision table for the super reach jackpot when it becomes a super reach jackpot. A notice effect pattern of the notice effect may be determined. The same applies to the determination of the notice effect patterns of other notice effects (button notice effects).

FIG. 11-7(C) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of group announcement effect (display of group image). According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), if the super reach is lost, the
It is determined at a rate of 0%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot, execution is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, there is one type of notice effect pattern related to the group notice effect (notice effect pattern “YEP-
B”), the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH, when it is determined to execute the group notice effect, sets the notice effect pattern “YEP-
B” is determined. In addition, when super reach does not occur, execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed).

Fig. 11-7 (D) shows the determination ratio of execution or non-execution of the button announcement effect (display of button image → press → display of weak cut-in image, or display of button image → press → display of strong cut-in image). An example. According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (D), if the super reach is lost, the execution is determined at a rate of 10%, and if the super reach is a big hit, the execution is 50.
Determined by percentage. In addition, when super reach does not occur, execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed).

The pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH determines the announcement effect pattern (“YEP-C1”, “YEP-C2”) related to the button announcement effect when it is determined to execute the button announcement effect. FIG. 11-7(E) is an example of the determination ratio of the announcement effect patterns (“YEP-C1”, “YEP-C2”) related to the button announcement effect when it is decided to execute the button announcement effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (E), when the super reach is lost, the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 90%, and the notice effect pattern "Y
EP-C2” is determined at a rate of 10%. Also, in the event of a super reach jackpot,
The notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP
-C2" at a rate of 90%.

FIG. 11-7(F) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the character object announcement effect (action of the character object). According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (F), if the super reach is lost, the
%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot, execution is determined at a rate of 75%. In addition, there is one type of notice effect pattern related to the character object notice effect (notice effect pattern “YEP-
D”), the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH, when determining to execute the character product announcement effect, sets the announcement effect pattern “YE
PD” is determined. In addition, when super reach does not occur, execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed).

According to FIG. 11-7, in the case of super ready-to-win, up to four kinds of advance notice effects are executed.

In addition, the probability that the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image or display of a strong cut-in image) will be executed when it becomes super reach is {(probability of losing x super reach when losing Probability of becoming × Probability of executing cut-in notice effect when super reach is lost) + (Probability of being a big hit × Probability of being super reach when big hit × Cut-in notice effect is executed when super reach is a big hit) Probability)} / {(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when winning)}, in the case of a set value of 1, { (319/32
0 x 1% x 40%) + (1/320 x 90% x 50%)}/{(319/320 x 1%)
+(1/320*90%)}=about 42%.

Also, the probability that the group notice effect (display of the group image) will be executed when super reach is achieved is
{(Probability of losing × Probability of super reach when losing × Probability of group notice effect being executed when super reach is lost) + (Probability of being a big hit × Probability of becoming super reach when a big hit × Super Probability that the group announcement effect will be executed at the time of the reach jackpot)}/
{(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when winning)}, in the case of setting value 1, {
(319/320 x 1% x 20%) + (1/320 x 90% x 50%)}/{(319/
320*1%)+(1/320*90%)}=about 26%.

In addition, the probability that the button notice effect (button image display → press → weak cut-in image display, or button image display → press → strong cut-in image display) will be executed when super reach occurs is { (Probability of losing x Probability of super reach when missing x Probability of button notification effect being executed when missing) + (Probability of being a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting big x Super reach) Probability that the button notice effect will be executed at the time of a big hit)} / {(Probability of losing x Probability of getting super reach when losing) + (Probability of getting a big hit x Probability of getting super reach at the time of a big hit)} , for a set value of 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 10%) + (1/320 x 90% x 5
0%)}/{(319/320*1%)+(1/320*90%)}=about 19%.

Also, the probability that the role announcement effect (action of the role) will be executed when it becomes super reach is
{(Probability of losing × Probability of becoming super reach when losing × Probability of executing role announcement effect when losing super reach) + (Probability of becoming a big hit × Probability of becoming super reach when winning × Probability that the role announcement effect will be executed at the time of the super reach jackpot)
} / {(probability of losing × probability of becoming super reach when losing) + (probability of becoming a big hit × probability of becoming super reach when winning)}, in the case of setting value 1, {(319 /320 x 1% x 5%) + (1/320 x 90% x 75%)}/{(319
/320*1%)+(1/320*90%)}=about 20%.

FIG. 11-8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining item image effects. FIG. 11-9 is a display example of each item image. The pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH is shown in FIG.
A plurality of types of item image effects as shown in 8(A) can be executed.

The item image preview effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-A" shown in Fig. 11-8(A) is an item image suggesting that the cut-in preview effect (YEP-A1 or YEP-A2) will be executed This is the item image effect A that displays A. In other words, the item image A displayed in the item image effect A can identify the type of preview effect to be executed (specifically, the cut-in preview effect).

In the item image effect A, depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image A,
The intensity of suggestion (reliability level) as to whether or not the cut-in announcement effect will be executed is different.

Specifically, the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image A in the first display mode is
Suggests with low reliability whether the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGALV1 shown in FIG. 11-9(A) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the first display mode (level 1) of item image A (item images B to D are the same) is blue.

The item image A in the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image A in the second display mode indicates with moderate reliability whether or not the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGALV2 shown in FIG. 11-9(B) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image A. In this embodiment, item image A (item image B to item image D
), the second display mode (level 2) is green.

The item image A in the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image A in the third display mode suggests with a high degree of reliability whether the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. Item image 027SHIGALV3 shown in FIG. 11-9(C) is an example of item image A in the third display mode (level 3).
In addition, in this embodiment, item image A (item image B to item image D are the same)
The third display mode (level 3) of is red.

The item image preview effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-B" shown in FIG. This is image production B. In other words, the item image B displayed in the item image effect B can identify the type of preview effect to be executed (specifically, the group preview effect).

In the item image effect B, depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image B,
The strength of the suggestion (reliability level) as to whether or not the group announcement effect will be executed is different.

Specifically, the item image B in the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the group announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image B in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether the group announcement effect will be executed. Item image 02 shown in FIG. 11-9 (D)
7SHIGBLV1 is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image B.

The item image B in the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the group announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image B in the second display mode indicates with moderate reliability whether or not the group announcement effect will be executed. Item image 027S shown in FIG. 11-9 (E)
HIGBLV2 is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image B. FIG.

The item image B in the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the group announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image B in the third display mode suggests with a high degree of reliability whether the group announcement effect will be executed. Item image 027SHIGB shown in Figure 11-9 (F)
LV3 is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image B. FIG.

The item image preview effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-C" shown in FIG. is an item image effect C that displays . In other words, the item image C displayed in the item image effect C can identify the type of preview effect to be executed (specifically, the button preview effect).

In the item image production C, depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image C,
The strength of the suggestion (reliability level) as to whether the button announcement effect will be executed is different.

Specifically, the item image C in the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the button announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image C in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether the button announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGCLV1 shown in FIG. 11-9(G) is an example of the item image C in the first display mode (level 1).

The item image C in the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the button announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image C in the second display mode indicates with medium reliability whether the button announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGCLV2 shown in FIG. 11-9(H) is an example of the item image C in the second display mode (level 2).

The item image C in the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the button announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image C in the third display mode suggests with a high degree of reliability whether the button announcement effect will be executed. Item image 027S shown in FIG. 11-9 (I)
HIGCLV3 is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image C. FIG.

The item image preview effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-D" shown in FIG.
is an item image effect D that displays . In other words, the item image D displayed in the item image effect D can identify the type of preview effect to be executed (specifically, the character object preview effect).

In the item image effect D, depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image D,
The strength of the suggestion (reliability level) as to whether or not the character object announcement effect will be executed is different.

Specifically, the item image D in the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the character product announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image D in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether or not the character product announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SIGDLV1 shown in FIG. 11-9(J) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image D.

The item image D in the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the character product announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image D in the second display mode suggests with a medium level of reliability whether or not the character object announcement effect will be executed. Item image 02 shown in FIG. 11-9 (K)
7SHIGDLV2 is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image D.

The item image D in the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the character object announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image D in the third display mode suggests with a high degree of reliability whether or not the character object announcement effect will be executed. Item image 027SHI shown in Figure 11-9 (L)
GDLV3 is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image D. FIG.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH has the item image effect A (IGEP-A), the item image effect B (IGEP-B), the item image effect C (
IGEP-C) and item image effects D (IGEP-D), there are cases where none of the four types are executed, and cases where only one type out of the four is executed. , 2 out of 4, 3 out of 4
Sometimes it does one kind, sometimes it does all four kinds.

Moreover, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH can change the display mode of the item image displayed in the item image effect. In other words, the characteristic portion 027S
The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to H can execute an item image effect that changes the display mode of the item image. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH can change the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) during execution of the item image effect A. It is possible. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH can execute the item image effect A that changes the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2). be. Item image production B
, item image effects C, and item image effects D are the same.

FIG. 11-8(B) shows the contents of the item image effect execution mode pattern. The item image effect execution mode pattern is common to each item image effect (item image effect A, item image effect B, item image effect C, item image effect D). is determined (details will be described later).

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" shown in FIG. 11-8(B) is
This is an item image effect execution mode pattern in which no item image effect is executed. Since the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" does not execute the item image effect, the item image is not displayed.

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" shown in FIG. 11-8(B) is
This is an item image effect execution mode pattern that executes an item image effect, and is an item image effect execution mode pattern that does not change the display mode of the item image as it is in the first display mode (level 1).

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" shown in FIG. 11-8(B) is
An item image effect execution mode pattern for executing an item image effect, which is an item image effect execution mode pattern for changing the display mode of an item image from a first display mode (level 1) to a second display mode (level 2). .

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" shown in FIG. 11-8(B) is
An item image effect execution mode pattern for executing an item image effect, wherein the display mode of the item image is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2), and further, the second display mode ( This is an item image effect execution mode pattern for changing from level 2) to the third display mode (level 3).

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" shown in FIG. 11-8(B) is
An item image effect execution mode pattern for executing an item image effect, which is an item image effect execution mode pattern for changing the display mode of an item image from a first display mode (level 1) to a third display mode (level 3). .

Therefore, although the details will be described later, for example, the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined for the item image effect A (IGEP-A), and the item image effect B (I
GEP-B), the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" is determined,
About item image effect C (IGEP-C) Item image effect execution mode pattern "IG
EGP2" is determined, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined for the item image effect D (IGEP-D), the display mode of the item image A is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the first display mode. An item image effect A (IGEP-A) that changes the display mode of the item image C to the second display mode (level 2), and an item image effect C (IGEP-C) that does not change the display mode of the item image C to the first display mode (level 1). , an item image effect D (I
GEP-D) will be executed (the item image effect B will not be executed).

FIGS. 11-10 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the determination ratio of the item image effect. Figure 1
1-10(A) and FIG. 11-10(B) are examples of determination ratios of item image effect execution mode patterns of item image effect A (IGEP-A). Specifically, Figure 11-10 (A
) is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) when the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is executed in Super Reach. Fig. 11-10(B) shows the determination ratio of item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect A (IGEP-A) when cut-in notice effects (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) are not executed in Super Reach. is an example.

Figures 11-10 (C) and 11-10 (D) are item image effects B (IGEP-B)
is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern. Specifically, Figure 11-1
0(C) is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) when executing the group announcement effect (YEP-B) in super reach. Figure 11-10 (D) shows the group announcement effect (YEP-
It is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) when B) is not executed.

Figures 11-10 (E) and 11-10 (F) are item image effects C (IGEP-C)
is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern. Specifically, Figure 11-1
0 (E) is a button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) in Super Reach
It is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) in the case of executing. Figure 11-10 (F) is in super reach,
It is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when the button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is not executed.

Figures 11-10 (G) and 11-10 (H) are item image effects D (IGEP-D)
is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern. Specifically, Figure 11-1
0 (G) is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) in the case of executing the character product announcement effect (YEP-D) in super ready-to-win. Figure 11-10 (H) shows the character announcement effect (YE
It is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when PD) is not executed.

According to FIG. 11-10, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A suggesting the execution of the cut-in notice effect by displaying the item image A (that is, whether the item image effect A is executed or whether the item The display mode of the item image A when the image effect A is executed) is determined by whether or not the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is executed. In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B that displays the item image B and suggests the execution of the group notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect B is executed or whether the item image effect B is executed The display mode of the item image B in the case) is the group notice effect (YE
PB) is executed or not. In addition, an item image effect execution mode pattern (that is,
Whether the item image effect C is executed or the display mode of the item image C when the item image effect C is executed is determined by whether or not the button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is executed. In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D suggesting the execution of the character product preview effect by displaying the item image D (that is, whether the item image effect D is executed or whether the item image effect D is executed The display mode of the item image D in the case where the character is displayed) is determined by whether or not the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) is executed.

As a specific example, the reliability of the suggestion of the cut-in notice effect for each display mode of the item image A displayed in the item image effect A, and the button notice effect for each display mode of the item image C displayed in the item image effect C. Explain the reliability of suggestions.

(Reliability of Suggestion of Cut-in Notice Effect by Display Mode of Item Image A)
According to FIGS. 11-10(A) and 11-10(B), the third display mode (level 3) is the final display mode of the item image A when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEG
P4" is determined. When executing the cut-in notice effect, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 50% (Fig. 11-10(A)).
When the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 10% (FIG. 11-10(B)). The reliability of the cut-in notice effect when the final display mode of the item image A in super reach is the third display mode is, for example, (when the cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach, the third
Probability that the item image A in the display mode is finally displayed) × (Probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach) / {When the cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach, the third display mode Probability that the item image A is finally displayed) × (probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach) + (when the cut-in notice effect is not executed in super reach) Item image A in the third display mode is Probability of final display)×(probability of not executing cut-in notice effect in Super Reach)}. When 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach, the cut-in notice effect when the final display mode of the item image A in super reach is the third display mode Reliability is (50% x 42%)
/{(50%*42%)+(10%*58%)}=about 78%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined. When executing the cut-in notice effect, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is used at a rate of 30%.
is determined (Fig. 11-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 20% (Fig. 11-10
(B)). Therefore, when 42% of the setting value 1 is used as the probability of execution of the cut-in notice effect in super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the second display mode in super reach The reliability of the performance is (30% x 42
%)/{(30%*42%)+(20%*58%)}=about 52%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined. When executing the cut-in notice effect, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is used at a rate of 20%.
is determined (Fig. 11-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 60% (Fig. 11-10
(B)). Therefore, when 42% of the setting value 1 is used as the probability of execution of the cut-in notice effect in super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the first display mode in super reach The reliability of the performance is (20% x 42
%)/{(20%×42%)+(60%×58%)}=about 19%.

(Reliability of Suggestion of Button Notice Effect by Display Mode of Item Image C)
According to FIGS. 11-10(E) and 11-10(F), the third display mode (level 3) is the final display mode of the item image C when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEG
P4" or "IGEGP5" is determined. When executing the button notice effect, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" or "IGE" is used at a rate of 70% in total.
GP5" is determined (Fig. 11-10 (E)), and 5% when not executing the button announcement effect
The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at the ratio of (Fig. 11-1
0 (F)). The reliability of the button announcement effect when the final display mode of the item image C is the third display mode in super reach is, for example, (item in the third display mode when the button notice effect is executed in super reach Probability that image C is finally displayed) × (
Probability that the button notice effect is executed in Super Reach) / {Probability that the item image C in the third display mode is finally displayed when the button notice effect is executed in Super Reach) × (Button notice in Super Reach) Probability of execution of effect) + (Probability of finally displaying item image C in the third display mode when button advance notice effect is not executed in super ready-to-win) x (Probability of not executing button notice effect in super reach) }
Calculated by When 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability of executing the button announcement effect in Super Ready-to-Wear, the reliability of the button announcement effect when the final display mode of the item image C is the third display mode in Super-Reach. is (70% x 19%)/
{(70%*19%)+(5%*81%)}=about 77%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 15% (Fig. 11-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the rate is 10%. Item image rendering execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined (Fig. 11-10 (F))
. Therefore, when 19% of the setting value 1 is used as the probability of executing the button announcement effect in Super Ready-to-Win, the final display mode of the item image C in Super Ready-to-Win is the second display mode. Reliability is (15% x 19%)/{(15%
x 19%) + (10% x 81%)} = about 26%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 10% (Fig. 11-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the rate is 65%. Item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined (Fig. 11-10 (F))
. Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability of executing the button announcement effect in Super Ready-to-Win, the final display mode of the item image C in Super Ready-to-Win is the first display mode. Reliability is (10% x 19%)/{(10%
x 19%) + (65% x 81%)} = about 3.5%.

11-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining various timings. Specifically, Figure 11-1
1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of various item images, the execution timing of various advance notice effects, etc. in the variable display of super reach.

In FIG. 11-11, T0 is the start timing of variable display. T1 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T2 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 11-9(A)) in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is any one of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image A is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) at T2.

T3 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 11-9(D)) in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image B is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) at T3.

T4 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 11-9(G)) in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is any one of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image C is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) at T4.

T5 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 11-9(J)) in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. If the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is any one of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image D is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) at T5.

T6 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 11-9(B)) in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, if the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect A is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP
4", the display mode of the item image effect A changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) at T6. In addition, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5",
At T6, the display mode of the item image effect A does not change (first display mode (level 1
) remains).

T7 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 11-9(E)) in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, if the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect B is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP
4", the display mode of the item image effect B changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) at T7. In addition, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5",
At T7, the display mode of the item image effect B does not change (first display mode (level 1
) remains).

T8 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 11-9(H)) in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, if the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP
4", the display mode of the item image effect C changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) at T8. In addition, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5",
At T8, the display mode of the item image effect C does not change (first display mode (level 1
) remains).

T9 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 11-9(K)) in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, if the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP
4", the display mode of the item image effect D changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) at T9. In addition, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5",
At T8, the display mode of the item image effect D does not change (first display mode (level 1
) remains).

T10 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 11-9(C)) in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect A is "IGEGP4",
At T10, the display mode of the item image effect A changes from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode.
When the display mode (level 3) is changed and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect A is changed from the first display mode (level 1) at T10. It changes to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change at T10 (the first display mode (level 1
) remains). Also, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "
IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change at T10 (remains in the second display mode (level 2)).

T11 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 11-9(F)) in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect B is "IGEGP4",
At T11, the display mode of the item image effect B is changed from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode.
When the display mode (level 3) is changed and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect B is changed from the first display mode (level 1) at T11. It changes to the third display mode (level 3). Note that when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change at T11 (the first display mode (level 1
) remains). Also, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "
IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change at T11 (remains in the second display mode (level 2)).

T12 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 11-9(I)) in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP4",
At T12, the display mode of the item image effect C changes from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode.
When the display mode (level 3) is changed and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect C is changed from the first display mode (level 1) at T12. It changes to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change at T12 (the first display mode (level 1
) remains). Also, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "
IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change at T12 (remains in the second display mode (level 2)).

T13 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 11-9(L)) in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP4",
At T13, the display mode of the item image effect D changes from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode.
When the display mode (level 3) is changed and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect D is changed from the first display mode (level 1) at T13. It changes to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change at T13 (the first display mode (level 1
) remains). Also, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "
IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change at T13 (it remains in the second display mode (level 2)).

T14 is the timing for erasing the item image A (the timing for using it as an item). That is, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP
2", the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP3", the item image A being displayed is deleted. When the item image A in the second display mode (level 2) is deleted and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5", the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is displayed. Delete the item image A of .

Further, T14 is also the timing of starting the execution of the inciting effect for inciting whether the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is to be executed. T15 is the timing of ending the execution of the above-mentioned fan effect. That is, T14-T15 is the execution period of the above-mentioned fan effect.

T15 is also the timing for starting the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). T16 is a cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2)
is the timing to end the execution of In other words, T15 to T16 are cut-in notice effects (
YEP-A1, YEP-A2) execution period.

T17 is the timing for erasing the item image B. FIG. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the item image B in the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is erased, and the item image effect B is executed. When the mode pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image B in the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is erased, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is set to "I
GEGP4" or "IGEGP5", the item image B in the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is erased.

Further, T17 is also the timing of starting the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether or not to execute the group announcement effect (YEP-B). T18 is the timing of ending the execution of the above-mentioned fan effect.
That is, T17-T18 is the execution period of the above-mentioned fan effect.

T18 is also the timing for starting the execution of the group announcement effect (YEP-B). T.
19 is the timing of ending the execution of the group announcement effect (YEP-B). In other words, T18
˜T19 is the execution period of the group announcement effect (YEP-B).

T20 is the item image C deletion timing. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the item image C in the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is erased, and the item image effect C is executed. When the mode pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image C in the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is erased, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "I
GEGP4" or "IGEGP5", the item image C in the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is erased.

Further, T20 is also the timing of starting the execution of the inciting effect for inciting whether to execute the button announcement effects (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T21 is the timing of ending the execution of the above-mentioned fan effect. That is, T20 to T21 is the execution period of the above-mentioned fan effect.

T21 is also the timing to start executing the button announcement effects (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T22 is the timing of ending the execution of the button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). In other words, T21 to T22 are button announcement effects (YEP-C1
, YEP-C2).

T23 is the item image D erasing timing. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the item image D in the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is erased, and the item image effect D is executed. When the mode pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image D in the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is erased, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is set to "I
GEGP4" or "IGEGP5", the item image D in the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is erased.

Further, T23 is also the timing of starting the execution of the inciting effect to prompt whether or not to execute the character announcement effect (YEP-D). T24 is the timing of ending the execution of the above-mentioned fan effect. That is, T23-T24 is the execution period of the above-mentioned fan effect.

Further, T24 is also the timing for starting the performance of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D).
T25 is the timing of ending the execution of the character product announcement effect (YEP-D). That is, T
24 to T25 is the execution period of the character product announcement effect (YEP-D).

11-12 and 11-13 are specific examples of various timings. Figure 11-12 (
In A), only the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed as the notice effect, and only the item image effect A (IGEP-A) is executed as the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" as the item image effect. (that is, item image production B (IGEP
-B), item image effect C (IGEP-C) and item image effect D (IGEP-D)
is an item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1"), an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of the item image A, the execution timing of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), and the like.

In FIG. 11-12(A), T2 to T6 are periods during which the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T6 to T10 is a period during which the item image A in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed. T10 to T14 is a period during which the item image A in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T14-T15 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect. T15-T16 is a cut-in notice production (
YEP-A1) is executed, that is, the period during which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 11-5(A)) is displayed.

In FIG. 11-12 (B), nothing is executed as the notice effect, and the item image effect is item image effect A (IGEP-A), item image effect C (IGEP-C), item image effect D (IGEP) -D) each item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2"
(Item image effect B (IGEP-B) is the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1"). It is a diagram.

In FIG. 11-12(B), T2 to T14 are periods during which the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T14-T15 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect. Note that the cut-in forewarning effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T4 to T20 are periods during which the item image C in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T20-T21 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the button announcement effect. Note that the button announcement effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T5-T23
is the period during which the item image D in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T23~
T24 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the character object announcement effect. Note that the character object announcement effect is not executed after the inciting effect.

In FIG. 11-13 (A), the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), the group notice effect (YEP-B), and the button notice effect (YEP-C1) are executed as the notice effect, and the item image effect is the item image effect. Image effect A (IGEP-A) and item image effect B (IGEP-B) are each executed with the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3", and item image effect C (IGEP-C) is the item image effect execution mode pattern. It is executed by "IGEGP4", and the item image effect D (IGEP-D) is the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEG
P2", item image A, item image B, item image C,
Display timing of item image D, cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), group notice effect (
YEP-B), an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing of the button announcement effect (YEP-C1), and the like.

In FIG. 11-13(A), T14-T15 is the execution period of the fanning effect for inciting whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect. The item image A is deleted at T14, but the display mode of the item image A immediately before being deleted is the second display mode (level 2). T15-T1
6 is the execution period of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), that is, the weak cut-in image 0
27SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 11-5(A)) is displayed. T17
˜T18 is the execution period of the fanning effect for inciting whether or not to execute the group announcement effect. Item image B
is deleted at T17, but the display mode of the item image B immediately before being deleted is the second display mode (level 2). T18-T19 is the execution period of the group announcement effect (YEP-B), that is, the period during which the group image 027SHYKE-GN (see FIG. 11-5(C)) is displayed. T20-T21 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the button announcement effect. The item image C is deleted at T20, but the display mode of the item image C immediately before being deleted is the third display mode (level 3). T21 to T22 are button announcement effects (YE
P-C1) execution period, that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU (FIG. 11-6 (A
)) is displayed (when the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed, push button 3
1B is operated, the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 11-6(B)) is displayed instead of the button image 027SHYKE-BU). T23
˜T24 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the character object announcement effect. The item image D is deleted at T23, but the display mode of the item image D immediately before being deleted is the first display mode (level 1). Note that the character object announcement effect is not executed after the inciting effect.

In FIG. 11-13(B), a button notice effect (YEP-C2) and a character notice effect (YEP-D) are executed as the notice effect, and an item image effect C (IGE
PC) is executed with the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" (
In other words, the item image effect A (IGEP-A), the item image effect B (IGEP-B), and the item image effect D (IGEP-D) are the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEG
P1”), the display timing of the item image C, the character announcement effect (YEP
-D) is an explanatory diagram for explaining execution timing and the like.

In FIG. 11-13B, T4 to T12 are periods during which the item image C in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T12 to T20 is a period during which the item image C in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T20-T21 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the button announcement effect. T21 to T22 are button announcement effects (YEP-C
2) is executed, that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU (see FIG. 11-6(C)) is displayed (when the push button 31B is operated while the button image 027SHYKE-BU is being displayed, the button image 027SHYKE - strong cut-in image 027 instead of BU
SHYKE-KCI (see FIG. 11-6(D)) is displayed) period. T24-T2
5 is the execution period of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D), that is, the period during which the movable body 027SH32 is operated (see FIGS. 11-6(E) to 11-6(G)). Figure 11-13 (
In the example of B), there is neither the display of the item image D suggesting whether or not the character object preview effect is to be executed, nor the execution of the inciting effect to incite whether the character object preview effect is to be executed. ) is running. Specifically, when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” is determined in the case where the character object announcement effect is executed (see FIG. 11-10 (G)), it is determined whether the character object announcement effect is executed. There is neither the display of the suggesting item image D nor the execution of the inciting effect inciting whether or not the character object announcement effect is to be executed, so that the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) is executed.

11-14 and 11-15 are S171 in the effect control process processing shown in FIG.
12 is a flowchart showing an example of effect determination processing (effect determination processing for determining an advance notice effect, an item image effect, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of . 11-15 are continuations of the flowcharts of FIGS. 11-14.

In the effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-14, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS100).
For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the effect control CPU 120 has 40% execution if the variation pattern is out of super reach (either variation pattern # 13 or # 14)
If the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (either variation pattern # 17, # 18), execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and the variation pattern is other than the above (variation pattern # 10, # 11, #12, #15, or #16), execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

Subsequent to step 027SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the cut-in announcement effect is to be executed (step 027SHS101). If it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027 SHS101; YES),
Go to step 027 SHS102. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect should be executed (step 027SHS101; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS105.

Following step 027SHS101 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in notice effect (that is, notice effect pattern) based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS102). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), CP for effect control
U120, if the variation pattern is out of super reach, the notice effect pattern "YEP
-A1" is determined at 80%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at 20%. Also, if the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 20%, and sets the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" to 8%.
Determined at 0%.

Following step 027SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 is step 027S
The notice effect pattern of the cut-in notice effect determined by HS 102 (notice effect pattern "Y
EP-A1” or the notice effect pattern “YEP-A2”) is set (step 027SH
S103).

Subsequent to step 027SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) in the case of executing the cut-in announcement effect (step 027SHS104). For example, FIG.
As shown in -10 (A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 0% and sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to 2%.
0%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is 30%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is 50%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IG
EGP5” is determined at a rate of 0%.

Subsequent to step 027 SHS101 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the item image effect A (IGEP-A) execution mode (
Item image effect execution mode pattern) is determined (step 027 SHS105). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 10% and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGE
GP2" at 60%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" at 20%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at 10%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at 0%.

Following step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105, C for effect control
The PU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) determined at step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105 (step 027SHS106).

Following step 027SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the group announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS110). For example, Figure 1
As shown in 1-7 (C), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution at a rate of 20% if the variation pattern is a super reach, and if the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot, executes 50. %, and if the variation pattern is other than the above, execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

Subsequent to step 027SHS110, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the group announcement effect should be executed (step 027SHS111). If it is determined that the group announcement effect is to be executed (step 027SHS111; YES), step 027S
Go to HS113. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect should be executed (step 027SHS111; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS115.

Following step 027SHS111, the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern "YEP-B" for the group notice effect (step 027SHS113).

Following step 027SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case of executing the group announcement effect (step 027SHS114). For example, Figure 11-10 (
C), the effect control CPU 120 controls the item image effect execution mode pattern "I
GEGP1" at 0%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" at 20%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" at 30%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at 45%, item image effect execution mode Pattern "IGEGP5
” at a rate of 5%.

Subsequent to step 027SHS111 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case where the group announcement effect is not executed (step 027SHS115). ). For example, Figure 1
As shown in 1-10(D), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 10% and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2".
60%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" 20%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" 10%, item image effect execution mode pattern "
IGEGP5” is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115, C for effect control
The PU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) determined at step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115 (step 027SHS116).

Following step 027SHS116, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS120). for example,
As shown in FIG. 11-7 (D), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution at a rate of 10% if the variation pattern is a super reach, and if the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot, execution is determined. Determined at a rate of 50%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, 0 for execution
Determined by percentage.

Subsequent to step 027SHS120, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the button announcement effect should be executed (step 027SHS121). If it is determined that the button announcement effect is to be executed (step 027SHS121; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS122. If it is not determined to execute the button announcement effect (step 027SHS121; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS125.

Following step 027SHS121 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of button announcement effect (that is, the announcement effect pattern) based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS122). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (E), the effect control CPU1
20, if the variation pattern is out of super reach, the notice effect pattern "YEP-C
1” is determined at 90%, and the notice effect pattern “YEP-C2” is determined at 10%. again,
If the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 10% and the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" at 90%.
to decide.

Following step 027SHS122, the effect control CPU 120 is step 027S
Notice effect pattern of button notice effect determined by HS122 (notice effect pattern “YEP
-C1" or the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2") (step 027 SHS1
23).

Subsequent to step 027SHS123, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) as a case of executing the button announcement effect (step 027SHS124). For example, Figure 11-1
As shown in 0 (E), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 5% and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to 10%.
, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" 15%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" 60%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEG
P5" is determined at a rate of 10%.

Following step 027SHS121 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) as a case where the button announcement effect is not executed (step 027SHS125). ). for example,
As shown in FIG. 11-10(F), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 20% and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 20%.
2" at 65%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" at 10%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at 5%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at 0%.

Following step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125, C for effect control
The PU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) determined at step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125 (step 027SHS126).

Following step 027SHS126, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character product announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS130). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (F), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution at a rate of 5% if the variation pattern is out of super reach, and executes if the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 75%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

Subsequent to step 027SHS130, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been determined that the character product announcement effect should be executed (step 027SHS131). If it is determined that the character object announcement effect is to be executed (step 027 SHS131; YES), step 02
Go to 7SHS133. If it is not decided to execute the character object announcement effect (step 0
27SHS131; NO), and proceeds to step 027SHS135.

Following step 027SHS131, the effect control CPU 120 sets the announcement effect pattern "YEP-D" for the character object announcement effect (step 027SHS133).

Subsequent to step 027SHS133, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) in the case of executing the character product announcement effect (step 027SHS134). For example, Figure 11-10
As shown in (G), the effect control CPU 120 executes the item image effect execution mode pattern "
IGEGP1" at 10%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" at 5%,
Item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" at 15%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at 60%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP"
5” at a rate of 10%.

Subsequent to step 027 SHS131 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) as a case where the character product announcement effect is not executed (step 027 SHS135). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-10(H), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 20% and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to 20%.
74%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" 4%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" 2%, item image effect execution mode pattern "I
GEGP5” is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135, C for effect control
The PU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-D) determined at step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135 (step 027SHS136). Then, this flowchart ends.

FIGS. 11-16 to 11-20 are diagrams showing examples of rendering operations related to the characteristic portion 027SH.
Specifically, FIGS. 11-16 to 11-20 show, in the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A),
Main scenes are shown as an example, Fig. 11-16 (A) → Fig. 11-16 (B) →
Fig. 11-16 (C) → Fig. 11-17 (A) → Fig. 11-17 (B) → Fig. 11-17 (C) →
Fig. 11-18 (A) → Fig. 11-18 (B) → Fig. 11-18 (C) → Fig. 11-19 (A) →
Fig. 11-19 (B) → Fig. 11-19 (C) → Fig. 11-20 (A) → Fig. 11-20 (B) →
The transition is made in the order of FIG. 11-20(C).

FIG. 11-16(A) shows a scene of reach in the variable display. Figure 11-16 (
B) is the scene that has developed into super reach (the scene of T1 in Figure 11-11). Figure 11-
16(C) is the opening scene of the super reach effect (the scene immediately after T1 in FIG. 11-11).

FIG. 11-17(A) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether item image A is displayed (FIGS. 11-11 and 11 -12 (A) just before T2). That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether the item image A is displayed immediately before the display timing (T2) of the item image A. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 similarly executes an item image display suggestion effect that suggests whether each item image is displayed immediately before the display timing of another item image such as the item image B or the like.

FIG. 11-17(B) shows a scene where the execution of the item image effect A has started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGALV1 in the first display mode (level 1) has started) (see FIG. 11-1
1 and scene T2 in FIGS. 11-12(A)).

In addition, an item image display suggestion display 027SH that suggests whether the item image A is displayed
Regarding the relationship between IGA-SHI and item image A, item image display suggestion display 027S
When HIGA-SHI is displayed, item image A may be displayed and item image A may not be displayed. Further, the item image A may always be displayed when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed. Further, the item image A may be displayed when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. Also, item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGA-SHI is displayed more
The item image A may be displayed more easily than when SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. In addition, there are multiple types of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI, and the ratio of whether or not item image A is displayed depends on which type of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed. It can be different. Item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGB-SH suggesting whether item image B is displayed
I and item image B, item image display suggestive display 027SHIGC-SHI suggesting whether item image C is displayed, relationship between item image C and item image display, item image display suggesting whether item image D is displayed The relationship between the suggestive display 027SHIGD-SHI and the item image D is the same.

FIG. 11-17(C) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image A will change (FIGS. 11-11 and This is the scene just before T6 in FIG. 11-12(A)). That is, the effect control CPU 120 displays the item image change suggestion display 027SHIG, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image A will change, immediately before the change timing (T6) of the item image A.
Execute item image change suggesting effect using A-HEN. In addition, CPU12 for production control
Similarly, immediately before the change timing of other item images such as item image B, 0 is
An item image change suggesting effect is executed to suggest whether the display mode of each item image will change.

FIG. 11-18(A) is a scene (scene of T6 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12(A)) in which the item image effect A has changed to the second display mode (level 2).

Note that the item image change suggestion display 0 that suggests whether the display mode of the item image A will change
Regarding the relationship between 27SHIGA-HEN and item image A, when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed, there are cases where the display mode of item image A changes and cases where the display mode of item image A does not change. You may do so. again,
The display mode of the item image A may always change when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed. In addition, item image change suggestion display 027S
The display mode of the item image A may change when HIGA-HEN is not displayed. Further, the display mode of the item image A may be changed more easily when the item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed than when the item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN is not displayed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN, and whether or not the display mode of item image A changes depending on which type of item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed is determined. Different ratios may be used. Item image change suggestion display 027SHIGB-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of item image B will change and item image B
relationship between item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGC-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of item image C will change and item image C, item image change suggestion suggesting whether the display mode of item image D will change Display 027 SHIGD-HEN and item image D
The same is true in relation to

FIG. 11-18(B) shows an item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN that suggests whether the display mode of item image A will change, as in the scene of FIG. 11-17(C). is being performed (the scene immediately before T10 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12(A)). FIG. 11-18(C) is a scene (scene of T10 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12(A)) in which the item image effect A has changed to the third display mode (level 3).

FIG. 11-19(A) shows execution (starting) of an inciting effect prompting whether or not to execute a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), which is a notice effect corresponding to item image A. This is the scene (the scene immediately before T14 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12(A)) displaying the hype effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI. That is, production control CPU12
0 is the execution start timing (T14) of the fanning effect to incite whether to execute the cut-in notice effect.
Immediately before , the hype production start display 027 SHIGA-KAI is displayed. In addition, C for production control
Similarly, the PU 120 displays the start of the fanning effect indicating that each of the fanning effects will be executed (started) immediately before the timing of starting the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute other notice effects such as the group notice effect. indicate.

Figures 11-19 (B) to 11-20 (B) show a scene in which a fanning effect 027 SHIGA-AO is being performed (Fig. 11-11 and scenes from T14 to T15 in FIG. 11-12(A)). Figure 1
In the example of 1-19(B) to FIG. 11-20(B), the countdown display 027SHIGA-AO that counts down to the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect is performed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanning effect to prompt whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect immediately before the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect. Note that the effect control CPU 120 similarly executes a fanning effect to prompt whether or not to execute each of the advance notice effects immediately before the execution start timing of other notice effects such as the group notice effect.

FIG. 11-20(C) shows a scene where a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to item image A, is being performed, that is, a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-J.
This is a scene in which CI is displayed (scenes from T15 to T16 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12(A)).

It should be noted that there is an inciting effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI indicating that an inciting effect to incite whether or not to execute a cut-in notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, will be executed, and a notice effect corresponding to the item image A. Regarding the relationship with the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect, when the fanning effect start display 027 SHIGA-KAI is displayed,
There may be a case where the fanning effect is executed and a case where the fanning effect is not executed. again,
When the hype effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed, the hype effect may always be executed. In addition, there may be a case where the fanning effect is executed when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. In addition, the start display 027SH of the fanning production
When IGA-KAI is displayed, it may be easier to execute the stirring effect than when the stirring effect start display 027 SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. In addition, the start display 0
There are multiple types of 27SHIGA-KAI, and which type of start display 027S
Depending on whether or not HIGA-KAI is displayed, the ratio of whether or not to execute the fanning effect may differ. A stirring effect start display 027 SHIGB-KAI indicating that a stirring effect is to be executed to incite whether or not to execute a group preview effect that is a preview effect corresponding to the item image B, and a group preview effect that is a preview effect corresponding to the item image B. button, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image C, and the start display 027SHIGC-KAI indicating that the stimulus effect prompting whether to execute the button notice effect will be executed, and the item Image C.
The relation with the inciting effect to incite whether to execute the button inciting effect, which is the inciting effect corresponding to the item image D, and the inciting effect inciting whether to execute the role object inciting effect, which is the inciting effect corresponding to the item image D. The same applies to the relationship between the hype effect start display 027 SHIGD-KAI shown and the hype effect for inciting whether or not to execute the character announcement effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D.

In addition, regarding the relationship between the inciting effect to incite whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, and the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, the inciting effect was executed. In some cases, there may be cases where the cut-in notice effect is executed and cases where the cut-in notice effect is not executed (see FIG. 11-12(B)).
Also, when the fanning effect is executed, the cut-in notice effect may be always executed. Also, the cut-in notice effect may be executed when the fanning effect is not executed. Also, the cut-in notice effect may be executed more easily when the fan effect is executed than when the fan effect is not executed. In addition, there are multiple types of stimulating effects,
The ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect may differ depending on which type of fan effect is executed. The relationship between the inciting effect to incite whether or not to execute the group notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image B, and the group notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image B, and the notice effect corresponding to the item image C. The relationship between the inciting effect to incite whether to execute the button advance notice effect and the button advance notice effect as the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image C, and to incite whether to execute the role announcement effect as the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D. The same applies to the relationship between the fanning effect and the character object preview effect that is the preview effect corresponding to the item image D.

FIGS. 11-21 to 11-30 are diagrams showing examples of rendering operations related to the characteristic portion 027SH.
Specifically, FIGS. 11-21 to 11-30 show, in the example shown in FIG. 11-13(A),
Main scenes are shown as an example, Fig. 11-21 (A) → Fig. 11-21 (B) →
Fig. 11-21 (C) → Fig. 11-22 (A) → Fig. 11-22 (B) → Fig. 11-22 (C) →
Fig. 11-23 (A) → Fig. 11-23 (B) → Fig. 11-23 (C) →, …, Fig. 11-29 (
A) → Figure 11-29 (B) → Figure 11-29 (C) → Figure 11-30 (A) → Figure 11-30 (
B)→Transition in the order of FIG. 11-30(C).

FIG. 11-21(A) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether item image A is displayed (T2 in FIG. 11-11 The scene just before). FIG. 11-21(B) shows that the execution of the item image effect A has started (that is, the item image 027SHIGAL in the first display mode (level 1)
This is the scene (the scene of T2 in FIG. 11-11) where the display of V1 is started).

FIG. 11-21(C) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGB-SHI that suggests whether item image B is displayed (T3 in FIG. 11-11 The scene just before). FIG. 11-22(A) shows that the execution of the item image effect B has started (that is, the item image 027SHIGBL in the first display mode (level 1)
This is the scene (the scene of T3 in FIG. 11-11) where the display of V1 is started).

FIG. 11-22(B) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGC-SHI that suggests whether item image C is displayed (T4 in FIG. 11-11 The scene just before). FIG. 11-22(C) shows that the execution of the item image effect C has started (that is, the item image 027SHIGCL in the first display mode (level 1)
This is the scene (the scene of T4 in FIG. 11-11) where the display of V1 is started).

FIG. 11-23(A) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGD-SHI that suggests whether item image D is displayed (T5 in FIG. 11-11 The scene just before). FIG. 11-23(B) shows that the execution of the item image effect D has started (that is, the item image 027SHIGDL in the first display mode (level 1)
This is the scene (the scene of T5 in FIG. 11-11) where the display of V1 is started).

FIG. 11-23(C) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image A will change (see FIG. 11-11 The scene just before T6). FIG. 11-24(A) is a scene (T6 scene in FIG. 11-11) in which the item image effect A has changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 11-24(B) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGB-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image B will change (see FIG. 11-11 The scene just before T7). FIG. 11-24(C) is a scene (scene of T7 in FIG. 11-11) in which the item image effect B has changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 11-25(A) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGC-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image C will change (see FIG. 11-11 The scene just before T8). FIG. 11-25(B) is a scene (scene of T8 in FIG. 11-11) in which the item image rendering C has changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 11-25(C) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGD-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image D will change (see FIG. 11-11 The scene just before T9). FIG. 11-26(A) is a scene (scene of T9 in FIG. 11-11) in which the item image effect D does not change.

FIG. 11-26(B) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect is performed using the item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGD-HEN that suggests whether the display mode of the item image D will change (see FIG. 11-11 This is the scene just before T13). FIG. 11-26(C) is a scene (scene of T13 in FIG. 11-11) in which the item image effect D does not change. It should be noted that the item image effect C is changed to the third display mode (level 3) in the scene (the scene of T12 in FIG. 11-11) before the scene of 9-26(C).

FIG. 11-27(A) shows execution (start) of a fanning effect to incite whether or not to execute a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), which is a notice effect corresponding to item image A. This is the scene (the scene immediately before T14 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13(A)) displaying the hype effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI.

FIG. 11-27(B) shows a scene in which the inciting effect 027 SHIGA-AO is being performed (Fig. 11-11
and scenes from T14 to T15 in FIG. 11-13(A)). FIG. 11-27(C) is a scene in which a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to item image A, is being performed, that is, a scene in which a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed. (
11-11 and T15-T16 of FIG. 11-13(A)).

FIG. 11-28(A) shows a group notice effect (YEP
-Inciting production start display 0 indicating that the inciting production to incite whether to execute B) will be executed (started)
27SHIGB-KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T17 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13(A)).

FIG. 11-28(B) shows a scene in which the inciting effect 027 SHIGB-AO is being performed (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 ( This is the scene from T17 to T18 in A). FIG. 11-28(C) shows a scene in which a group notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image B, is being performed, that is, a group image 027S.
The scene where HYKE-GN is displayed (T18 in Figures 11-11 and 11-13 (A)
~ Scene of T19).

FIG. 11-29(A) shows a button announcement effect (Y
EP-C1, YEP-C2) is to be executed (started). This is the scene just before T20 in A)).

FIG. 11-29(B) shows a scene in which the hype effect 027 SHIGC-AO is being performed (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 ( This is the scene from T20 to T21 in A). Figure 11-29(C) ~ Figure 11-
30 (A) is a button announcement effect (YEP-C1
) is being performed, that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed, and the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed as an example after the push button 31B is operated (FIGS. 11-11 and 11- 13 (A) scene from T21 to T22).

FIG. 11-30(B) shows a character announcement effect (YE
P-D) is executed (started) showing that the stimulus effect start display 027 SHIGD-KAI is displayed (Figs. 11-11 and 11-13 (A)
(the scene just before T23).

FIG. 11-30(C) shows a scene in which the inciting effect 027 SHIGD-AO is being performed (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (A) scene from T23 to T24). It should be noted that after the fanning effect, the character object preview effect, which is the preview effect corresponding to the item image D, is not performed (Fig. 11-13 (A)
reference).

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 11-16 to 11-30, each item image display suggestion display (027SHIGA-SHI, 027SHIGB-SHI, 0
27SHIGC-SHI, 027SHIGD-SHI) are common, but may be different for each item image. In addition, each of the fanning productions (027 SHIGA-A
O, 027SHIGB-AO, 027SIGC-AO, 027SHIGD-AO) are common, but may be different for each advance notice effect (that is, for each item image). Inciting production start display (027SHIGA-KAI) indicating the start of each inciting production corresponding to each advance notice production
, 027SHIGB-KAI, 027SHIGC-KAI, 027SHIGD-KAI)
are common, but may be different depending on which of the advance notice effects the fanning effect is to be started (that is, for each item image).

(Suggest setting value)
Next, suggestions for set values (see FIGS. 11-2(A) and 11-2(B)) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH suggests the setting value currently set by using the item image effect (for example, by using the item image). For example, the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH is shown in FIGS. 11-31 (A), FIG.
31(B), a fourth display mode (level 4) is provided as the display mode of the item image D in the item image effect D, and the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed. and the currently set setting value may be suggested.

(first example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31(C), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (operation of the movable body 027SH32), and transition. In addition, (regardless of the result of hit or miss), it may be suggested that the set value currently set is high (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Second example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (D), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) → miss, the currently set A high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or more) may be suggested for the current setting value.

(Third example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31(E), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (no movement of the movable body 027SH32) (Regardless of whether the result is hit or miss), it may be suggested that the currently set value is set to a high value (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Fourth example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (F), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) → failure, the currently set A high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or more) may be suggested for the current setting value.

(Fifth example)
Also, although illustration is omitted, when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → disappears (regardless of whether or not the character announcement effect (YEP-D) is executed), the currently set A high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more) may be suggested for the set value.
(Display timing of fourth display mode (level 4))

In the first example (the second to fourth examples may also be the same), the display timing of the item image D in the fourth display mode is not particularly limited (that is, it is displayed from the beginning). Alternatively, it may be displayed by changing from another display mode), but as an example, the display period may be lengthened so that the player can easily recognize it. Specifically, Figure 11-32 (
As shown as the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" in A), the item image D in the fourth display mode may be displayed from the beginning (T5 in FIG. 11-11). In addition, in FIG. 11-32(A), the fourth display mode is a gold color that generally makes the player recognize that the win is confirmed or high. When the possibility of becoming is not zero (for example, in the case of the second example), the fourth display mode may be a color or a pattern different from gold.

(An example of the determination ratio of the first example)
In the case of the first example, as the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) in the case of executing the role announcement effect (YEP-D),
Instead of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-10 (G), use the determination ratio as shown in FIG. As a determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of D (IGEP-D), Fig. 1
Instead of the determination ratio shown in 1-10(H), a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-32(C) may be used. 11-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines the item image effect execution mode pattern at the ratio shown in FIG. In 027SHS135, the item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 11-32(C).

In other words, there is no transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the non-execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) (see FIG. 11-32(C)), but the item image in the fourth display mode There is a case where there is a transition from the display of D to the execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (the movement of the movable body 027SH32 is present) (see FIG. 11-32 (B)), and the item image in the fourth display mode. There is a setting difference in the transition from the display of D to the execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) (
See FIG. 11-32(B)). In the example shown in FIG. 11-32(B), the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is determined at a rate of 1% when the current setting value is any of the setting values 1 to 3. and 15 if the current set value is any of the set values 4 to 6.
Determined by percentage.

According to the example shown in FIG. 11-32(B), display of the item image D in the fourth display mode→execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) occurs when the setting value is 1-3. setting value 4-6 is more frequent than That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 11-32(B), when the setting is high (for example, the set value is 4 or less), the fourth The frequency of transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) increases. Therefore, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the role announcement effect (YEP-D
) is executed (or that the frequency of transition is high) suggests that the currently set setting value is high (for example, a setting value of 4 or more).

The example shown in FIG. 11-32 (B) is super reach A (variation pattern # 13, #
17), even in the case of super reach B (variation patterns #14, #18), when the character effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IG
EGP6” can be determined (if it is any of the set values 1 to 3, it is determined at a rate of 1%, and if it is any of the set values 4 to 6, it is determined at a rate of 15%). However, the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP6” may be determined only when the character effect is executed in the case of super reach B (the character effect is performed in the case of super reach A). If it is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6
” may not be determined). In other words, in the case of super reach B,
Display of item image D in the fourth display mode → Execution of character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (movable body 0
27SH32 with action), there is a difference in settings, while in the case of super reach A, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the character announcement effect (YEP
-D) is executed (the movable body 027SH32 is operated) and there may be no setting difference.

(An example of the determination ratio of the second example)
In the case of the second example, for example, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) (operation of the movable body 027SH32) → big hit. There is no setting difference in , but the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the character announcement effect (YEP-D
) is executed (the movable body 027SH32 is operated)→off, and there may be a setting difference. For example, in the case of a super ready-to-win big hit, the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed is set to 1
6 common (for example, 20%), while setting the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed when the super reach is lost is set to the case of setting values 1 to 3 It may be different for values 4 to 6 (for example, setting values 1 to 3
1%, and 10% if any of the set values 4 to 6).

In addition, in the case of super reach B, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode →
There is a setting difference in the transition from execution presence of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (movement of the movable body 027SH32) to failure, while in the case of super reach A, the fourth display mode Display of item image D → Execution of role announcement effect (YEP-D) (movable body 02
There may be no setting difference in the transition from 7SH32 operation present)→off.

(An example of the determination ratio of the third example)
In the case of the third example, there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D). There may be a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the non-execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D). For example, the decision ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed is common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 10%), while the item image effect when the character effect is not executed. The determination ratio of the execution mode pattern “IGEGP6” may be different between setting values 1 to 3 and setting values 4 to 6 (for example, setting value 1
0.5% if the set value is any one of .about.3, and 3% if the set value is any one of 4.about.6).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fourth example)
In the case of the fourth example, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) → big hit, There may be a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the non-execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) to the failure. For example, super reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern #
17, #18), the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP6” when the character object effect is not executed is set to the same setting value 1 to 6 (for example, 5%), while the super reach is off (variation pattern #13 , #14), the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character object effect is not executed may be different between the setting values 1 to 3 and the setting values 4 to 6 (for example, , 0.5% if any of the setting values 1 to 3, and 3% if any of the setting values 4 to 6).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fifth example)
In the case of the fifth example, although details are omitted, for example, the item image D in the fourth display mode
Although there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of →the big hit, there may be a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the loss.

In the above description, an example of suggesting that the currently set value is set to a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more) has been described, but the target of the suggestion is not limited to the high setting. For example, the lowest setting (set value 1) may be negated (set value 2 or more), or set values 1 to 6 may be suggested. In other words, in the above description, an example was explained in which setting values 1 to 3 and setting values 4 to 6 are divided into two and the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern is different. to 6, and the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern may be changed, or the setting values 1 to 6 are each divided into six, and the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern is set. can be different.

(Regarding Modified Example of Game Machine Related to Characteristic Part 027SH)
Next, modified examples in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-32 will be described.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of execution start timing of each advance notice effect corresponding to each item image have been explained. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, the display start timing of the item images A to D is the display start timing of the item image A (T2)→the display start timing of the item image B (T
3)→Item image C display start timing (T4)→Item image D display start timing (T5). Execution start timing (T15
) → start timing of execution of group notice effect corresponding to item image B (T18) → start timing of execution of button notice effect corresponding to item image C (T21) → start timing of execution of character object notice effect corresponding to item image D (T24), and the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of execution start timing of each announcement effect corresponding to each item image match. However, the order of the display start timings of the item images and the order of the execution start timings of the advance notice effects corresponding to the item images do not have to match. For example, item image A → item image B is displayed in order,
The group announcement effect corresponding to the item image B→the cut-in announcement effect corresponding to the item image A may be executed in this order. Also, when item image A→item image B are displayed in order, there are cases where cut-in notice effect → group notice effect are executed in order, and group notice effect → cut-in notice effect in order. You may do so.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the display start timing of each item image is individually different has been described. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, item image A is T1, item image B is T2
, item image C is T3, and item image D is T4. However, the display start timing of each item image does not have to be different. For example, the display start timing of two of the four item images A to D may be the same.
The display start timings of three types of item images among the types of item images may be simultaneous, or the display start timings of all four types of item images may be simultaneous.

(Modification 3 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example was explained in which the change timing of each item image to the second display mode (level 2) is individually different. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, item image A is T
6. Item image B is T7, item image C is T8, and item image D is T9. However, the timing at which each item image changes to the second display mode (level 2) does not have to be different. For example, two of the four item images A to D may be changed to the second display mode (level 2) at the same time, or three of the four item images may be changed to the second display mode (level 2) at the same time. may be changed to the second display mode (level 2) at the same time, or all four types of item images may be changed to the second display mode (level 2) at the same time. The same applies to the change timing to the third display mode (level 3).

(Modification 4 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, the display mode at the start of displaying the item image A is always the first
Although it is the display mode (level 1), the display mode at the start of display may be the second display mode (level 2) or the third display mode (level 3). Item image B, item image C, and item image D are the same. As described above, when the item image D may be in the fourth display mode (level 4), the display mode at the start of display may be the fourth display mode (level 4).

(Modification 5 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above example, the display mode of the item image does not change at the timing after any of the advance notice effects are executed (that is, the change timing at which the display state of the item image changes is the example), which is earlier than the For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-11, none of the item images change at the timing after the earliest cut-in announcement effect is executed (after T15). However, the display mode of the item image may be changed at the timing after one of the announcement effects is executed.

(Modification 6 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above example, the item image is not newly displayed at the timing after one of the notice effects is executed (that is, the item image display start timing is the timing earlier than any notice effect is executed example) was explained. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-11, no item images are newly displayed at the timing after the earliest cut-in announcement effect is executed (after T15). However, the item image may be newly displayed at the timing after one of the announcement effects is executed.

(Modification 7 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example was explained in which the execution periods of a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect do not overlap, but the execution periods of a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect may overlap. In other words, the execution start timing of a certain notice effect → the execution start timing of another notice effect → the execution end timing of another notice effect → the execution end timing of a certain notice effect, or the execution start timing of a certain notice effect → other There may be a case where execution start timing of advance notice effect→execution end timing of certain advance notice effect→execution end timing of other advance notice effect.

(Modification 8 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image and the notice effect are one-to-one, such as item image A and cut-in notice effect, item image B and group notice effect, item image C and button notice effect, item image D and role notice effect. An example of correspondence has been described. In other words, as shown in FIG. 11-11, what can be executed based on the item image A being deleted (used as an item) is the cut-in notice effect, and the item image B being deleted. A group foretelling effect can be executed based on this, a button foretelling effect can be executed based on the item image C being erased, and a button foretelling effect can be executed based on the item image D being erased. explained that it was a role preview production. However, the item image and the advance notice effect do not necessarily have a one-to-one correspondence relationship.

For example, for one item image (for example, item image X), multiple notice effects (
For example, a cut-in notice effect, a group notice effect) may be associated. When item image X is associated with cut-in notice effect and group notice effect, only cut-in notice effect is executed based on item image X being erased, and item image X is executed. There are cases where only the group announcement effect is executed based on the erasing of . Note that the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect may be executed based on the deletion of the item image X.

Further, for example, one notice effect (for example, cut-in notice effect) may be associated with a plurality of item images (for example, item image X and item image Y). When the item image X and the item image Y are associated with the cut-in notice effect, the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X;
There are cases where the cut-in announcement effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image Y. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is deleted, the rate at which the notice effect is executed may be varied according to the type of the item image to be deleted. In the above example, in addition to the display mode of item image X and item image Y when they are deleted, the cut-in notice effect is executed depending on whether item image X or item image Y is deleted. different percentages may be used.

Further, for example, a plurality of item images (eg, item image X, item image Y) may be associated with a plurality of notice effects (eg, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect). When item image X and item image Y are associated with cut-in notice effect and group notice effect, only cut-in notice effect is executed based on item image X being erased. , the case where only the group notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, the case where only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image Y, and the case where the item image Y is In some cases, only the group announcement effect is executed based on the erasure. Note that when the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed based on the deletion of the item image X, or when the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are performed based on the deletion of the item image Y. may be executed. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is deleted, depending on the type of item image to be deleted, even if the rate at which the notice effect is executed or the proportion of the type of notice effect that is executed is changed good.

(Modification 9 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above description, the item image can specify the corresponding advance notice effect at the time of display start, but the item image may not be able to specify the corresponding notice effect at the time of display start. For example, the item image A corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is displayed in a display mode (for example, solid color) in which the corresponding notice effect cannot be specified at the display start timing, and the corresponding notice effect is displayed at the change timing. may be changed from an unidentifiable display mode (for example, plain) to a display mode (first display mode, second display mode, etc.) in which the corresponding advance notice effect can be specified.

(Modification 10 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which multiple item images of the same type are not displayed has been described, but multiple item images of the same type may be displayed. For example, when two item images A in the first display mode (level 1) are displayed side by side, the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) and the item image A in the second display mode (level 2) may be displayed side by side. When N item images of a certain type are displayed, the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed a maximum of N times.

(Modification 11 of characteristic portion 027SH)
Although the display mode of the item image changes in the above, the type of the item image does not change, but the type of the item image may also change. For example, the first display mode (level 1
) changes to the item image B of the first display mode (level 1), or when the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) changes to the item image of the second display mode (level 2) There may be cases where it changes to B. Note that when the type changes, such as when the item image A in the third display mode (level 3) changes to the item image B in the second display mode (level 2), the display mode is demoted (level 3 → level 2). There may be cases.

(Modification 12 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above description, there are four types of advance notice effects, and four types of item images corresponding to the advance notice effects. For example, in relation to Modification 8 described above, there may be two types of item images and five types of advance notice effects, or five types of item images and two types of notice effects. Also, one type of item image and one type of advance notice effect may be used.

(Modification 13 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example was explained in which the timing of erasing the item image is the timing of executing the inciting effect that agitates the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image, but the timing of erasing the item image is not limited to this. For example, the timing to delete the item image is
It may be the timing at which the announcement effect corresponding to the item image is executed. in short,
The item image may continue to be displayed during the execution period of the fanning effect, and may be erased at the start of execution of the notice effect (at the end of the fanning effect). Specifically, in FIG. 11-11, the item image A is replaced with T14 and replaced with T15, and the item image B is replaced with T17 and replaced with T18.
, the item image C may be erased at T21 instead of T20, and the item image D may be erased at T24 instead of T23.

(Modification 14 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image A is erased at the start of the fan effect (T14 in FIG. 11-11),
An example of not displaying during the execution period of the fanning effect (T14 to T15 in FIG. 11-11) or during the period of the cut-in notice effect (T15 to T16 in FIG. 11-11) (cut-in It is erased at the start of the notice effect (T15), and during the period of the cut-in notice effect (Fig. 11-1
An example of not displaying in T15 to T16) of 1) has been explained. That is, the item image A is erased by the start of the cut-in notice effect at the latest, and is not displayed during the cut-in notice effect. However, the item image A may be displayed during the cut-in notice effect period without being erased. In other words, the item image A may not be deleted even if it is used.
The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, and item image D).

(Modification 15 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In relation to Modified Example 14 described above, if the used item image A is not erased, it may be possible to recognize that the used item image A has been used. For example, if the display mode of the item image A immediately before starting the fanning effect that fuels the cut-in notice effect is the second display mode (level 2) (the first display mode (level 1) or the third display mode (level 3)), at the start of the fanning effect that incites the cut-in notice effect, the second display mode (level 2) → the fanning effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording ”, etc.), and at the start of the cut-in notice effect, the swaying effect execution mode → notice effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording “notice effect in progress” etc. is displayed). , at the end of the cut-in notice effect, the notice effect execution mode → the notice effect end mode (for example, a mode in which the color is grayed-down or monochrome, and the word "done" is displayed). That is, for the item image A, during the execution period of the fanning effect (from T14
T15) is set as the "enthusiastic effect execution mode", and during the execution period of the cut-in notice effect (T15 to T1
6) may be set as the "execution mode of notice effect", and after the end of the cut-in notice effect (from T16) may be set as "end mode of notice effect". The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, and item image D).

In addition, if the cut-in notice effect is not executed after the fan effect, at the timing of starting the execution of the cut-in notice effect, the fan effect execution mode → the notice effect non-execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the word "notice It is also possible to adopt a mode in which "effect not executed" or the like is displayed). In other words, for the item image A, during the execution period of the fanning effect (T14 to T15), it may be set to the "enthusiastic effect execution mode", and after the end of the fanning effect (T15 onwards), it may be set to the "notice effect non-execution mode". The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, and item image D).

The manner in which the fanning effect is executed may be common regardless of the type of item image. For example, it may be displayed in a plain color, with the words "inviting", or the like. The foretelling effect execution mode, the foretelling effect end mode, and the foretelling effect non-execution mode may also be common regardless of the type of item image.

Note that, instead of the above, the mode of execution of the fanning effect may correspond to the type of the item image. For example, the color may be grayed down, or the words "Inviting effect" may be displayed within the range where the pattern (see FIG. 11-9) corresponding to the type of item image can be recognized.
The foretelling effect execution mode, the foretelling effect end mode, and the foretelling effect non-execution mode may also be common regardless of the type of item image.

(Modification 16 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example of executing the notice effect after the execution of the fan effect (an example of executing the fan effect before the execution of the notice effect) was explained, but it is not necessary to execute the notice effect after the execution of the fan effect (notice effect It is not necessary to perform the inciting effect before the execution of ). That is, after the item image is used, the notice effect may be executed without executing the fan effect.

(Modification 17 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above description, the item image effect (item image display) and the notice effect are executed during the super ready-to-win effect, but the item image effect and the notice effect may be executed during other periods. For example, the flow may be: start variable display → start display of item image A → reach → erase item image A → execute cut-in notice effect, or start variable display → start display of item image A → reach → super reach. → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect, or start variable display → Reach → Start display of item image A → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect. The flow may be: start of variable display→ready→start of display of item image A→development to super reach→erasure of item image A→execution of cut-in notice effect.

(Modification 18 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image effect (display of the item image) and the notice effect are executed during one variation, but the item image effect and the notice effect may be executed over a plurality of changes.

For example, during one fluctuation, all the necessary item images (item images that have been determined to be displayed) are displayed, and during the other fluctuation after the next fluctuation, all the item images being displayed are erased. It is also possible to execute all of the advance notice effects (the notice effects determined to be executed). For example, display of item image A, item image B, and item image C is started at the first variation → during the variation after some variation (for example, during any variation from the second to fourth variation), the item image A, The flow is such that the item images B and C are all erased (each item image can be changed between display start and disappearance) and the required advance notice effect is executed.

Also, for example, during a certain variation, all necessary item images (item images determined to be displayed) are displayed, and over a plurality of variations, the item images being displayed are sequentially erased to produce the required advance notice ( It is also possible to sequentially execute the advance notice effect determined to be executed. for example,
Item image A, item image B, and item image C are started to be displayed in the first variation, and item image A is deleted in the first variation (item image A can be changed between display start and deletion), and necessary notice effect. Execute (cut-in notice effect) → Delete item image B in 2nd change (Item image B can change between display start and disappear) and execute necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → 3rd change The flow of deleting the item image C (the item image C can be changed between display start and deletion) and executing the necessary notice effect (button notice effect), or the item image A, the item image B, the item Start displaying image C → Delete item image A at the second change (item image A can change between display start and deletion) and execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) → Item image at the third change Delete B (item image B can be changed between display start and deletion) and execute the necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → Delete item image C at the 4th change (item image C can be changed between display start and deletion) ) and execute the necessary notice effect (button notice effect).

Also, for example, the necessary item images (item images determined to be displayed) are sequentially displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and during another fluctuation after all the necessary item images have been displayed,
All of the item images being displayed may be erased and all the necessary notice effects (the notice effects determined to be executed) may be executed. For example, the display of the item image A is started in the first variation → the display of the item image B is started in the second variation → the item image C is started to be displayed in the third variation, and the 3
Item image A, item image B, and item image C are all erased at the time of change (each item image can be changed between display start and disappear), and the necessary notice effect is executed. Start displaying image A → Start displaying item image B in the second variation → Start displaying item image C in the third variation → Delete all item images A, B, and C in the fourth variation (each item image is changeable between display start and disappearance), and the necessary notice effect is executed.

In addition, for example, the required item images (item images determined to be displayed) are sequentially displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the item images being displayed are sequentially erased over a plurality of fluctuations to obtain the necessary advance notice. Effects (announcement effects for which execution has been determined) may be sequentially executed. for example,
It is necessary to start displaying item image A in the first variation → start displaying item image B in the second variation and delete item image A in the second variation (item image A can be changed between the start of display and deletion). Executes a notice effect (cut-in notice effect), erases item image B at the third change (item image B can change between display start and erase), and performs necessary notice effect (group notice effect)
For example, the item image A is displayed in the first variation → the item image B is displayed in the second variation → the item image A is deleted in the third variation (the item image A is displayed between the start and deletion ) and execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect), and at the 4th change, erase the item image B (item image B can change between display start and erase) and perform the necessary notice effect ( This is the flow of executing the group announcement effect).

(Modification 19 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (see FIGS. 9 and 11-14), but the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161)
may determine the item image within. Variable display start setting process (step S1
71), the item image is determined based on whether or not the notice effect is executed and the variation pattern (see FIGS. 11-10). In the case of determining the item image, the received pattern designation command (a production control command indicating whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the judgment result of the jackpot type (probable variation, non-probability variation, or sudden probability)) and variation The item image may be determined based on the content of the category designation command (the effect control command indicating the category (type) of the determined variation pattern). In addition, a plurality of item images may be collectively determined in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one item image may be decided in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of each start winning. . That is, one variation may be associated with a plurality of item images, or each variation may be associated with one item image.

(Modification 20 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, after the item image is displayed, as an effect when using the item image, an example of executing a notice effect corresponding to the type of item image used was explained, but the notice effect corresponding to the type of item image used There may be cases where a different type of advance notice effect is executed. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-11, it is the cut-in notice effect that can be executed based on the item image A being erased, but the group notice effect is executed based on the item image A being erased. may be executed. Further, as an example related to Modification 8, a plurality of advance notice effects (for example,
cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) are associated, the plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) based on the deletion of the item image X
There may be cases where a different announcement effect (for example, character object announcement effect, etc.) is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve his or her interest. In addition, in a mode in which a different type of notice effect from the type of item image used may be executed, a different type of notice effect from the type of item image used is executed. In this case, the degree of expectation for the big win may be higher than in the case where the announcement effect corresponding to the type of item image used is executed.

(Modification 21 of characteristic portion 027SH)
Suggestion of set values has been described with reference to FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32, but the suggestion of set values is not limited to this.

For example, in relation to Modification 1 described above, the order of the display start timings of the item images and the order of the execution start timings of the advance notice effects corresponding to the item images are determined at the ratio of determining whether or not to match. A setting difference may be provided, and a setting value may be suggested in relation to whether the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect match. As an example, if the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the notice effect are matched, it is set to 95% when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less),
If the setting is high (for example, 4 or more), it is set to 85%. A high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or more) may be suggested. In other words, the rule regarding the above order (in principle, the order is the same) is broken more frequently with high settings (5% with low settings, 15% with high settings), so the rule break (frequency of rule break) causes high settings. You may suggest.

In addition, in relation to the above-described modification 2, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the display start timing of a plurality of item images is simultaneous, and the display start timing of a plurality of item images is related to whether the display start timing is simultaneous. and may suggest a set value. As an example, the percentage of simultaneous display start timings for multiple item images is set to 5% for low settings (e.g., 3 or less) and 15% for high settings (e.g., 4 or more). A high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more) may be suggested when the change timings of a plurality of item images match (or match frequently). In other words, the rule regarding the display start timing (in principle, not at the same time) is broken more frequently with high setting (5% with low setting, 15% with high setting), so the rule break (frequency of rule break) A setting may be suggested. Similarly, in relation to Modification 3 described above, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the change timings of a plurality of item images are simultaneous, and whether or not the change timings of a plurality of item images are simultaneous is determined. It may be related and suggest a setting value.

In addition, in relation to the above-described modification 4, setting differences are provided in the determination ratio of the display mode at the start of displaying the item image, and the setting value is suggested in relation to the display mode at the start of displaying the item image. good too. As an example, the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the first display mode (level 1) or the second display mode (level 2), and the ratio of the second display mode (level 2) is set to a low setting (for example, 3 or less), 3%, high setting (e.g., 4 or more), 9%, and the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the second display mode (level 2). (Alternatively, the high frequency of the second display mode (level 2)) may suggest a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or higher). In other words, the frequency with which the rule regarding the display mode at the start of the display of the item image (in principle, the first display mode (level 1)) is broken is higher with the high setting (3% with the low setting, 9% with the high setting), A high setting may be suggested by rule breaking (the frequency of rule breaking).

Also, the setting value may be suggested in the advance notice effect. For example, for strong cut-in images (Fig. 11-5 (B), etc.), normal strong cut-in images (appearance of characters A and B, etc.), special strong cut-in images (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the types of strong cut-in images, the setting values may be suggested in the strong cut-in images. Specifically, for example, after deciding to execute a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) that displays a strong cut-in image, if the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), "normal strong cut-in image ” is determined at a rate of 95% and “special strong cut-in image” at a rate of 5%. "strong cut-in image" may be determined at a rate of 20%. In other words, a cut-in notice effect that displays a strong cut-in image (YEP-A
In 2), the display of the "special strong cut-in image" (or the frequent display of the "special strong cut-in image") is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more). You may suggest that

Also, for example, for group images (FIG. 11-5(C), etc.), two types of group images, a normal group image (character A group) and a special group image (character B group), are prepared. A setting value may be suggested in the group images by providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of . Specifically, for example, after determining to execute the group announcement effect (YEP-B), the low setting (
For example, 3 or less), 95% for "normal group images" and 5% for "special group images"
If the setting is high (e.g., 4 or more), the "normal group image" is 80%
, a "special group image" may be determined at a rate of 20%. In other words, in the group preview effect (YEP-B) for displaying the group images, the display of the "special group images" (or the frequent display of the "special group images") is a high setting. (For example, a set value of 4 or more) may be suggested.

Moreover, in super reach, you may make it suggest a setting value. For example, for super reach B (variation patterns #16, #18), normal super reach effects (battle effects in background 1, etc.), special super reach effects (battle effects, etc. in background 2)
By preparing two types of super ready-to-reach productions and setting a difference in the determination ratio of the type of super ready-to-win production of super ready-to-reach B, the set value may be suggested in the super ready-to-reach production of super ready-to-reach B. . Also, it may suggest a set value in relation to the big win. For example, two types of fanfare effects, a normal fanfare effect and a special fanfare effect, are prepared for the start effect (fanfare effect) of the big win game state of the third big win (see FIG. 11-2), and the fanfare effect in the third big win. A set value may be suggested in the fanfare effect in the third big win by providing a set difference in the determination ratio of the type of .

Also, the item image may indicate that the setting value will be suggested later. For example, the item image may suggest that the setting value is suggested in the advance notice effect. As an example, if it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" that suggests a setting value, and if a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect is performed (e.g., the wording "
Notice with setting suggestions? , etc.) may be displayed. In other words, for the item image A in the above mode, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect will be performed, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, the cut-in notice effect will be a special strong cut-in image " is suggested to be displayed. As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, a mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, the item image A may be displayed in a mode in which the text "Advance notice with setting suggestion!" In other words, the item image A in the above mode suggests that a cut-in forewarning effect is to be performed and a "special strong cut-in image" is to be displayed in the cut-in forewarning effect.

In addition, the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 11-4 may be different effect etc. The item image may indicate that the suggestion is made.

In addition, it is also possible to suggest that the setting value will be suggested later by means other than the item image. In other words, the item image may not suggest that setting values will be suggested later. For example, it may be suggested that the setting value is suggested in the advance notice effect by the fan effect of the advance notice effect. As an example, if it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" that suggests a setting value, and if a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect may be performed (for example, a mode in which a wording such as "Advance notice with setting suggestion?" is displayed in the vicinity of the countdown number) may be executed. In other words, in the above-described mode of fanning effect, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect will be performed, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, a "special strong cut-in image" will be displayed in the cut-in notice effect. It is suggested to display As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, a mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, it is possible to execute a stimulating effect such as a mode in which words such as "Advance notice with setting suggestions!" are displayed near the countdown numbers. In other words, the above-described mode of fanning effect suggests that a cut-in forewarning effect is to be performed and a "special strong cut-in image" is to be displayed in the cut-in forewarning effect.

It should be noted that it is also possible not to suggest at all that the setting value will be suggested later. in short,
Setting values may be suggested without suggesting anything in advance (without suggesting the item image, without suggesting anything other than the item image.

It should be noted that "suggestion of set value" only makes the user recognize that there is a high possibility that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range), and that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range). may not be definitely reported, and it may be definitely reported that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range). For example, for a certain effect or a certain display, etc., by not deciding when it is a low setting (for example, set value 3 or less), the effect or display etc. can be set at high setting (for example, set value 4 or less) It will definitely notify you of something.

(Application to other equipment)
In the above, an example of application to a pachinko game machine has been described, but application to a slot machine is also possible. For example, in a certain state (for example, a non-advantageous state), periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range), whether to transition to another state (for example, an advantageous state) than normal In a slot machine that draws lots with a high probability, in a period of high probability that periodically visits,
It is possible to execute multiple types of notice effects with different expectations of transitioning to another state, and in the period before the high probability period, an item image that can identify the type of notice effect to be executed is displayed. In addition to being displayable, the rate at which the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is executed after the item image is displayed may differ depending on the display mode of the item image.

Alternatively, in a slot machine that draws with a high probability whether a first advantageous state (e.g., CZ, bonus game, etc.) transitions to a second advantageous state (e.g., AT state, ART state, etc.), the first Second period of advantageous state (for example, the second half of the first advantageous state period ~
In the period of the final stage), it is possible to execute a plurality of types of notice effects with different expectations of transition to the second advantageous state, and in the first period before the second period of the first advantageous state, It is possible to display an item image that can specify the type of the announcement effect to be executed, and after the item image is displayed according to the display mode of the item image, the announcement effect of the type specified by the item image is executed. Different ratios may be used.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 027SH)
(Means 1 related to characteristic part 027SH)
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) is provided with an effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing an effect, and the effect execution means is , within a predetermined period (for example, T15 to T16, T18 to T shown in FIG. 11-11
19, T21-T22, T24-T25, the period before the period in which the lottery is performed with high probability, etc.), multiple types of advance notice effects (for example, multiple types of notice effects shown in Figure 11-4) are executed. A specific display (for example, FIG. 1
1-9 (A) to (L), a plurality of types of item images, etc.) are displayed before the predetermined period (for example, the item image effect shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), etc.) can be executed, and the rate at which content advantageous to the player is notified differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect executed within the predetermined period (for example, shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) to (F) , the degree of expectation for a big hit is different), and there are times when the forewarning effect of the type specified by the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed and when it is not executed (for example, FIG. 11- 10
(A) (C) (E) (G) When the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" for displaying the item image is determined in the case of executing the notice effect, after the item image is displayed An item image effect execution mode pattern in which an item image is displayed when the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is executed and the notice effect of FIGS. 11-10 (B), (D), (F) and (H) is not executed "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5"
is determined, the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is not executed after the item image is displayed), and there are a plurality of display modes for the specific display (for example, FIG. 11-9 (A
) to (L)), the ratio of execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, FIG. 11-8(B) ,
As shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A) to (H), the proportion of execution of the announcement effect corresponding to the item image after the item image is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the item image. Specifically, the rate at which the notice effect is executed is such that the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the third display mode (level 3)>the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the second display. Mode (Level 2)> The display mode of the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is the first display mode (Level 1)).

According to the above gaming machine, since the ratio of execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display, the player pays attention to the display mode of the specific display, Increased interest in gaming.

(Means 2 related to characteristic part 027SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1, the specific display changes to a special mode corresponding to the execution period of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display). Possible (for example, for item image A, when the cut-in notice effect is executed (T1
5) can be changed to a "notice effect execution mode"), and the special mode of the specific display is common regardless of the type of the specific display (for example, common regardless of the type of item image) may

According to the gaming machine, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is being executed (that the item image is used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify that the specific display corresponds to the foretelling effect being executed and which specific display is the specific display corresponding to the foretelling effect being executed.

(Means 3 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
In the gaming machine of the means 1 and 2 above, the specific display can be changed to a special mode after execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display). (For example, for the item image A, at the end of execution of the cut-in notice effect (T
16) can be changed to the "notice effect end mode", etc.).

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to clearly notify that the announcement effect corresponding to the specific display has been executed (that the item image has been used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify that the specific display corresponds to the executed advance notice effect and which specific display corresponds to the executed advance notice effect.

(Means 4 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1 to 3, as the specific effect, a plurality of types of specific displays can be displayed within a specific period before the predetermined period (for example, T2 to T2 shown in FIG. 11-11 A maximum of four types of item images can be displayed at T14, etc.), and each type of specific display may be displayed in any display mode (for example, in the scene of FIG. 11-26 (C), the item image A is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), item image B is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), and item image C is displayed in the third display mode (level 3).
, and the item image D is displayed in the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the gaming machine described above, since attention is paid to the display mode of each type of specific display, interest is enhanced.

(Means 5 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 2 can execute the notice effect at a plurality of timings within the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-11, T15, T18, T21, T2
4), and the execution timing of the notice effect differs depending on the type of the notice effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11, cut The execution start timing of the in advance notice effect is T15, the execution start timing of the group notice effect is T18, the execution start timing of the button notice effect is T21, and the execution start timing of the character notice effect is T24. ), the timing when the specific display becomes the special mode varies depending on the type of the notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect specified by the specific display) (for example, the item image A is cut-in It can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of execution of the notice effect (T15),
The item image B can change to the "previous effect execution mode" when the group notice effect is executed (T18), and the item image C can be changed to the "previous effect execution mode" when the button notice effect is executed (T21). Yes, the item image D can change to the "notice effect execution mode" when the character object notice effect is executed (T24). It may be different depending on the type of advance notice effect to be provided).

According to the gaming machine described above, since the execution timing of the notice effect corresponding to the specific display is different, it is possible to reduce the complication of the effect.

(Means 6 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 1 to 5 is provided when the specific display capable of specifying the type of the advance notice effect is displayed before execution of the one notice effect, and when the notice effect is performed before the one notice effect is executed. (For example, in the example of FIG. 11-13(B), the item image B corresponding to the button notice effect is displayed before the button notice effect is executed. However, the item image D corresponding to the character product announcement effect is not displayed before the performance of the character product announcement effect is performed), and the specific display corresponding to the announcement effect is displayed before the one announcement effect is performed. The rate at which content advantageous to the player is announced differs between when the announcement effect is displayed and when the specific display corresponding to the announcement effect is not displayed before the execution of one of the announcement effects. B),
As shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A) to (H), when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed, and when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed Since the execution ratio of the notice effect is different from when the image is not displayed, when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed, the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed. When the item image is not displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win may be different as shown in FIGS. 11-7(A) to 11-7(F)).

According to the gaming machine described above, since attention is paid to the flow of the presentation, interest is improved.

(Means 7 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 6 can change the display mode of the specific display after displaying the specific display (see, for example, FIG. 11-8), and an effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display. (
11-17(C), item image change suggestion display using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image A will change, etc.). good too.

According to the gaming machine described above, since attention is paid to whether the specific display changes, interest is improved.

(Means 8 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 7 can execute variable display of identification information, and prefetch determination means (for example, a performance control CPU
120 (step S161), etc.), the predetermined period is a period corresponding to a plurality of variable displays, and the specific display may be displayed based on the prefetch determination. good. For example, one variable display may be associated with a plurality of item images, or each variable display may be associated with one item image.

According to the gaming machine described above, the degree of interest in the variation to be executed later increases, and the interest increases.

(Means 9 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 1 to 8 can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. It is possible to set one of the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 11-2 (A) and (B)), and the set value is suggested in at least a part of the forewarning effects among the plurality of types. You may For example, for strong cut-in images (FIG. 11-5 (B), etc.), normal strong cut-in images (appearance of characters A and B, etc.), special strong cut-in images (character A,
Appearance of C, etc.) may be prepared, and a setting value may be suggested in the strong cut-in image by providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of the strong cut-in image. .

According to the gaming machine described above, in addition to whether or not the notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, attention is also paid to whether the set value is suggested in the notice effect displayed after the specific display is displayed, so interest is improved. .

(Means 10 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. Any one of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-2 (A) and (B)), a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , may be displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to the gaming machine described above, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is to be executed, attention is also paid to the specific display regarding the indication of the set value, so interest is further enhanced. If there is no relationship between the item image effect in which the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed and the setting suggestion effect in which the set value is suggested, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above game machine, the item image effect may suggest execution of the setting suggesting effect, and since there is a relationship between the item image effect and the setting suggesting effect, interest is enhanced.

(Means 11 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. Any one of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-2 (A) and (B)), a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , may be displayed corresponding to the preceding notice effect to be executed, but may not be displayed corresponding to the setting suggesting effect to be executed.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming complicated and suppress the decline in interest. An item image effect that displays an item image corresponding to the notice effect before executing the notice effect,
If the setting-suggestion effect that suggests the setting value is associated with the effect, the effect may become complicated and the interest may be reduced. Since the item image effect and the setting suggesting effect are independent of each other, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(Means 12 related to characteristic part 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. It is possible to set one of the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 11-2 (A) and (B)), it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, and as the specific display The setting suggestion effect may be executed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32, an item image D (level 4) may be used to suggest setting values.

According to the gaming machine described above, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is to be executed, attention is paid to the specific display regarding the suggestion of the setting value, so the interest is further enhanced. If there is no relationship between the item image effect in which the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed and the setting suggestion effect in which the setting value is suggested, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above game machine, since the item image effect is also a setting suggesting effect, interest is improved.

(Means 13 related to characteristic part 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. Any one of set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-2 (A) and (B)), a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value can be executed, and the setting suggestion effect can be executed. may be different from the advance notice effect and the specific display. For example, the set value may be suggested by the performance mode (for example, background) of the super ready-to-win performance, or the set value may be suggested by the start performance (fanfare performance) of the jackpot game state.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming complicated and suppress the decrease in interest. If the notice effect and the item image effect are associated with the setting suggesting effect, the effect may become complicated and the interest may be reduced. Because it is independent from the , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 006SH)
Next, the game machine related to the characteristic portion 006SH will be described. The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 006SH is a gaming machine capable of playing games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 006SH includes game control means and effect execution means. Game control means is realized by the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11, for example. The effect execution means is realized by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12, for example. The effect executing means performs various effects (for example, various advance notice effects, present notice effects,
setting suggestion effect, etc.) can be executed.

The front view and the like of the pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic part 006SH are the same as those of the pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH (see FIG. 11-1). However, for convenience of explanation, the characteristic portion 027SH
The movable body 027SH32 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 according to is referred to as the movable body 006SH32 in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 006SH.

The jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 006SH is shown in FIG. 11-2 (
It is the same as the jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH shown in A). The jackpot probability (high probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 006SH is shown in FIG.
-2 Jackpot probability (high probability state) of pachinko gaming machine 1 according to characteristic part 027SH shown in (B)
is similar to Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 006SH may be provided with a small hit in the same manner as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH. will be described assuming that no small win is provided.

The type of jackpot (jackpot type) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 006SH is shown in FIG.
This is the same as the type of jackpot (jackpot type) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 027SH shown in 2(C). Also, the jackpot type distribution of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 006SH is the same as the jackpot type distribution of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D) and (E).

The content of the variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 006SH is variation pattern #1
Characteristic part 0 shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), except that 5 (small hit variation pattern) does not exist
It is the same as the contents of the variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to 27SH. Characteristic part 006SH
The determination ratio of the variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH shown in FIG. is the same as the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of

FIG. 12-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the advance notice effect. FIG. 12-2 is an example of the advance notice effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 006SH can execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects as shown in FIG. 12-1. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be specified by the advance notice effect pattern.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A1” shown in FIG. 12-1 is the cut-in notice effect (display of weak cut-in image) shown in FIG. 11-4. That is, the characteristic part 006S
The pachinko machine 1 related to H displays a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (for convenience of explanation, related to the feature part 006SH) as shown in FIG. In the description of pachinko machine 1, a weak cut-in image 006SHYK
E-JCI). Note that when the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" to be described later are not distinguished (or collectively), they are referred to as the notice effect pattern "YEP-A".

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A2” shown in FIG. 12-1 is the cut-in notice effect (display of strong cut-in image) shown in FIG. 11-4. That is, the characteristic part 006S
The pachinko machine 1 related to H displays a strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI (for convenience of explanation, related to the characteristic part 006SH) as shown in FIG. Strong cut-in image 006SHYK in the description of pachinko machine 1
(referred to as E-KCI).

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-B" shown in FIG. 12-1 is the group notice effect (display of group images) shown in FIG. 11-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 006SH has the group image 027SHYKE-GN (for convenience of explanation, the characteristic part In the description of the pachinko game machine 1 related to 006SH, the group image 006SHYKE-GN) is displayed.

The announcement effect of the announcement effect pattern “YEP-C1” shown in FIG. 12-1 is the button announcement effect (button image display→pressing→weak cut-in image) shown in FIG. 11-4. in short,
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 006SH displays button images 027SHYKE-BU as shown in FIGS.
(For convenience of explanation, the button image 006
SHYKE-BU) and weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (weak cut-in image 006SHYKE-JCI) are displayed. The weak cut-in image displayed in the button announcement effect may be different from the weak cut-in image displayed in the cut-in announcement effect. Note that if the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" and the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" to be described later are not distinguished (or collectively), the notice effect pattern "YE
PC”.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C2” shown in FIG. 12-1 is the button notice effect (button image display→pressing→strong cut-in image) shown in FIG. 11-4. in short,
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 006SH displays button images 027SHYKE-BU as shown in FIGS.
(button image 006SHYKE-BU), strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI (
A strong cut-in image 006SHYKE-KCI) is displayed. The strong cut-in image displayed in the button announcement effect may be different from the strong cut-in image displayed in the cut-in announcement effect.

The advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-D” shown in FIG. 12-1 is the character object advance notice effect (action of the character) shown in FIG. 11-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 006SH, as the notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-D", Figure 11-6 (E) (F) (
G), the movable body 027SH32 (movable body 006SH32) is operated.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-E” shown in FIG. 12-1 is a pseudo consecutive notice effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 006SH has a notice effect pattern "YEP-E"
As the advance notice effect, for example, a pseudo consecutive notice effect as shown in FIGS. 12-2(A), (B) and (C) is executed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-2(A), (B), and (C), after the temporarily stopped symbol 006SH-REP is stopped (temporarily stopped) as a middle symbol (symbol corresponding to the symbol display area 5C), , Re-variable display of the middle pattern is performed.

FIGS. 12-2(D), (E) and (F) relate to other advance notice effects (advancement notice effects), which will be described later in detail. In the following description, the pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic part 006SH
, as a notice effect, the notice effect patterns "YEP-A" to "YEP-
E" will be described as being executable.

FIGS. 12-3 and 12-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice effects.
FIG. 12-3(A) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the cut-in notice effect (display of weak cut-in image or display of strong cut-in image). According to the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), when the normal reach is lost (when the fluctuation pattern # 12), the execution is set to 1
Determined at a rate of 0%, and if the super reach is lost (if it becomes either variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and if it becomes a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern # 16), execution is determined at a rate of 30%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot (when either variation pattern #17 or #18), execution is determined at a rate of 30%. . In addition, if it does not become a reach (variation pattern # 10, #
11), execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed). It should be noted that the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the cut-in announcement effect is common to set values 1 to 6 (does not depend on the set value). The same applies to the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of other advance notice effects.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 006SH, when it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect, the notice effect pattern ("YEP-A1", "YEP-A") related to the cut-in notice effect
2”). FIG. 12-3(B) shows the notice effect patterns (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) of the cut-in notice effect when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect.
) is an example of the determination ratio. According to the example shown in FIG. 12-3(B), when the normal reach is lost, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 100%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 0%. determined by the ratio of If the super reach is lost, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the notice effect pattern "
YEP-A2” will be determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of a normal reach big hit, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 50%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A" is determined.
2” at a rate of 50%. In the case of a super reach jackpot, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is set at 80%.
Determined by percentage. Note that the decision ratio of the notice effect pattern of the cut-in notice effect is common to the set values 1 to 6 (does not depend on the set value). The same applies to the determined proportions of the notice effect patterns of other notice effects.

FIG. 12-3(C) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the group announcement effect (display of the group image). Since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern related to the group notice effect (the notice effect pattern “YEP-B”), the pachinko machine 1 related to the characteristic part 006SH, when it is determined to execute the group notice effect, performs the group notice effect. The notice effect pattern "YEP-B" is determined as the relevant notice effect pattern.

Fig. 12-3 (D) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the button announcement effect (button image display → press → weak cut-in image display, or button image display → press → strong cut-in image display). An example. FIG. 12-3(E) is an example of the determination ratio of the announcement effect patterns (“YEP-C1”, “YEP-C2”) related to the button announcement effect when it is decided to execute the button announcement effect.

FIG. 12-4(A) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the character object announcement effect (action of the character object). Since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern (the notice effect pattern “YEP-D”) related to the role notice effect, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 006SH decides to execute the role notice effect, the character The notice effect pattern "YEP-D" is used as the notice effect pattern related to the notice effect.
to decide.

FIG. 12-4(B) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect. Since there is only one type of notice effect pattern related to the pseudo continuous notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-E"),
When the pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic part 006SH determines to execute the pseudo continuous advance notice effect, it determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-E" as the advance notice effect pattern related to the pseudo continuous notice effect.

12-5 and 12-6 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the present box effect and the like. The present box presentation is an unopened present box image (for example, FIG. 12
-5(A) present box image 006SHPB-CL) is displayed, then the opened present box image (for example, present box image 006SH in FIG. 12-5(B)
PB-OP) is displayed (that is, the present box is opened). In this embodiment, when the present box is opened (when the opened present box image is displayed), one of the announcement effects shown in FIG. 12-3(E) is executed. There are multiple types of present box presentation patterns for the present box presentation, depending on the type of presentation presentation performed when the present box is opened (that is, which presentation presentation presentation is to be performed can be specified by the present box presentation pattern. is). In addition, Figure 12-5 (C) ~ Figure 12-5
(J) relates to another example and will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIG. 12-6(A), the present box effect pattern "PBP-A" is
This is a present box effect in which a cut-in announcement effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6(A), when the gift box is opened, the item image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (for example, the pachinko game related to the characteristic portion 027SH shown in FIG. 11-9(A), etc.) Item images A of machine 1 without "level" display, etc.) are displayed, and a cut-in announcement effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-6(B), the present box effect pattern "PBP-B" is
This is a present box effect in which a group forewarning effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6(B), when the gift box is opened, the item image corresponding to the group announcement effect (for example, FIG. 11
-9 (D), etc., in the item image B of the pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 027SH, etc.) are displayed, and the group announcement effect is executed.

The present box effect pattern "PBP-C" is, as shown in Fig. 12-6(C),
This is a gift box presentation in which a button announcement presentation is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6 (C), when the gift box is opened, the item image corresponding to the button announcement effect (for example, the pachinko machine related to the characteristic portion 027SH shown in FIG. 11-9 (G), etc.) 1 item image C without "level" display, etc.) is displayed, and the button announcement effect is executed.

The present box effect pattern "PBP-D" is, as shown in Fig. 12-6(D),
This is a present box presentation in which a character object announcement presentation is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6(D), when the gift box is opened, the item image corresponding to the character object announcement effect (for example, the pachinko game related to the characteristic portion 027SH shown in FIG. 11-9(J) etc. Machine 1 item image D
, etc.) are displayed, and the character product announcement effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-6(E), the present box effect pattern "PBP-E" is
This is a gift box effect in which a pseudo consecutive notice effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6(E), when the gift box is opened, an item image corresponding to the pseudo consecutive notice effect (for example, the item image displaying "again") is displayed, and the pseudo consecutive notice effect is displayed. executed.

As shown in FIGS. 12-5(A) and 12-6(A) to 12-6(E), an unopened present box image (present box image 006SHPB-CL) and an open present box The image (present box image 006SHPB-OP) is common regardless of the present box rendering pattern. In other words, the player does not know which announcement effect will be executed before the present box is opened in the present box effect.

FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the present box effect. Fig. 12-7(A) shows a present box presentation (present box presentation pattern "PBP-A") targeted for execution of the cut-in notice presentation (YEP-A) when executing the cut-in notice presentation (YEP-A). is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the Figure 1
According to 2-7 (A), in the case of a loss, the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined at a rate of 15%, and in the case of a big hit, the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined.
- Determine whether A) is executed at a rate of 90%. In addition, if the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is not executed, the presence of the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined at a rate of 0% (if the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is not executed present box effect (PBP-A) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7(A), the present box effect (PBP-A) corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed before the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed. A big hit is more likely to occur at that time than when the present box performance (PBP-A) corresponding to the cut-in foretelling performance (YEP-A) is not executed before the cut-in foretelling performance (YEP-A) is executed. That is, for example, according to the example shown in FIG. 12-7(A), in most cases (85%), cut-in notice effects ( YEP-A) is executed, whereas in the case of a big hit, cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed along with present box effect (PBP-A) in most cases (90%). Therefore, when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed with the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A), it is better to cut without the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A). A big win is more likely to occur than when the in-notice effect (YEP-A) is executed.

Fig. 12-7(B) shows a present box effect (present box effect pattern "PBP-
B”) is an example of the determination ratio of whether to execute or not. According to FIG. 12-7(B), if the result is a loss, the execution of the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined at a rate of 25%, and if the hit is a big hit, the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined. ) is executed at a rate of 90%. In addition, if the group notice effect (YEP-B) is not executed, the present box effect (P
BP-B) is determined at a rate of 0% (if the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is not executed, the present box effect (PBP-B) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7(B), similar to the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A), before execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B) When the present box effect (PBP-B) corresponding to the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is executed, it corresponds to the group announcement effect (YEP-B) before the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is executed. A big hit is more likely to occur than when the present box presentation (PBP-B) is not executed.

Fig. 12-7(C) shows a present box effect (present box effect pattern "
PBP-C”) is an example of the determination ratio of execution/non-execution. According to FIG. 12-7(C), if the result is a loss, the execution of the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined at a rate of 10%, and if the hit is a big hit, the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined. ) is executed at a rate of 60%. If the button notice effect (YEP-C) is not executed, the presence of the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined at a rate of 0% (the button notice effect (YEP-C
) is not executed, the present box effect (PBP-C) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7(C), similar to the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the gift box effect (PBP-A), before the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C) When the present box effect (PBP-C) corresponding to the button notice effect (YEP-C) is executed, the button notice effect (YEP-C) is executed before the button notice effect (YEP-C) is executed.
-C) is more likely to result in a big hit than when the present box presentation (PBP-C) corresponding to -C) is not executed.

Fig. 12-7(D) shows a present box effect (present box effect pattern "PB
PD”) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute. According to FIG. 12-7(D), if the result is a loss, the execution of the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the hit is a big hit, the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined. ) is executed at a rate of 80%. In addition, if the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) is not executed, the execution of the gift box effect (PBP-D) is determined at a rate of 0% (when the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) is not executed present box effect (PBP-D) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7(D), similar to the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the gift box effect (PBP-A), the performance of the character object notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. When the present box effect (PBP-D) corresponding to the character object preview effect (YEP-D) is executed before the character object effect effect (YEP-D) is executed, the character object effect effect (YEP-D) is executed. -D) is more likely to result in a big hit than when the present box presentation (PBP-D) corresponding to PBP-D) is not executed.

FIG. 12-7(E) shows a present box effect (present box effect pattern “
PBP-E”) is an example of the determination ratio of execution/non-execution. According to FIG. 12-7 (E), if the result is a loss, the presence of the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined at a rate of 25%, and if the hit is a big hit, the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined. ) is executed at a rate of 60%. If the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) is not executed, the execution of the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined at a rate of 0% (the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E
) is not executed, the present box effect (PBP-E) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7(E), similar to the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the gift box effect (PBP-A), the execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E) When the present box effect (PBP-E) corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed before the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed, the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E)
-E) is more likely to result in a big win than when the present box effect (PBP-E) corresponding to the item (PBP-E) is not executed.

FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting suggestion effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 006SH can execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects.

The setting suggesting effect of the setting suggesting effect pattern “SEP-ATU” shown in FIG. 12-8(A) displays, for example, a thermal character image 006SHSEP-ATU as shown in FIG. 12-8(B). It is a hot character production. As will be described with reference to FIG. 12-9, the hot character effect suggests a set value when losing, but does not suggest a set value when a big win.

The setting suggesting effect of the setting suggesting effect pattern “SEP-EYE1” shown in FIG.
6SHSEP-EYE1 is a normal eye-catching effect. In the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 shown in FIG. 12-8(C), the yukata of the character is plain. As will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-10, the normal eye-catching effect is executed when the super reach is lost (in the case of either fluctuation pattern #13 or #14), and the special eye-catching effect (described later) is executed. not, but suggests a set value.

The setting suggesting effect of the setting suggesting effect pattern “SEP-EYE2” shown in FIG.
It is a special eye-catching production that displays 6SHSEP-EYE2. In the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 shown in FIG. 12-8(D), the character's yukata has a goldfish pattern. As will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-10, the special eye-catching effect is executed when the super reach is lost (when either variation pattern #13 or #14 occurs) to suggest a set value. In addition, SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect) and SEP-EYE2 (
When not distinguished from (special eye-catching effect), it is referred to as SEP-EYE (eye-catching effect).

Note that the eye-catching images (eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1, eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2) are images displayed when the effect background during reach is switched to the normal background (non-reach background).

FIG. 12-9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the hot character effect (set-suggesting effect pattern “SEP-ATU”). FIG. 12-9(A) is an example of the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the hot character effect when the set value is 1-5. According to the example shown in FIG. 12-9 (A), when the normal reach is lost (when it becomes a fluctuation pattern # 12), the execution is set to 1
%, and if super reach A is missed (variation pattern # 13), execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and if super reach B is missed (variation pattern # 14) case), execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and in the case of a normal reach jackpot (in the case of variation pattern #16), execution is determined at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach A jackpot ( In the case of variation pattern #17), execution is determined at a rate of 60%, and in the case of a super reach B jackpot (variation pattern #18), execution is determined at a rate of 70%. In addition, if it does not become a reach (variation patterns # 10, # 1
1), determine whether to execute at a rate of 0% (determine not to execute)
.

FIG. 12-9 (B) shows a hot character effect when the setting value is 6 (setting suggestion effect pattern "
SEP-ATU”) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute. According to the example shown in FIG. 12-9 (B), if normal reach is missed (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 5%, and if super reach A is missed (variation If pattern # 13), execution is determined at a rate of 10%, and if super reach B is missed (variation pattern # 14), execution is determined at a rate of 10%, normal reach In the case of a big hit (variation pattern #16), execution is determined at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach A jackpot (variation pattern #17), execution is determined at a rate of 60%. If it becomes a super reach B jackpot (if it becomes a variation pattern #18), execution is determined at a rate of 70%. In addition, if it does not become a reach (variation pattern # 10
, #11), execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed).

According to FIGS. 12-9 (A) and 12-9 (B), the hot character effect is a effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit (a effect with a relatively small percentage of execution determination in the case of losing). be.
More specifically, when the set value is 1 to 5, the expectation for the hot character effect is higher than the expectation for the hot character effect when the set value is 6 (the hot character in the case of losing) The determination ratio of whether or not the effect is executed is lower when the set value is 1 to 5 than when the set value is 6).

When the set value is 1 to 5, the determination ratio of execution of the hot character effect in the case of failure is lower than when the set value is 6 (that is, when the set value is 6 is higher than when the set value is 1 to 5), the frequency that the hot character effect is executed and is lost is higher when the set value is 1 to 5 when the set value is 6. It is higher than when it is 5 (specifically, when focusing on the same kind of reach, when the setting value is 6, it is 5 times higher than when the setting value is 1 to 5). Therefore, the player can guess whether the set value is 1 to 5 or the set value is 6, depending on the frequency with which the hot character effect is executed and the result is lost. For example, the player has executed a hot character effect and has developed into super reach,
As a result, if you feel that the frequency of failure is higher than usual (usually the set value is one of 1 to 5), guess that the set value is 6. becomes possible.

On the other hand, since the determination ratio of execution of the hot character effect in the case of a big hit does not change between when the set value is 1 to 5 and when the set value is 6, the hot character effect is executed, and ,
The frequency of hitting the jackpot does not change when the set value is 1 to 5 or when the set value is 6.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player cannot guess whether the set value is 1 to 5 or 6, depending on the frequency with which the hot character effect is executed and the jackpot is won.

In other words, as described above, the hot character effect suggests a set value when it is lost,
No set value is suggested when a big hit is achieved.

Fig. 12-10 shows an eye-catching effect (normal eye-catching effect, special eye-catching effect)
FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of FIG. 12-10(A) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of an eye-catching effect. The determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the eye-catching effect is common to set values 1 to 6 (does not depend on the set value). According to the example shown in FIG. 12-10 (A), if super reach A is missed (if variation pattern # 13), execution is determined at a rate of 100%, and if super reach B is missed Also (in the case of variation pattern #14), execution is determined at a rate of 100%. In cases other than the above (in the case of one of the fluctuation patterns #10 to #12 and #16 to #18), execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed). In other words, as described above, the eye-catching effects (normal eye-catching effects, special eye-catching effects) are executed when the super reach is lost (when one of the fluctuation patterns #13 and #14 occurs).

When the pachinko machine 1 according to the characteristic part 006SH determines to execute an eye-catching effect, the setting suggesting effect pattern (“SEP-EYE1”, “SEP-
EYE2”). FIG. 12-10(B) shows a setting suggestion effect pattern ("SEP-EYE
1” and “SEP-EYE2”). According to the example shown in FIG. 12-10 (B), when the super reach A is lost, the normal eye-catching production (setting suggestion production pattern “SEP-EYE1”) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the special eye The catch effect (setting suggestive effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") is determined at a rate of 10%, and if super reach B is missed, the normal eye-catching effect (setting suggestive effect pattern "SEP-EYE1
”) is determined at a rate of 95%, and a special eye-catching production (setting suggestive production pattern “SEP-
EYE2”) is determined at a rate of 5%.

FIG. 12-10(C) shows setting suggestive effect patterns ("SEP-EYE1", "SEP-EYE2
”) is an example of the determination ratio. According to the example shown in FIG. 12-10 (C), super reach A
In case of failure, the normal eye-catching production (setting suggestive production pattern “SEP-EYE
1”) is determined at a rate of 60%, and a special eye-catching effect (setting suggestive effect pattern “SEP
-EYE2”) is determined at a rate of 40%, and if Super Reach B is missed, the normal eye-catching effect (setting suggestive effect pattern “SEP-EYE1”) is determined at a rate of 60% and a special eye-catching The effect (setting suggestive effect pattern “SEP-EYE2”) is determined at a rate of 40%.

Special eye-catching production when Super Reach A is lost (setting suggestive production pattern "
SEP-EYE2”), the setting value is 1 to 3 when the setting value is 4 to 6.
Therefore, the super reach A is lost, and the frequency at which the special eye-catching effect is executed is higher when the set value is 4 to 6 than when the set value is 1 to 3. is also higher (specifically, it is four times higher when the set values are 4-6 than when the set values are 1-3). Therefore, the player can guess whether the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6, depending on the frequency with which the super reach A is lost and the special eye-catching effect is executed. . For example, the player loses Super Reach A, and
The set value is 4 to 6 when it is felt that the frequency with which the special eye-catching effect is executed is higher than usual (usually the set value is one of 1 to 3). can be inferred.

Special eye-catching production when Super Reach B is lost (setting suggestive production pattern "
SEP-EYE2”), the setting value is 1 to 3 when the setting value is 4 to 6.
Therefore, the super reach B is lost, and the frequency at which the special eye-catching effect is executed is higher when the set value is 4 to 6 than when the set value is 1 to 3. is also higher (specifically, it is eight times higher when the settings are between 4 and 6 than when the settings are between 1 and 3). Therefore, the player can guess whether the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6, depending on the frequency with which the super reach B is lost and the special eye-catching effect is executed. . For example, the player misses Super Reach B, and
The set value is 4 to 6 when it is felt that the frequency with which the special eye-catching effect is executed is higher than usual (usually the set value is one of 1 to 3). can be inferred.

Note that the difference in the frequency with which the special eye-catching effect is executed depending on whether the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6 results in a failure of super reach A, and the special eye-catching effect is executed. Since the super reach B is lost and the case where the special eye-catching effect is executed is larger than the case (the difference is 4 times in the former, and the difference is 8 times in the latter), the player will lose the super reach A. And from the frequency with which the special eye-catching effect was executed,
The super reach B is lost, and the frequency with which the special eye-catching effect is executed makes it easier for the player to have confidence in estimating the set value by himself. As an example, considering the case where there were two changes in total that resulted in super reach A and resulted in a loss, and both times were special eye-catching effects, this case is when the set value is 1 to 3 1% of (10%
x 10%. The denominator is the number of fluctuations that developed into super reach A and resulted in a deviation), whereas there were a total of two fluctuations that developed into super reach B and resulted in deviation, and both times Considering the case where the special eye-catching production was performed, the setting value for this case is 1 to
Because it occurs only at a rate of 0.25% (5% × 5%. The denominator is the number of fluctuations that resulted in the development of super reach A) when it is 3 (that is, the development of super reach A As a result, there were a total of two fluctuations that resulted in a failure, and there were a total of two fluctuations that resulted in a failure due to the development of super reach B, compared to the case where both were special eye-catching effects 2 (Because it is easier to deny that the set value is 1 to 3 in the case where the special eye-catching effect was performed both times), there were a total of 2 changes that developed into Super Reach B and ended up being missed. 2
In the case where the special eye-catching effect was performed both times, it is easier to have confidence in estimating the setting value (estimation that the setting value is 4 to 6 instead of 1 to 3).

In addition, since the normal eye-catching effect is executed when the special eye-catching effect is not executed when the super reach is out (see FIGS. 12-10 (B) and (C)), the normal eye-catching effect is executed when the super reach is out. , is synonymous with non-execution of a special eye-catching effect at the end of super reach. Therefore, the set value is also suggested by the normal eye-catching effect, though not as much as by the special eye-catching effect. As an example, considering the case where there were two changes in total that resulted in super reach A and resulted in a loss, and both were normal eye-catching effects, the set values are 1 to 3 in this case. Occurs at a rate of 81% (90% x 90%. The denominator is the number of fluctuations that develop into super reach A and results in deviation), and 36% when the set value is 4 to 6 (60% × 60%.Since the denominator is the ratio of the number of fluctuations that developed into super reach A and resulted in deviation), even if the set value is estimated, it seems to be a relatively uncertain estimation. On the other hand, considering the case where there were a total of two fluctuations that developed into super reach A and ended up being missed, and both times were special eye-catching effects, this case is when the set value is 1 to 3. 1% of (10% x 10%
. The denominator occurs at the rate of the number of fluctuations that developed into Super Reach A and resulted in deviation), and 24% (40% x 40%) when the set value is 4 to 6. The denominator develops into Super Reach A. Therefore, even if we assume that the set value is 4 to 6 instead of 1 to 3, it seems to be a reasonable estimation. In other words, there were a total of two fluctuations that developed into super reach A and resulted in a loss, and both times the change developed to super reach A and resulted in a loss compared to the case where the normal eye-catching effect was used. It is easier to estimate the set value in the case where there are two fluctuations in total and two special eye-catching presentations.

12-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining various timings. Specifically, Figure 12-1
1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining execution timings of various effects and the like in a variable display that becomes super reach.

In FIG. 12-11, T0 is the start timing of variable display. T1 is the timing at which the present box image (the unopened present box image 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5(A)) is displayed when the present box effect is executed. In T1, when executing a plurality of present box effects corresponding to the plurality of advance notice effects, a plurality of present box images (present box image 006S
HPB-CL) is displayed. For example, a present box effect (PBP-A) targeting the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A), and a group notice effect (YEP-
When executing the present box presentation (PBP-B) for the execution of B),
Two present box images (present box image 006SHPB-CL) are displayed. T2 is a reach timing.

T3 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-A) for the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A) is executed. In other words, T3 changes one of the unopened present box images 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5(A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5(B). It's time to let

T4 is the timing to start executing the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A). T5
is the timing for ending the execution of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A). That is, T
4 to T5 is the execution period of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A).

T6 is a present box effect (PB
This is the opening timing of one present box image when PB) is executed. In other words, T6 changes one of the unopened present box images 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5(A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5(B). It's time to let

T7 is the timing to start executing the group announcement effect (YEP-B). T8 is the timing of ending the execution of the group announcement effect (YEP-B). That is, T7 to T8 is the execution period of the group announcement effect (YEP-B).

T9 is a gift box effect (
This is the opening timing of one present box image when PBP-E) is executed. In other words, T9 changes one of the unopened present box images 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5(A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5(B). It's time to let

T10 is the timing of starting the execution of the pseudo continuous announcement effect (YEP-E). T13
is the timing at which the execution of the pseudo continuous announcement effect (YEP-E) ends. In other words, T10
˜T13 is the execution period of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E).

T11 is the timing to start execution of the hot character effect (SEP-ATU). T12
is the timing to end execution of the hot character presentation (SEP-ATU). In other words, T11
˜T12 is the execution period of the hot character presentation (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-C) targeted for execution of the button advance notice effect (YEP-C) is executed. In other words, T15 changes one of the unopened present box images 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5(A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5(B). It's time to let

T16 is the timing to start executing the button announcement effect (YEP-C). T17
is the timing to end execution of the button announcement effect (YEP-C). In other words, T17
˜T18 is the execution period of the button announcement effect (YEP-C).

T18 is a gift box production (
This is the opening timing of one present box image when PBP-D) is executed. In other words, T18 changes one of the unopened present box images 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5(A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5(B). It's time to let

T19 is the timing for starting the execution of the character product announcement effect (YEP-D). T20 is the timing of ending the execution of the character product announcement effect (YEP-D). That is, T19 to T
20 is the execution period of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D).

Ta21-Ta22 is a lost symbol stop display period in the case of losing.
Ta22-Ta23 is the execution period of the eye-catching effect. Tb21 to Tb23 are a jackpot symbol stop display period in the case of a jackpot.

12-12 to 12-14 are specific examples of various timings. Figure 12-12 (A
), the variation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern #12), the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed, and the present box effect (PBP - shows various timings when A) is executed. It should be noted that setting suggestion effects (heated character effects, eye-catching effects) are not executed.

In FIG. 12-12(A), T1 is one present box image 006SHPB
- This is the timing at which CL is displayed. In other words, in T1, the cut-in notice effect (YEP
A present box image 006SHPB-CL of a present box effect (PBP-A) for execution of -A1) is displayed. T2 is a reach timing.

T3 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-A) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T4-T5 is the execution period of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1).

Figure 12-12 (B) shows that the variation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern # 16)
A cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2), a group notice effect (YEP-B), and a pseudo continuous notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B) is targeted. When the present box effect (PBP-B) and the present box effect (PBP-E) targeting the execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the hot character effect (SEP-ATU) is executed shows various timings of

In FIG. 12-12(B), T1 shows two present box images 006SHPB
- This is the timing at which CL is displayed. That is, at T1, the present box image 00 of the present box effect (PBP-B) targeted for execution of the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is displayed.
6SHPB-CL, a present box image 006SHPB-CL of a present box effect (PBP-E) intended for the execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E) is displayed. T.
2 is the timing of reach.

T4-T5 is the execution period of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A2). In other words, the present box effect (PBP-A) is not performed (present box image 006SHP
(without changing B-CL to present box image 006SHPB-OP)
, cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A2) is executed.

T6 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-B) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T7-T8 is the execution period of the group announcement effect (YEP-B).

T9 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10-T13 is the execution period of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E). T11-T12 is the execution period of the hot character presentation (SEP-ATU).

FIG. 12-13 shows that the variation pattern is super reach B loss (variation pattern #14), the button announcement effect (YEP-C1) and the pseudo continuous announcement effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the button announcement effect (YEP Present box effect (PBP-C) for execution of -C1)
) and a present box effect (PBP
-E) is executed, and a hot character effect (SEP-ATU) and a special eye-catching effect (SEP-
EYE2) and various timings are shown.

In FIGS. 12-13, T1 shows two present box images 006SHPB-CL
is displayed. That is, in T1, the present box image 00 of the present box effect (PBP-C) targeted for execution of the button announcement effect (YEP-C1) is displayed.
6SHPB-CL, a present box image 006SHPB-CL of a present box effect (PBP-E) intended for the execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E) is displayed. T.
2 is the timing of reach.

T9 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10-T13 is the execution period of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E). T11-T12 is the execution period of the hot character presentation (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-C) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T17-T18 is the execution period of the button announcement effect (YEP-C1). Ta21 to Ta22 is a lost symbol stop display period. Ta22-Ta23 is the execution period of the special eye-catching effect.

Fig. 12-14 shows that the variation pattern is a super reach B jackpot (variation pattern #18), and includes cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2), group notice effect (YEP-B), and button notice effect (YEP-C2). A role announcement effect (YEP-D) and a pseudo continuous announcement effect (YEP-E) are executed, and a present box effect (PBP-A) and a group announcement are targeted for the execution of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A2). Present box effect (PBP-B) for execution of effect (YEP-B) and present box effect (PBP-C) and character announcement effect (YEP) for execution of button notice effect (YEP-C2) -D) for the execution of the present box effect (PBP-D) and for the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E) for the execution of the present box effect (PBP-E) are executed, and the hot character effect ( SEP-ATU) are shown at various timings.

In FIGS. 12-14, T1 shows five present box images 006SHPB-CL
is displayed. In other words, in T1, the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2
), the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-A) for the execution of ), the present box image 006SHPB of the present box effect (PBP-B) for the execution of the group announcement effect (YEP-B). -CL, present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-C) for execution of button notice effect (YEP-C2), present box for execution of role notice effect (YEP-D) Presentation (PBP-D) gift box image 006SHPB-CL
, a gift box effect (PBP-
E) present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed. T2 is a reach timing.

T3 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-A) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T4-T5 is the execution period of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A2).

T6 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-B) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T7-T8 is the execution period of the group announcement effect (YEP-B).

T9 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10-T13 is the execution period of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E). T11-T12 is the execution period of the hot character presentation (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-C) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T17-T18 is the execution period of the button announcement effect (YEP-C2).

T19 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-D) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. A period from T19 to T20 is a period during which the character product announcement effect (YEP-D) is executed. Tb21-Tb22 is a jackpot symbol stop display period.

(Production decision processing A (determination of advance notice production and gift box production)
FIGS. 12-15 to 12-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect determination process A executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 12-16 are continuations of the flowcharts of FIGS. 12-15. The flowcharts of FIGS. 12-17 are continuations of the flowcharts of FIGS. 12-16.

In the effect determination process A shown in FIG. 12-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 006SHS100).
. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a rate of 0% if the variation pattern is non-reach deviation (either variation pattern # 10 or # 11) However, if the variation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13,
#14), execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and if the variation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern #16), execution is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern is super reach. If it is a big hit (one of the variation patterns #17 and #18), execution is determined at a rate of 30%.

Subsequent to step 006SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the cut-in notice effect should be executed (step 006SHS101). If it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS101; YES),
Go to step 006 SHS102. If it is not determined that the cut-in announcement effect should be executed (step 006SHS101; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS110.

Following step 006SHS101 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in notice effect (that is, notice effect pattern) based on the variation pattern (step 006SHS102). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), CP for effect control
U120, if the variation pattern is out of normal reach, the notice effect pattern "YEP
-A1" is determined at 100%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at 0%. Also, if the variation pattern is out of super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 80%, and sets the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" to 2
Determined at 0%. In addition, if the variation pattern is a normal reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 50%, and determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 50%.
YEP-A2” is determined at 50%. Also, if the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 20%,
The announcement effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at 80%.

Following step 006SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 is step 006S
The notice effect pattern of the cut-in notice effect determined by HS 102 (notice effect pattern "Y
EP-A1” or the notice effect pattern “YEP-A2”) is set (step 006SH
S103).

Following step 006SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-A) targeting the execution of the cut-in notice effect (step 006SHS104). For example, FIG.
As shown in -7 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the present box effect (PBP-A) is executed at a rate of 15% if the variation pattern is a deviation pattern, and the variation pattern is If it is a big hit fluctuation pattern, present box production (PBP-A
) is executed at a rate of 90%.

Following step 006SHS104, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the present box effect (PBP-A) has been determined (step 006SH
S105). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-A) should be executed (step 006SHS105; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS106. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-A) is to be executed (step 006SH
S105; NO), go to step 006SHS110.

Following step 006SHS105 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern "PBP-A" (step 006SHS106).

Step 006SHS101 (NO), Step 006SHS105 (NO), or
Following step 006SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the group announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 006SHS110). For example, FIG.
As shown in -3 (C), the effect control CPU 120 has a non-reach variation pattern (
If the variation pattern #10 or #11), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the variation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern #12), execution is determined at a rate of 2%, The fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (either fluctuation pattern #13 or #14)
If so, execution is determined at a rate of 30%, and if the variation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern # 16), execution is determined at a rate of 25%, and the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17 , #18), execution is determined at a rate of 50%.

Subsequent to step 006SHS110, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the group announcement effect should be executed (step 006SHS111). If it is determined that the group announcement effect is to be executed (step 006SHS111; YES), step 006S
Go to HS113. If it is not determined that the group notice effect is to be executed (step 006S
HS111; NO), go to step 006SHS120 in FIG. 12-16.

Following step 006SHS111 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern "YEP-B" for the group notice effect (step 006SHS113).

Subsequent to step 006SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 executes a present box effect (PBP
-B) is executed (step 006SHS114). For example, Figure 12-7 (B
), if the variation pattern is a winning variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the present box effect (PBP-B) at a rate of 25%, and the variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern. If so, it determines whether the present box effect (PBP-B) is to be executed at a rate of 90%.

Following step 006SHS114, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the present box effect (PBP-B) has been determined (step 006SH
S115). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-B) should be executed (step 006SHS115; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS116. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-B) is to be executed (step 006SH
S115; NO), go to step 006SHS120 in FIG. 12-16.

Following step 006SHS115 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern "PBP-B" (step 006SHS116).

Step 006SHS101 (NO), step 006SHS105 (
NO), or following step 006SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 00 in FIGS. 12-16).
6SHS120). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (D), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a rate of 0% if the variation pattern is non-reach deviation (any of the variation patterns # 10 and # 11) However, the variation pattern is out of the normal reach (variation pattern # 12
), the execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the variation pattern is out of super reach (either variation pattern # 13 or # 14), the execution is determined at a rate of 25%, and the variation pattern is If the normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern #16), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern #17 or #18), execution is determined at a rate of 50%. to decide.

Subsequent to step 006SHS120, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the button announcement effect should be executed (step 006SHS121). If it is determined that the button announcement effect is to be executed (step 006SHS121; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS122. If it is not determined to execute the button announcement effect (step 006SHS121; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS130.

Following step 006SHS121 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of button announcement effect (that is, the announcement effect pattern) based on the variation pattern (step 006SHS122). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (E), the effect control CPU1
20, if the variation pattern is out of super reach, the notice effect pattern "YEP-C
1” is determined at 90%, and the notice effect pattern “YEP-C2” is determined at 10%. again,
If the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 10% and the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" at 90%.
to decide.

Following step 006SHS122, the effect control CPU 120 is step 006S
Notice effect pattern of button notice effect determined by HS122 (notice effect pattern “YEP
-C1" or the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2") (Step 006SHS1
23).

Subsequent to step 006 SHS 123, the effect control CPU 120 executes the present box effect (P
BP-C) is determined (step 006SHS124). For example, Figure 12-7
As shown in (C), if the variation pattern is a winning variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the present box effect (PBP-C) at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern is a big hit. If it is a variation pattern, execution of present box effect (PBP-C) is determined at a rate of 60%.

Following step 006SHS124, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the present box effect (PBP-C) has been determined (step 006SH
S125). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-C) should be executed (step 006SHS125; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS126. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-C) is to be executed (step 006SH
S125; NO), go to step 006SHS130.

Following step 006SHS125 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern "PBP-C" (step 006SHS126).

Step 006SHS121 (NO), Step 006SHS125 (NO), or
Subsequent to step 006SHS126, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character product announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 006SHS130). For example, Figure 1
As shown in 2-4 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a rate of 0% if the variation pattern is a non-reach deviation (any of the variation patterns # 10 and # 11), and the variation If the pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern #12), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the variation pattern is out of super reach (either variation pattern #13 or #14), execution is 5%. If the variation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern #16), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (either variation pattern #17 or #18). If there is, it is determined at a rate of 75% whether it is executed or not.

Subsequent to step 006SHS130, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been determined that the character product announcement effect should be executed (step 006SHS131). If it is determined that the character object announcement effect is to be executed (step 006 SHS131; YES), step 00
Proceed to 6SHS133. If it is not decided to execute the character object announcement effect (step 0
06SHS131; NO), go to step 006SHS140 in FIG. 12-17.

Following step 006SHS131 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern "YEP-C" for the character object notice effect (step 006SHS133).

Subsequent to step 006SHS133, the production control CPU 120 executes the present box production (PB
PD) is executed or not (step 006SHS134). For example, Figure 12-7 (
As shown in D), if the variation pattern is a loss variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the present box effect (PBP-D) at a rate of 5%, and the variation pattern is a big hit variation. If it is a pattern, execution of the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined at a rate of 80%.

Following step 006SHS134, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the present box effect (PBP-D) has been determined (step 006SH
S135). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-D) should be executed (step 006SHS135; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS136. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-D) is to be executed (step 006SH
S135; NO), go to step 006SHS140 in FIG. 12-17.

Following step 006SHS135 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern "PBP-D" (step 006SHS136).

Step 006SHS131 (NO), Step 006SHS135 (
NO), or after step 006 SHS 136, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pseudo continuous advance notice effect based on the variation pattern (step 00 in FIGS. 12-17).
6SHS 140). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a rate of 0% if the variation pattern is non-reach deviation (any of the variation patterns # 10 and # 11) However, the variation pattern is out of the normal reach (variation pattern # 12
), the execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the variation pattern is out of super reach (either variation pattern # 13 or # 14), the execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and the variation pattern is If it is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern #16), execution is determined at a rate of 25%. to decide.

Subsequent to step 006SHS140, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS141). If it is determined that the pseudo consecutive notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS141; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS143. If it is not determined that the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect is to be executed (step 006 SHS141; NO), this flow chart ends.

Following step 006SHS141 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern "YEP-E" for the pseudo consecutive notice effect (step 006SHS143).
.

Subsequent to step 006SHS143, the effect control CPU 120 executes the present box effect (P
BP-E) is determined (step 006SHS144). For example, Figure 12-7
As shown in (E), if the variation pattern is a winning variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the present box effect (PBP-E) at a rate of 25%, and the variation pattern is a big hit. If it is a variation pattern, execution of present box presentation (PBP-E) is determined at a rate of 60%.

Following step 006SHS144, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the present box effect (PBP-E) has been determined (step 006SH
S145). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-E) should be executed (step 006SHS145; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS146. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-E) is to be executed (step 006SH
S145; NO), this flowchart ends.

Following step 006SHS145 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern "PBP-E" (step 006SHS146).
Then, this flowchart ends.

(Production determination process B (determination of setting suggestion production)
12-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect determination process B executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 12-15 to 12-17 and the effect determination process B described in FIG. 12-18, which one is executed first in the variable display start setting process (S171)? You may

In the effect determination process B shown in FIG. 12-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hot character effect based on the current set value and the variation pattern (step 006SH
S200). For example, when the current set value is one of 1 to 5, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern is non-reach (variation pattern #10, # 11), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the variation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 1%, and the variation pattern is super reach A If it is out (variation pattern # 13), execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and if the variation pattern is super reach B deviation (variation pattern # 14), execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and the variation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16
), execution is determined at a rate of 40%, and if the variation pattern is a super reach A jackpot (variation pattern # 17), execution is determined at a rate of 60%, and the variation pattern is a super reach B jackpot (variation In the case of pattern #18), execution is determined at a rate of 70%. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is 6, as shown in FIG. If so, the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%, and the variation pattern is out of the normal reach (variation pattern #
If it is 12), the execution is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the variation pattern is not super reach A (
If the variation pattern #13), execution is determined at a rate of 10%, and if the variation pattern is not super reach B (variation pattern #14), execution is determined at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern is normal reach If it is a big hit (variation pattern # 16), execution is determined at a rate of 40%, and if the variation pattern is a super reach A jackpot (variation pattern # 17), execution is determined at a rate of 60%, and the variation pattern is Super reach B jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 18)
If so, the execution presence is determined at a rate of 70%.

Following step 006SHS200, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the hot character effect is to be executed (step 006SHS201). If it is determined that the hot character effect is to be executed (step 006SHS201; YES), step 006S
Go to HS203. If it is not determined that the hot character effect is to be executed (step 006S
HS201; NO), go to step 006 SHS210.

Following step 006SHS201 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-ATU" for the hot character effect (step 006SHS20
3).

Following step 006SHS201 (NO) or step 006SHS203,
The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an eye-catching effect based on the variation pattern (step 006SHS210). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern #13, #
If it is 14), execution is determined at a rate of 100%, and otherwise, execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

After step 006SHS210, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the eye-catching effect should be executed (step 006SHS211). If it is determined that the eye-catching effect should be executed (step 006SHS211; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS212. If it is not determined that the eye-catching effect should be executed (step 006 SHS211; NO), this flow chart ends.

Following step 006SHS211 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of eye-catching effect (that is, setting-suggesting effect pattern) based on the current set value and the variation pattern (step 006SHS212). For example, if the current set value is one of 1 to 3, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (B),
If the variation pattern is out of Super Reach A (variation pattern #13), the setting suggestive effect pattern “SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)” is determined at a rate of 90%, and the setting suggestive effect pattern “SEP-EYE2 ( Special eye-catching effect)” is determined at a rate of 10%, and if the variation pattern is out of Super Reach B (variation pattern #14), the setting suggested effect pattern “SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)” is set at 95%. determined by the ratio of
The setting suggestive effect pattern "SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is any one of 4 to 6, as shown in FIG. If so, the setting suggestion production pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching production)" is determined at a rate of 60%, and the setting suggestion production pattern "SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching production)" is determined at a rate of 40%. and the fluctuation pattern is out of Super Reach B (
If it is the variation pattern #14), the setting suggestion production pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching production)" is determined at a rate of 60%, and the setting suggestion production pattern "SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching production)" is set to 40. Determined by percentage.

Following step 006SHS212, the effect control CPU 120 is step 006S
Setting suggesting effect pattern (setting suggesting effect pattern "SEP-EYE1" or setting suggesting effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") of eye-catching effect determined by HS212 is set (
step 006 SHS 213).

FIGS. 12-19 to 12-22 are diagrams showing examples of rendering operations related to the characteristic portion 006SH.
Specifically, FIGS. 12-19 to 12-22 show, in the example shown in FIG. 12-12(B),
Main scenes are shown as an example, Fig. 12-19 (A) → Fig. 12-19 (B) →
Fig. 12-19 (C) → Fig. 12-20 (A) → Fig. 12-20 (B) → Fig. 12-20 (C) →
Fig. 12-21 (A) → Fig. 12-21 (B) → Fig. 12-21 (C) → Fig. 12-22 (A) →
The transition is made in the order of FIG. 12-22(B)→FIG. 12-22(C). In addition, Fig. 12-19 (A) (
The same applies to other drawings. Reference numerals are omitted in other drawings), an active display area 006SHAHA, which is a display area for active display, and an active display 006SHAH displayed in the active display area 006SHAHA are displayed.

FIG. 12-19(A) shows the scene before reaching reach in the variable display. Figure 12-19
(B) is a scene where two gift box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed (Fig. 1
2-12 (B) T1 scene). Note that the two present box images 006SHPB-CL displayed are not distinguished from each other in terms of display mode, but are presents of the present box effect (PBP-B) intended for execution of the group announcement effect (YEP-B). box image 00
6SHPB-CL, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) intended for the execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E). Figure 12-
19(C) is a scene of reach in the variable display.

FIG. 12-20(A) shows a scene in which a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) is being performed, that is, a scene in which a strong cut-in image 006SHYKE-KCI is displayed (FIG. 12-12
This is the scene from T4 to T5 in (B)).

FIG. 12-20(B) is a scene (scene T6 in FIG. 12-12(B)) in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP. In the scene of FIG. 12-20(B), the present box image 006SHPB-
In response to CL changing to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box), an item image corresponding to the group announcement effect (item image displaying "group") is displayed. there is

FIG. 12-20(C) shows a scene in which the group preview effect (YEP-B) is being performed, that is, a scene in which the group image 006SHYKE-GN is displayed (T7 to T8 in FIG. 12-12(B). scene). Note that the present box image 006SHPB-OP (the same applies to the item image corresponding to the group announcement effect) is before the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is executed (for example, immediately before T7).
erased to In addition, the present box image 00 that is erased when a certain advance notice effect is executed
6SHPB-OP, the timing of erasing the item image may not be before the execution of the notice effect (for example, the start timing of the execution of the notice effect, any timing during the execution of the notice effect, the execution of the notice effect end timing, etc.).

FIG. 12-21(A) shows a scene (scene T9 in FIG. 12-12(B)) in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP. In the scene of FIG. 12-21(A), the present box image 006SHPB-
In response to CL changing to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to opening the present box), an item image corresponding to the simulated consecutive notice effect (item image displaying "again") is displayed. ing.

FIGS. 12-21(B) to 12-22(B) are scenes (scenes of T10 to T13 in FIG. 12-12(B)) in which the pseudo continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) is performed. Also, Figure 12-21
(C) is a scene where a hot character effect (SEP-ATU) is being performed (T in FIG. 12-12 (B)
11 to T12 scene). FIG. 12-22(C) shows a scene in which the jackpot symbols are displayed.

In FIGS. 12-21(B) to 12-22(A), the temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP is displayed, and in FIG. 12-22(B), re-variable display is performed. In addition to the temporary stop pattern 006SH-REP, the thermal character image 006SHSEP-ATU is also displayed in FIG. 12-21(C). is displayed. In other words, the hot character effect is executed with priority over the pseudo consecutive notice effect. In addition, in FIGS. 12-21 (B) to 12-22 (B), pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP
-E) shows an example in which "temporary stop → re-variable display" is performed once, but pseudo continuous notice effect (Y
As EP-E), "temporary stop→re-variable display" may be performed two or more times.

FIGS. 12-23 to 12-25 are diagrams showing examples of rendering operations related to the characteristic portion 006SH.
Specifically, FIGS. 12-23 to 12-25 show examples of some scenes in the example shown in FIG. 12-13. 23(B) → Fig. 12
-23 (C) → Figure 12-24 (A) → Figure 12-24 (B) → Figure 12-24 (C) → Figure 12
−25(A)→FIG. 12-25(B)→FIG. 12-25(C).

Figure 12-23 (A) shows the scene (
This is the scene just before T14 in Figures 12-13). In the variable display (the variable display shown in FIGS. 12-13), two present box images 006SHPB-CL (present box effects (PBP -C) present box image 006SHPB-CL, present box image 006SH of present box effect (PBP-E) targeted for execution of pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E)
PB-CL) is displayed, but in the scene of FIG. 12-23 (A) (the scene just before T14),
Since the execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E) has already ended (in the scene from T10 to T13), one present box image 006SHPB-CL (button notice effect (Y
Only the present box image 006SHPB-CL) of the present box effect (PBP-C) intended for the execution of EP-C) is displayed.

FIG. 12-23(B) shows the scene developed into super reach (the scene of T14 in FIG. 12-13).

FIG. 12-23(C) is a scene in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL has changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP (scene of T15 in FIG. 12-13).
is. In the scene of FIG. 12-23(C), the present box image 006SHPB-CL
is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box), and the item image corresponding to the button announcement effect (the item image with the button image drawn) is displayed.

Figures 12-24 (A) and (B) show a scene (
This is the scene from T16 to T17 in Figure 12-13). In FIG. 12-24(A), button image 0
06SHYKE-BU is displayed, and by pressing the button, a weak cut-in image 006SHYKE-JCI is displayed in FIG. 12-24(A).

FIG. 12-24(C) is a scene (scene just before Ta21 in FIG. 12-13) immediately before the losing symbol is displayed in super reach (super reach B). Figure 12-25 (
A) and (B) are scenes (scenes of Ta21 to Ta22 in FIGS. 12-13) in which the lost symbols are displayed. In FIG. 12-25 (A), a small pattern "767" is displayed, and in FIG. 12-25 (B)
, the decoration pattern "767" is displayed.

FIG. 12-25(C) is a scene (Ta22-Ta23 scene in FIG. 12-13) in which the special eye-catching effect (SEP-EYE2) is performed. In FIG. 12-25(C), an eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 (a character image of a yukata with a goldfish pattern), which is a special mode, is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 12-25(C), the eye-catching image 00
Displaying 6SHSEP-EYE2 (not shown eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE
1), the small pattern "767" is visible. In addition, Fig. 12-25
The "" shown at the four corners of the numbers "7", "6", and "7" of the small pattern "767" in (C) indicate that the small pattern "767" is shaking. Incidentally, instead of or in addition to the small pattern "767" in FIG. 12-25(C), the small pattern "767" in FIG. 12-25(A) may also sway.

It should be noted that while the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 is being displayed (similarly during the display of the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1, not shown), the reach-compatible small patterns (such as the above-mentioned shaking small pattern "767") are not displayed. A small pattern (a small pattern that is stopped and displayed by a pattern confirmation command) may be visible at all times.

During the display of the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 (similarly during the display of the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 not shown), the active display 006SHAH,
Even if the reserved display, the reserved number display (the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game and the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game are indicated by numbers etc.) good.

FIGS. 12-26 and 12-27 are diagrams showing an example of the rendering operation related to the characteristic portion 006SH. Specifically, FIGS. 12-26 and 12-27 show examples of some scenes in the example shown in FIGS. 12-14. 26(B)→FIG. 12-26(C)→FIG. 12-27(A)→FIG. 12-27(B)→FIG. 12-27(C).

Fig. 12-26(A) shows five present box images 006SHPB-CL (present box effect (PBP-A) for execution of cut-in notice effect (YEP-A)
present box image 006SHPB-CL, present box image 006SHP of present box effect (PBP-B) for execution of group preview effect (YEP-B)
Present box production (
PBP-C) gift box image 006SHPB-CL, role announcement production (YEP-
D) Present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-D) for execution, Present box of the present box effect (PBP-E) for execution of the simulated consecutive notice effect (YEP-E) This is the scene where the image 006SHPB-CL) was displayed (the scene of T1 in FIGS. 12-14).

FIG. 12-26(B) shows the last gift box image 006SHPB-CL (
Present box presentation (PBP-D) for execution of role announcement presentation (YEP-D)
present box image 006SHPB-CL) is present box image 006SH
This is the scene just before the transition to PB-OP (the scene just before T18 in FIGS. 12-14).

FIG. 12-26(C) is a scene (scene of T18 in FIG. 12-14) in which the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. In the scene of FIG. 12-26(C), the present box image 006SHPB-CL corresponds to the present box image 006SHPB-OP changing to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box), and corresponds to the role announcement effect. Item image (movable body 006SH32
) is displayed.

Figure 12-27 (A) shows the scene where the character announcement effect (YEP-D) is being performed (Figure 12-1
4 scene from T19 to T20). In FIG. 12-27(A), the movable body 006SH32 is in motion.

Figures 12-27 (B) and (C) show the scene where the jackpot pattern is displayed (Tb21 in Figure 12-14).
~ Scene of Tb22). In FIG. 12-27(B), a small pattern "777" is displayed, and in FIG. 12-27(C), a decorative pattern "777" is displayed.

(Regarding Modified Example of Game Machine Related to Characteristic Part 006SH)
Next, a modified example of the game machine related to the characteristic portion 006SH will be described.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above description, after the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (after the present box is opened), the present box image 006SHPB-OP and the item image are deleted. , one of which may be erased and the other may remain displayed without being erased. Also, both of them may continue to be displayed without being erased.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above description, when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP, the item image corresponding to one notice effect that is actually executed is displayed (for example, FIG. 12-20 ( In B), the item image corresponding to the group notice effect executed in FIG. You may display the item image corresponding to .
For example, in FIG. 12-20(B), an item image corresponding to the group notice effect and the pseudo consecutive notice effect (for example, the item image indicated as "group/re", etc.) may be displayed.

(Modification 3 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above description, an example was described in which the item image was displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP.
It is not necessary to display the item image when changing to OP. If the item image is displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP, the item image will be displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be changed depending on when the game is not played.

(Modification 4 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above example, the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed at a constant timing, but the present box image 006SHPB-CL may be displayed at any one of a plurality of timings. Present box image 006SHPB-C
Depending on the timing at which L is displayed, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be varied.

(Modification 5 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, when displaying a plurality of present box images 006SHPB-CL,
Although an example of collectively displaying a plurality of images has been described, a plurality of present box images 006SHP
When displaying B-CL, the present box image 006SHPB-CL may be displayed one by one. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be different between when a plurality of coins are displayed collectively and when they are displayed one by one.

(Modification 6 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above description, the present box image 006SHPB-CL is simply displayed (without performing any effects), but the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed as an example.
is displayed (for example, the character displays the gift box image 006SHPB-CL by magic or tricks, the character displays the gift box image 006
An effect that brings SHPB-CL, etc.) may be executed. Simply present box image 0
Present box image 006SHP when 06SHPB-CL is displayed and after the effect
Depending on when B-CL is displayed, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be changed. Also, there may be times when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed after the effect and times when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is not displayed after the effect. For example, there may be times when the magic is successful and the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed, and times when the magic is unsuccessful and the present box image 006SHPB-CL is not displayed.

(Modification 7 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above description, the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed at the left end of the display area of the image display device 5, but it may be displayed at another position. For example, the vicinity of the active display area 006SHAHA (see FIGS. 12-19) (for example, active display 006S
It may be displayed on the top of HAH, etc.). In the case of multiple, the active display area 006SH
They may be displayed side by side in the vicinity of the AHA.

(Modification 8 of characteristic portion 006SH)
12-11, the execution timing and the like of each notice effect have been described above, but FIG.
2-11 is an example, and each effect may be executed at other execution timings.

As an example of the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect will be explained. In the example of FIGS. The timing may be later than the execution start timing of the group announcement effect. Also, in the example of FIGS. 12-11, the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect is before development, but the cut-in notice effect execution start timing may be after development.
Also, the cut-in announcement effect may be executed at any one of a plurality of timings. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be varied according to the execution start timing. again,
In the example of FIGS. 12-11, the cut-in notice effect can be executed only once at most (although there is only one execution start timing), but it may be executed two or more times (the execution start timing is There may be two or more locations).

As an example of the setting suggestion effect, the hot character effect will be explained. In the example of FIGS. It may be earlier than the execution start timing of the group announcement effect. Also, in the example of FIGS. 12-11, the hot character execution start timing is before development, but the hot character execution start timing may be after development. The hot character effect may be executed at any one of a plurality of timings. In addition, in the example of FIGS. 12-11, the hot character effect can be executed only once at most (although there is only one execution start timing), but it may be possible to execute it twice or more (execution start timing may be at two or more locations).

(Modification 9 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above description, when the hot character effect and the pseudo consecutive notice effect overlap, the hot character effect is given priority over the pseudo consecutive notice effect ("Heat" is displayed on the front side, etc.) (Fig. 12-21). (C)), the relationship between the hot character effect and other forewarning effects (however, character object foretelling effects are excluded) may be the same. In other words, setting suggestion effect (hot character effect) and notice effect (pseudo continuous notice effect etc.)
When and overlap, the setting suggestion effect may be given priority.

(Modification 10 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In relation to the ninth modification, when the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect overlap, the one with the shorter execution time may be preferentially executed. In addition, in this embodiment, setting suggestion effect (heated character effect) and notice effect (
Since the execution time is shorter for the setting suggestion effect (hot character effect) than the pseudo continuous notice effect (pseudo continuous notice effect, etc.) (see Fig. 12-11) ) overlaps, the setting suggestion effect is given priority (see FIG. 12-21(C)). Also, when the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect overlap, the one with the lower appearance frequency may be preferentially executed. Note that the appearance frequency may be logical (calculated) or may be based on actual operating conditions (such as the current day).

(Modification 11 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, the setting value is one of 1 to 5, or the setting value is 6, and the hot character effect (see Figure 12-9), Alternatively, the eye-catching effect (see FIGS. 12-10) suggesting that the setting value is any of 4 to 6 has been described as the setting value suggesting effect, but the suggestion target is not limited to the above. . For example, it suggests an odd setting (whether the setting is 1, 3, or 5) or an even setting (whether the setting is 2, 4, or 6). A setting suggestion effect may be executed. Also, for example, whether the setting is low (whether the set value is 1 or 2) or whether the setting is medium (whether the set value is 3 or 4)
or a high setting (set value is 5 or not).

(Modification 12 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, the suggested target (heated character production: "1 to 5" or "6", eye-catching production: "1 to
3” or “4 to 6”) have explained different setting suggestion effects, but different setting suggestion effects with the same suggestion target may be executed. For example, in a certain variation (for example, super reach B (variation patterns # 14, # 18), when only production A is executed and only production B (jackpot reliability is the same as production A) is executed and production There are cases where neither A nor effect B is executed. %), and when the set value is 6, the production A in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 25% (the production A in the special mode is 75%), and the production B is executed at a rate of 25%. As the effect mode of the effect B, when the set value is 1, the normal mode effect A is executed at a rate of 99% (the special mode effect A is 0.1%), and when the set value is 6, the normal mode effect is performed. Effect A may be executed at a rate of 1% (special mode effect A is 99.9%) According to the above, both effect A and effect B have the same suggestion target ("1 to 5 or "6"), but the reliability of the set value suggestion (for example, the suggestion that the set value is "6") differs between the effect A and the effect B. That is, the normal mode effect A Special mode production A when is executed
is executed, the normal mode effect B is executed, and the special mode effect B is executed, the reliability of the big win is the same, but when the special mode effect B is executed, the special mode The reliability (accuracy of suggestion) that the set value is 6 is higher than when the effect A of is executed.

(Modification 13 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above description, the setting value suggesting effect suggests the current setting value, but it may also indicate whether or not the setting value is to be changed. A hot character effect (or an eye-catching effect) may suggest whether or not the setting value is changed, or a setting suggesting effect different from the hot character effect and the eye-catching effect suggests whether or not the setting value is changed. You may make it

(Modification 14 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, an example was explained in which the action of the player is not involved when the set value suggesting effect is executed, but the action of the player may be involved when the set value suggesting effect is executed. As an example, a promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an action (button operation, screen touch, operation of a model (lever, sword, gun, etc.) provided on the outer frame, etc.) within a predetermined period before the start of execution of the hot character effect. and run
If there is an action of the player within the predetermined period, the hot character effect may be executed (
If there is no movement of the player within the predetermined period, the hot character effect may not always be executed, or the hot character effect may be executed or not executed).

(Modification 15 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, the eye-catching effect was explained as the setting suggestion effect that is executed when the hit is lost without being executed when the big hit occurs. is not limited to eye-catching production. For example, a scene in which a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character in a battle super reach (for example, FIG. 1
2-25 (A) scene, etc.), the enemy character (or the dialogue of the friendly character) executes a dialogue production in which one of a plurality of types of dialogue is uttered, and the set value is suggested depending on the type of dialogue that is uttered. You may do so. For example, when the set value is any one of 1 to 3, dialogue A is determined at 65% and dialogue B at 35% as the dialogue of the enemy character. 3 lines A as the character's line
5% and speech B may be determined at a determination rate of 65%. For example, if the set value is one of 1 to 3, no dialogue is determined by 60%, the dialogue of the enemy character is 30%, and the dialogue of the ally character is determined by 10%. If the above is the case, the determination ratio may be 60% for no dialogue, 10% for enemy character dialogue, and 30% for ally character dialogue.

It should be noted that a scene in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (for example, the scene in FIG. 12-25(A)) is changed to a scene in which the ally character wins the enemy character (for example, the scene in FIG. 12-27(B)).
If there is a possibility that a reversal effect that shifts to the scene of ) will be executed, the dialogue effect as described above may not be executed in a scene where the ally character is defeated by the enemy character. Alternatively, after the execution of the reverse effect is completely denied (timing after the timing of executing the reverse effect), the dialogue effect as described above may be executed.

(Modification 16 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, the setting suggestion effect (eye-catching effect) that is executed when the hit is not performed when the hit is a big hit, and the setting suggestion effect (hot character However, it is also possible to provide a setting suggestive effect which is not executed when the game is lost but is executed when the game is a big hit. For example, it is possible to execute a big win determination notification performance for notifying a big win during variable display, there are a plurality of types of performance modes of the big win determination notification performance, and a set value (or setting change) is suggested in a special mode. You may do so.

As an example, it is possible to execute a confirmation notification performance of emitting rainbow color light from the game effect lamp 9 during the variable display, and when the normal light emission mode (for example, blinking at a normal speed) is used, the confirmation of the big win is notified and special light emission is performed. When it is in a mode (for example, flashing of a special speed), it may be possible to notify the decision of a big hit and suggest a setting value (or setting change). As another example, it is possible to execute a fixed notification effect (full rotation effect) that rotates the decorative pattern in the state of aligning the numbers during the variable display, and a normal effect mode (for example, full rotation in the forward direction from top to bottom) When it is , it informs the confirmation of the big hit, and when it is a special performance mode (for example, full rotation in the reverse direction from the bottom to the top), it informs the confirmation of the big hit and suggests a set value (or setting change). can be

(Modification 17 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, as the notice effects, cut-in notice effects (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), group notice effects (YEP-B), button notice effects (YEP-C1, YEP-C2), character object notice effects (YEP- D), the example of executing the pseudo continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) has been described, but the notice effect is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to execute advance notice effects as shown in FIGS. 12-2(D), (E) and (F). In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-2D, 12-2E, and 12-2F, an effect is performed in which the background image is shattered as if it were made of glass during reach, leading to super reach.

(Modification 18 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, for example, in the case of executing the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A), the present box effect (PBP-A) that targets the execution of the cut-in notice effect (PBP-A)
For example, when executing the notice effect, the present box effect is executed with the execution of the notice effect as the target. You may For example, in the case of executing the advance notice effect, the timer effect may be executed in place of or in addition to the present box effect, targeting the execution of the advance notice effect.

For example, displaying a timer image showing the remaining time (see, for example, FIG. 12-5(C)),
A timer image in which the remaining time is gradually decreased and the remaining time is zero (see, for example, FIG. 12-5 (D))
After displaying , the item image may be displayed (or the item image may not be displayed), and any advance notice effect may be executed. The degree of expectation for a big win may be different between when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed and when the timer image is displayed.

Also, the present box image and the timer image may be displayed at the same time. For example, when executing the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the group notice effect (YEP), if two present box images are displayed (the present box image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect When a gift box image corresponding to the effect is displayed), or when two timer images are displayed (a timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and a timer image corresponding to the group notice effect are displayed) case), or when one present box image and one timer image are displayed (when the present box image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and the timer image corresponding to the group notice effect are displayed, There may be a case where a timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and a present box image corresponding to the group notice effect are displayed. In the case of executing a plurality of advance notice effects, the degree of expectation for a big win may be varied between when the present box image and the timer image are displayed simultaneously and when they are not displayed simultaneously.

Note that the timers in the timer images shown in FIGS. 12-5(C) and (D) are digital timers (timers that display the remaining time by numerical values), but needle-type timers (the remaining time is displayed by the position of the needle, etc.). timer) may be used. Also, the timer may not be used as long as it indicates the remaining time (for example, an hourglass or the like may be used). The degree of expectation of a big win may be varied depending on which type (digital timer, needle timer, hourglass, etc.) is displayed.

In addition, when displaying a plurality of timer images, they may be displayed side by side (for example, FIG. 12-
5(E)), or the number may be displayed without arranging them (for example, see FIG. 12-5(F)). The number of present box images may also be displayed without arranging them.

(Modification 19 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above embodiment, the set value is suggested by the heated character effect or the eye-catching effect.
Suggesting the setting value is not limited to the hot character effect and the eye-catching effect.

As an example, the setting suggesting effect may be executed in an effect (for example, a mini character effect, etc.) that is performed in a period such as before the reach or the period before the pseudo continuous temporary stop. The present box effect or the like may not be executed for the setting suggestion effect (that is, the execution of the mini character effect or the like should be prevented from being suggested by opening the present box).

As another example, the setting value may be suggested by present box presentation.
Specifically, for example, in the present box presentation, in addition to the present box image in the normal mode (see FIGS. 12-5 (A) and (B)), the present box image in the special mode (for example, FIG. 12-5 (G)) (H)) can be displayed, the present box image in the normal mode suggests execution of any advance notice effect, the present box image in special mode suggests execution of any notice effect, and the set value (or , setting change) may be suggested.
In addition, the present box image 006SHPB2-CL in Fig. 12-5 (G) is
The display mode (pattern in this example) is different from the present box image 006SHPB-CL in 5(A). The present box image 006SHPB2-OP in FIG. 12-5(H) is
-5 (B) gift box image 006SHPB-CL and display mode (pattern in this example)
is different.

As another example, a set value may be suggested by a timer effect. in particular,
For example, in the timer effect, in addition to the normal mode timer image (see FIGS. 12-5 (C) and (D)), a special mode timer image (for example, see FIGS. 12-5 (I) and (J)) can be displayed. year,
The timer image in the normal mode may suggest execution of any of the advance notice effects, and the timer image in the special mode may suggest the execution of any advance notice effects as well as the set value (or setting change). . Note that the timer image in FIG. 12-5(I) differs from the timer image in FIG. 12-5(C) in display mode (in this example, the presence or absence of a bell). Figure 12-5 (J) timer image
The display mode (in this example, the presence or absence of a bell) is different from the timer image of (D).

(Modification 20 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above description, the present box image (present box effect) is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (FIGS. 9, 12-16, 12
-17), the present box image may be determined in the advance notice setting process (step S161). In the aspect in which the present box image is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171), the present box image is determined based on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the variation pattern (see FIG. 12-7). When determining the present box image in the reading notice setting process (step S161), the received pattern designation command (whether or not the variable display result will be a "big hit" and the type of big hit (probability, non-probability, or sudden probability) The present box image may be determined based on the content of the production control command indicating the determination result) or the variation category designation command (the production control command indicating the category (type) of the determined variation pattern). A plurality of present box images may be collectively determined in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one present box image may be decided in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of each start prize. good too. That is, one variation may be associated with a plurality of present box images, or each variation may be associated with one present box image.

It should be noted that "suggestion of set value" only makes the user recognize that there is a high possibility that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range), and that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range). may not be definitely reported, and a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range) may be definitely reported. For example, for a certain effect or a certain display, etc., by not deciding when it is a low setting (for example, set value 3 or less), the effect or display etc. can be set at high setting (for example, set value 4 or less) It will definitely notify you of something.

In addition, in the above explanation, since the display result (loss, jackpot) is included in the variation pattern (
For example, variation pattern #13 includes not only super reach A being executed but also losing, and variation pattern #17 includes not only super reach A being executed but also becoming a big hit), By using the variation pattern (contents of the variation pattern specification command) without using the display result (contents of the variable display result notification command, etc.), various effects (notice effect, present box effect, setting suggestion effect, etc.) are determined. (for example, Figure 1
2-3, Fig. 12-4, Fig. 12-7, Fig. 12-9, Fig. 12-10) and display results (contents of variable display result notification command, etc.) box effect, setting suggestion effect, etc.) may be determined.

(Application to other equipment)
In the above, an example of application to a pachinko game machine has been described, but application to a slot machine is also possible. For example, in a certain state (for example, a non-advantageous state), periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range), whether to transition to another state (for example, an advantageous state) than normal In a slot machine that draws lots with a high probability, multiple types of advance notice effects with different expectations of transition to other states and specific displays (gift box images, timer images, etc.) corresponding to the notice effects to be executed are displayed. The specific effect to be displayed can be executed, and the setting suggestion effect can be changed to another state (
Execution is possible when not controlled to an advantageous state), when a specific display corresponding to the advance notice performance is displayed before the advance notice performance is executed, and when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice performance is not displayed before the advance notice performance is executed. When the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the special mode before the notice effect is executed, and the notice effect is performed before the notice effect is executed. When the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed, the ratio of control to another state (advantageous state) is higher than when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the notice effect is executed. Alternatively, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the specific display corresponding to the setting suggestion effect may not be displayed.

Alternatively, in a slot machine that draws with a high probability whether a first advantageous state (e.g., CZ, bonus game, etc.) transitions to a second advantageous state (e.g., AT state, ART state, etc.), the first In an advantageous state, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects with different expectations of transition to the second advantageous state, and specific effects that display specific displays (gift box image, timer image, etc.) corresponding to the advance notice effect. and can be executed when the setting suggestive effect is not controlled to the second advantageous state, and when a specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, and when the advance notice effect is executed before the advance notice effect is executed. There are times when the specific display corresponding to is not displayed, and when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is changed to a special mode before the advance notice effect is executed. When the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, it is in a second advantageous state than when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is not displayed before the advance notice effect is executed. When the control ratio is high and the setting suggestion effect is executed, the specific display may not be displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 006SH)
(Means 1 related to characteristic part 006SH)
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state, bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player, and a disadvantageous set value and a player's preference than the disadvantageous set value. a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value having a high degree of advantage for the player; , The effect execution means includes a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effects, group notice effects, etc. shown in FIG. 12-1) and specific displays corresponding to the notice effects (for example, FIG. 12-5), and a setting suggestive effect related to the setting means (for example, the
8(A), etc.) can be executed when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, it can be executed during Ta22 to Ta23 as shown in FIG. 12-11),
There are times when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before execution of the notice effect, and times when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before execution of the notice effect (for example, FIG. 12-7), when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, the specific display is performed before the advance notice effect is executed. is changed to a special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-6, present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to present box image 006S
HPB-OP), and when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed. The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when not displayed (see, for example, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the present box effect shown in FIG. 12-7), and when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the The specific display is not displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 12
As shown in -11, the cut-in notice effect, group notice effect, pseudo consecutive notice effect, button notice effect, and role notice effect are subject to the present box, but the hot character effect and the eye-catching effect are present boxes. is not covered).

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game. In other words, if the setting suggestion effect is included as the target of the specific display, the player will guess that the setting suggestion effect will not control to an advantageous state, and the player's sense of expectation will decrease and the interest in the game will be lost. However, in the gaming machine, since the setting suggestion effect is not included as a target of the specific display, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

(Means 2 related to characteristic part 006SH)
The game machine of the means 1 is not executed when controlled to the advantageous state, and is executable when the advantageous state is not controlled (for example, the eye-catching effect shown in FIG. 12-10). etc.), and a second setting suggestion effect (for example, hot character effect shown in FIG. 12-9, etc.) that can be executed either when the control is in the advantageous state or when the control is not in the advantageous state. It is possible.

According to the gaming machine described above, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects with different executable scenes, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the game machine of the means 1 does not execute when the control is not in the advantageous state, but is executable when the control is in the advantageous state.
It may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, a confirmation notification effect or the like exemplified in the modified example).

(Means 3 related to characteristic part 006SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 or 2 has a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects (for example, hot character effects shown in FIG. 12-9, eye-catching effects shown in FIG. directing, etc.) can be executed.

According to the gaming machine described above, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects with different suggestion accuracies, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 4 related to characteristic part 006SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 3 is capable of executing variable display of identification information, and comprises prefetch determination means for prefetching whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state, wherein the specific display is based on the prefetch determination. (For example, pre-reading notice setting processing (step S
161) to determine the display of the present box image).

According to the gaming machine, based on the look-ahead determination, for example, it is possible to display the specific display before the start of the change, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 5 related to characteristic portion 006SH)
The game machine of the means 1 to 4 can display a plurality of the specific displays (for example, FIG. 12
-19 (B), see FIG. 12-25 (A)), when the number of specific indications displayed is plural, it is easier to control to the advantageous state than when the number is singular.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display number of the specific display and improve the interest of the game.

(Means 6 related to characteristic portion 006SH)
In the game machine of the above means 1 to 5, the specific display has a plurality of display modes (for example, FIG. 12
-5), and the setting means may be suggested by the display mode of the specific display.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the specific display, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

(Means 7 related to characteristic part 006SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 1 to 6 includes the execution period of the notice effect (for example, the execution period of the pseudo consecutive notice effect in FIG. 12-11) and the execution period of the setting suggestion effect (for example, FIG. , etc.) overlap, the setting suggestion effect is preferentially executed over the notice effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (C), “heat” is changed to “ Re” is displayed on the front side).

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from being overlooked.

(Means 8 related to characteristic portion 006SH)
In the game machines of the above means 1 to 7, the determination of whether to execute the setting suggestion effect and the determination of whether to execute the advance notice effect are made independently of each other. For example, execution or non-execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined by the effect determination process B (see Figure 12-18), and execution or non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined by the effect determination process A (see Figures 12-15 to 12-17). be done.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to suitably execute the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect.
Also, the design becomes easier.

(Means 9 related to characteristic part 006SH)
The game machine of means 1 to 8 may be capable of executing variable display of the identification information, and may be capable of executing the setting suggestion effect at a plurality of timings within the variable display period of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to make the player pay attention to a plurality of timings and improve the amusement of the game. In addition, since it can be executed at a plurality of timings, it is possible to maintain a feeling of anticipation as to whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 011SH)
Next, the game machine related to the characteristic portion 011SH will be described. The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 011SH is a gaming machine capable of playing games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 011SH includes game control means and effect execution means. Game control means is realized by the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11, for example. The effect execution means is realized by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12, for example.

The front view and the like of the pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 011SH are the same as those of the pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 027SH (see FIG. 11-1). However, for convenience of explanation, the characteristic portion 027SH
The movable body 027SH32 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 according to is referred to as the movable body 011SH32 in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 011SH.

The jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 011SH is shown in FIG. 11-2 (
It is the same as the jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH shown in A). The jackpot probability (high probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 011SH is shown in FIG.
-2 Jackpot probability (high probability state) of pachinko gaming machine 1 according to characteristic part 027SH shown in (B)
is similar to

The type of jackpot (jackpot type) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 011SH is shown in FIG.
This is the same as the type of jackpot (jackpot type) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 027SH shown in 2(C). Also, the jackpot type distribution of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 011SH is the same as the jackpot type distribution of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D) and (E).

FIG. 13-1 is a diagram exemplifying the variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 011SH. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram showing types of variation patterns (variation times). Variation pattern #10 is a non-reach variation pattern. Variation pattern #11 is a non-reach deviation (for shortening) variation pattern. Variation pattern #12 is a variation pattern of deviation from normal reach. Variation pattern #13 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (weak battle) and eventually loses. Fluctuation pattern #14
is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (medium battle) and eventually loses. Variation pattern #15 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (strong battle) and eventually loses. Variation pattern #16 is a small hit variation pattern. Variation pattern #17 is a variation pattern for a normal reach jackpot. Variation pattern #18 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (weak battle) and finally becomes a big hit. Variation pattern #19 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (medium battle) and finally becomes a big hit. Variation pattern #20 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (strong battle) and finally becomes a big hit.

FIG. 13-1(B) is an example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-1(B), the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big win is super reach (strong battle)>super reach (medium battle)>super reach (weak battle)>normal reach. It should be noted that the degree of expectation of a certain effect a is, for example, (probability of executing effect a when a big win is achieved)×(probability of being a big win)/{(probability of executing effect a when a big win is achieved). x (probability of getting a big hit) + (probability of executing the effect a when not getting a big hit) x (probability of not getting a big hit)
} (when the degree of expectation of a big hit is "1", it always becomes a "big hit").

For example, the reliability of super reach (weak battle) (in the case of a set value of 1) is (0.1 x 1/320) / {(0.1 x 1/320) + (0.008 ×319/
320)}=about 3.8%. In addition, the reliability of Super Reach (weak battle) (set value 1
) is (0.1×1/320)/{(0.1×1/320
)+(0.004×319/320)}=about 7.3%.

The reliability of super reach (medium battle) (in the case of setting value 1) is, in the low base state,
(0.25×1/320)/{(0.25×1/320)+(0.001×319/32
0)}=about 44%. In addition, the reliability of super reach (medium battle) (in the case of setting value 1) is (0.25 × 1/320) / {(0.25 × 1/320) in the high base state
+(0.004 x 319/320)} = about 16%.

The reliability of Super Reach (strong battle) (in the case of setting value 1) is, in the low base state,
(0.6×1/320)/{(0.6×1/320)+(0.001×319/320)
}=about 65%. Also, the reliability of super reach (strong battle) (in the case of a set value of 1) is (0.6×1/320)/{(0.6×1/320)+(0.6×1/320) in the high base state.
002×319/320)}=about 48%.

In addition, according to the example of FIG. 13-1 (B), the reliability of super reach (weak battle), super reach (medium battle), and super reach (strong battle) differs between the low base state and the high base state. However, like super reach A and super reach B in the characteristic part 027SH (see FIG. 11-3 (B)), super reach (weak battle), super reach (medium battle), super reach (strong battle) The reliability may be shared between the low base state and the high base state.

Further, according to the example of FIG. 13-1(B), the variation pattern #11 is not determined during the low base, but it seems that the variation pattern #11 is also determined during the low base according to the number of retained memories, for example. can be Also, according to the example of FIG. 13-1(B), during the high base, the variation pattern #1
Although 0 is not determined, variation pattern #10 may be determined even during high base according to the number of reserved memories, for example.

FIG. 13-2 shows an example of the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect). In this embodiment, after determining the variation pattern, the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect is determined based on the determined variation pattern (either pseudo-continuous or pseudo-continuous (1 time, 2 times, 3 times). (determine whether
are doing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-2, non-reach (that is, variation pattern #10
, #11), pseudo-continuousness is determined at a rate of 100%. In the case of a small hit (that is, variation pattern #16), a pseudo-running is determined at a rate of 100%. In the case of normal reach (that is, fluctuation patterns #12 and #17), pseudo-continuous non-continuation is determined at a rate of 80%, and pseudo-continuous continuity (one pseudo-continuous) is determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of super reach (weak battle) (that is, fluctuation pattern #13, #18), pseudo-continuous is determined at a rate of 30%, pseudo-continuous (1 pseudo-continuous) is determined at a rate of 40%, Pseudo-runs (2 pseudo-runs) are determined at a rate of 30%. In the case of super reach (medium battle) (that is, variation patterns #14, #19), 20 pseudo continuous
%, pseudo-joints (1 pseudo-run) are determined at a rate of 30%, pseudo-joints (2 pseudo-runs) are determined at a rate of 30%, and pseudo-joints (3 pseudo-runs) are determined at a rate of 30%. times) at a rate of 20%. In the case of super reach (strong battle) (that is, fluctuation patterns #15, #20), pseudo-continuous is determined at a rate of 10%, pseudo-continuous (1 pseudo-continuous) is determined at a rate of 20%, Pseudo-joints (2 pseudo-runs) are determined at a rate of 30%, and pseudo-joints (3 pseudo-runs) are determined at a rate of 40%.

According to the example of FIG. 13-2, when the pseudo-run is performed, the player's expectation is higher than when the pseudo-run is not performed, and when the number of pseudo-runs is large, the expectation is higher than when the pseudo-run is small. Become. For example, in the case of one pseudo-continuation, normal reach or more is confirmed, in the case of two pseudo-consecutions, super reach (weak battle) or more is confirmed, and in the case of three pseudo-consecutions, super reach (medium battle) The above is confirmed.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 13-2, in the case of a small hit (fluctuation pattern #16), 10 pseudo continuous
Although it is determined at a rate of 0%, pseudo-joint may also be determined in the case of a small win. Also, according to FIG. 13-1 (A), the special figure fluctuation time of the small hit (variation pattern # 16) is 1
Although it is 5 seconds, the special figure fluctuation time of the small hit (variation pattern #16) may be lengthened (for example, the small hit Then at most pseudo-ream 1
If it is up to the times, it is about the same as the special figure fluctuation time of normal reach, and if it is allowed to have two or more pseudo consecutives, it may be about the same as the special figure fluctuation time of super reach).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 011SH executes a battle effect (a weak battle, a medium battle, or a strong battle) in super reach (see FIG. 13-1(A)). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of production patterns for battle production (battle production production patterns) are prepared. Each of the plurality of types of battle effects can be identified by a battle effect pattern.

FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4 are explanatory diagrams explaining the battle effect. Figure 13-5
is an example of the production of each scene of the battle production. FIG. 13-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the battle effect.

"Light Title" in the "Contents" column of FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4 is an effect of displaying a title suggesting the start of a light battle. For example, a weak title image 011SHJT as shown in FIG. 13-5(A) is displayed. Weak title image 011SHJ shown in FIG. 13-5(A)
In T, the opponent in the battle is character A (a strong enemy that appears as an opponent in a weak battle), and the expectation of victory is 1 star (the opponent is a strong enemy, so the expectation of victory is relatively low). ) is shown.

"Medium title" is an effect of displaying a title suggesting the start of a medium battle. For example, a middle title image 011SHTT as shown in FIG. 13-5(B) is displayed. Figure 13-
In the middle title image 011SHTT shown in 5(B), the opponent in the battle is Character B (the middle enemy who appears as the opponent in the middle battle), and the expectation of victory is 2 stars (the opponent is Since it is a medium enemy, the expectation of victory is medium) is shown.

The “strong title” is an effect of displaying a title suggesting the start of a strong battle. For example, a strong title image 011SHKT as shown in FIG. 13-5(C) is displayed. Figure 13-
In the strong title image 011SHKT shown in 5 (C), the battle opponent is character C (a weak enemy that appears as an opponent in a strong battle), and the expectation of victory is 3 stars (the opponent is Since it is a weak enemy, the expectation of victory is relatively high).

“Start of weak battle” is an effect for notifying the start of a weak battle. For example, Figure 13-5 (D
), a weak battle start image 011SHJBS is displayed. The weak battle start image 011SHJBS shown in FIG. 13-5(D) indicates that a battle with character A (a strong enemy who appears as an opponent in a weak battle) will start.

"Mid-battle start" is an effect for notifying the start of a mid-battle. For example, Figure 13-5 (E
), a middle battle start image 011SHTBS is displayed. The middle battle start image 011SHTBS shown in FIG. 13-5(E) indicates that a battle with character B (a middle enemy who appears as an opponent in the middle battle) will start.

“Start of strong battle” is an effect for notifying the start of a strong battle. For example, Figure 13-5 (F
), a strong battle start image 011SHKBS is displayed. The strong battle start image 011SHKBS shown in FIG. 13-5(F) indicates that a battle with character C (a weak enemy who appears as an opponent in a strong battle) will start.

"Accessory action present" is an effect for moving the movable body 011SH32. For example, Figure 13-
As shown in 5(G), the movable body 011SH32 is operated.

"Battle (Loss)" is an effect for reporting defeat as a battle result. For example, Figure 13-
A LOSE image 011SHKH1 as shown in 5(H) is displayed.

"Battle (win)" is an effect for announcing victory as a result of the battle. For example, Figure 13-
WIN image 011SHKH2 as shown in 5(I) is displayed.

"Relief (win)" is a relief effect (simply "
(sometimes referred to as “relief”). For example, a relief effect as shown in FIG. 13-5(J) is executed.

Figure 13-3 (A) shows super reach (weak battle) missing (that is, variation pattern # 13
) shows the content of the battle production. In the super reach (weak battle) out, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1" or the battle production pattern "BP-
J-L2" battle production is executed.

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-J-L1” is, as shown in FIG. be. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-J-L1”, a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011S in FIG. 13-5(A)
HJT is displayed), followed by notification of the start of a weak battle (for example, the weak battle start image 011SHJBS in FIG. 13-5 (D) is displayed), and during the weak battle, as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G) There is an action of movable body 011SH32, and defeat is reported as a battle result (for example, Fig. 13-
5(H) LOSE image 011SHKH1 is displayed).

The battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-J-L2” is, as shown in FIG. 13-3(A), a battle effect of a mode of effect such as weak title→start of weak battle→battle (lost). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1" and the battle production pattern "B
P-J-L2" battle effect is that the action of the movable body 011SH32 is performed in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-J-L1", whereas the battle effect pattern "BP-J-
L2" differs in that the movable body 011SH32 does not move in the battle presentation.

In addition, in the super reach (weak battle) loss (variation pattern # 13), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1" or the battle production pattern "BP-J-L2"
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. The pattern "BP-J-L2" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the determined one is executed.

Figure 13-3 (B) is a super reach (weak battle) big hit (that is, variation pattern # 18
) shows the content of the battle production. In the super reach (weak battle) jackpot, the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1" or the battle production pattern "BP-
J-W2" battle production, or battle production pattern "BP-J-W3" battle production,
Alternatively, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-J-W4" is executed.

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-J-W1” is, as shown in FIG. be. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-J-W1”, a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011S in FIG. 13-5(A)
HJT is displayed), followed by notification of the start of a weak battle (for example, the weak battle start image 011SHJBS in FIG. 13-5 (D) is displayed), and during the weak battle, as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G) There is an action of movable body 011SH32, and victory is announced as a battle result (Fig. 13-5 (I)
WIN image 011SHKH2) is displayed.

The battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-J-W2” is, as shown in FIG. 13-3(B), a battle effect of a mode of effect such as weak title→start of weak battle→battle (win). In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1" and the battle production pattern "B
PJ-W2" battle production is that the action of the movable body 011SH32 is performed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1", whereas the battle production pattern "BP-J-
W2" is different in that the movable body 011SH32 does not move in the battle presentation.

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-J-W3” is, as shown in FIG. It is a battle production of the mode. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-J-W3”, a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5(A) is displayed), followed by The start of a weak battle is announced (for example, Figure 13-5
(D) weak battle start image 011SHJBS is displayed), and during the weak battle, FIG. 13-5 (G
), there is an action of the movable body 011SH32, and as a result of the battle, defeat is reported (for example, the LOSE image 011SHKH1 in FIG. 13-5(H) is displayed), followed by FIG.
A relief effect is executed as shown in 5(J).

The battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W4" is, as shown in FIG. be. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-J-W3" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-J-W4" are the same as the battle effect pattern "BP-J-W3".
The movable body 011SH32 is moved in the battle effect pattern "BP-J-W4", whereas the movable body 011SH32 is not moved in the battle effect pattern "BP-J-W4".

In addition, in the super reach (weak battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 18), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1" or the battle production pattern "BP-J-W2"
or the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-J-W3" or the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-J-W4" is executed.
For example, as shown in FIG.
%, the battle production pattern "BP-J-W2" is determined at a rate of 30%, the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the battle production pattern "B
PJ-W4" is determined at a rate of 10%, and any determined is executed.

Figure 13-3 (C) is super reach (medium battle) lost (that is, variation pattern # 14
) shows the content of the battle production. In the super reach (medium battle), the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1" or the battle production pattern "BP-
TL2" battle production, or battle production pattern "BP-T-L3" battle production,
Alternatively, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L4" is executed.

The battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-T-L1” is, as shown in FIG. It's a battle performance. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-T-L1”, a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5(A) is displayed), followed by A title suggesting the start of a medium battle is displayed (
For example, the middle title image 011SHTT is displayed in FIG. During the battle, the movable body 011SH32 moves as shown in FIG.
KH1 is displayed).

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-T-L2” is, as shown in FIG. be. That is, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L1" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L2" are the same as the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L1".
In contrast to the display of weak titles in the battle production pattern, the battle production pattern "BP-T
-L2” is different in that weak titles are not displayed in the battle production.

The battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-T-L3” is, as shown in FIG. 13-3(C), a battle effect of a mode of effect such as weak title→medium title→start of medium battle→battle (lost). That is, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L1" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L3" are the same as the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L1".
The movable body 011SH32 moves in the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L3", whereas the movable body 011SH32 does not move in the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L3".

The battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-T-L4” is, as shown in FIG. 13-3(C), a battle effect of a mode of effect such as middle title→start of middle battle→battle (lost). In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2" and the battle production pattern "B
PT-L4", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2" moves the movable body 011SH32, while the battle production pattern "BP-T-
L4" differs in that the movable body 011SH32 does not move in the battle presentation.

In addition, in the super reach (medium battle) loss (variation pattern #14), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1" or the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2"
, or the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L3", or the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L4".
For example, as shown in FIG. 13-6(B), the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L1"
%, the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2" is determined at a rate of 20%, the battle production pattern "BP-T-L3" is determined at a rate of 30%, and the battle production pattern "B
PT-L4" is determined at a rate of 40%, and the determined one is executed.

Figure 13-3 (D) is a super reach (medium battle) hit (that is, variation pattern # 19
) shows the content of the battle production. In the super reach (medium battle) jackpot, the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1" or the battle production pattern "BP-
TW2" battle production, or battle production pattern "BP-T-W3" battle production,
Or, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W4", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6", or A battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W7" or a battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W8" is executed.

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-T-W1” is, as shown in FIG. It's a battle performance. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-T-W1”, a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5(A) is displayed), followed by A title suggesting the start of a medium battle is displayed (
For example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5(B) is displayed), the movable body 011SH32 moves as shown in FIG. 13-5(I) WIN image 011SHKH2 is displayed).

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-T-W2” is, as shown in FIG. be. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W1" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W2" are the same as the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W1".
In contrast to the display of weak titles in the battle production pattern, the battle production pattern "BP-T
-W2” is different in that weak titles are not displayed in the battle production.

The battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-T-W3” is, as shown in FIG. 13-3(D), a battle effect of a mode of effect such as weak title→medium title→start of medium battle→battle (win). That is, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W1" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W3" are the same as the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W1".
The movable body 011SH32 is moved in the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W3", whereas the movable body 011SH32 is not moved in the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W3".

The battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W4" is, as shown in FIG. 13-3(D), a battle effect in the form of medium title→start of medium battle→battle (win). In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2" and the battle production pattern "B
P-T-W4" battle effect is that the action of the movable body 011SH32 is performed in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W2", whereas the battle effect pattern "BP-T-
W4" differs in that the movable body 011SH32 does not move in the battle presentation.

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-T-W5” is, as shown in FIG. ) is a battle production in a production mode. In other words, in the battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-T-W5”, a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, FIG. 13-5 (A)
The weak title image 011SHJT is displayed), followed by the display of a title suggesting the start of a middle battle (for example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5(B) is displayed),
During the middle battle, as shown in FIG. 13-5(G), the movable body 011SH32 moves, and as a result of the battle, defeat is reported (for example, the LOSE image 011SHKH1 in FIG. 13-5(H) is displayed), followed by , a relief effect is executed as shown in FIG. 13-5(J).

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-T-W6” is, as shown in FIG. It is a battle production of the mode. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-T-W5” and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-T-W6” are different from the battle effect pattern “BP
-TW5", weak titles are displayed, while weak titles are not displayed in the battle presentation pattern "BP-TW6".

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-T-W7” is shown in FIG. It's a battle performance. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-T-W5” and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-T-W7” are different from the battle effect pattern “BP
-TW5”, the movable body 011SH32 moves, whereas in the battle performance pattern “BP-T-W7”, the movable body 011SH32 does not move.

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-T-W8” is, as shown in FIG. be. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W6" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W8" are the same as the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W6".
The movable body 011SH32 is moved in the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W8", whereas the movable body 011SH32 is not moved in the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W8".

In addition, in the super reach (medium battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 19), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1" or the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2"
or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W3", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W4", or the battle production pattern "BP-T
-W5" battle production, or battle production pattern "BP-T-W6", or battle production pattern "BP-T-W7", or battle production pattern "
BP-T-W8” is described as executing the battle production, but specifically, for example, FIG.
As shown in 6(B), the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1" is determined at a rate of 20%, the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the battle production pattern "BP-T-W3" is determined at a rate of 15%, battle production pattern "BP-T-W4" is determined at a rate of 15%, battle production pattern "BP-T-W5" is determined at a rate of 10% , the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6" is determined at a rate of 10%, the battle production pattern "BP-T-W7" is determined at a rate of 5%, and the battle production pattern "BP-T- W8" to 5
It is determined by the percentage of the percentage, and the determined one is executed.

Figure 13-4 (A) shows super reach (strong battle) missing (that is, variation pattern # 15
) shows the content of the battle production. In the super reach (strong battle) out, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1" or the battle production pattern "BP-
KL2" battle production, or battle production pattern "BP-K-L3" battle production,
Alternatively, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L4", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L5", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L6" is executed. .

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-K-L1” is, as shown in FIG. 13-4(A), weak title→medium title→strong title→start of strong battle→with character action→battle (lost). It is a battle production of the production mode. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-K-L1”, a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, FIG. 13-5 (A)
The weak title image 011SHJT is displayed), followed by the display of a title suggesting the start of a middle battle (for example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5(B) is displayed),
Subsequently, a title suggesting the start of a strong battle is displayed (for example, the strong title image 011SHKT in FIG. 13-5(C) is displayed), followed by notification of the start of a strong battle (for example, FIG. 13
-5 (F) strong battle start image 011SHKBS is displayed), and Figure 13-5 during the strong battle
As shown in (G), there is an action of the movable body 011SH32, and a defeat is reported as a result of the battle (
For example, the LOSE image 011SHKH1 in FIG. 13-5(H) is displayed).

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-K-L2” is shown in FIG. 13-4(A), in the form of medium title→strong title→strong battle start→character action present→battle (lost). It's a battle performance. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L1" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L2" are different from the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L2".
-K-L1", weak titles are displayed, while weak titles are not displayed in the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L2".

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-K-L3” is, as shown in FIG. be. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L2" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L3" are the same as the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L2".
While the middle title is displayed in the battle production pattern, the battle production pattern “BP-K
-L3” differs in that the middle title is not displayed in the battle production.

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-K-L4” is, as shown in FIG. is. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L1" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L4" are different from the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L4".
-K-L1", the action of the movable body 011SH32 is performed.

The battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-K-L5” is, as shown in FIG. 13-4(A), a battle effect in the form of medium title→strong title→strong battle start→battle (lost). That is, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L2" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L5" are the same as the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L2".
The movable body 011SH32 is moved in the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L5", whereas the movable body 011SH32 is not moved in the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L5".

The battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-K-L6” is, as shown in FIG. 13-4(A), a battle effect in the form of strong title→strong battle start→battle (lost). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3" and the battle production pattern "B
PK-L6" battle effect is that the action of the movable body 011SH32 is performed in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L3", whereas the battle effect pattern "BP-K-
L6" differs in that the movable body 011SH32 does not move in the battle presentation.

In addition, in the super reach (strong battle) loss (variation pattern #15), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1" or the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2"
or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L4", or the battle production pattern "BP-K
-L5” or the battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-K-L6” is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. The pattern "BP-K-L1" is determined at a rate of 5%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-L
2" is determined at a rate of 10%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3" is determined at a rate of 15%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-L4" is determined at a rate of 15%, and the battle The production pattern "BP-K-L5" is determined at a rate of 25%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-L
6” at a rate of 30%, and execute any of the decisions.

Figure 13-4 (B) is a super reach (strong battle) hit (that is, variation pattern # 20
) shows the content of the battle production. In the super reach (strong battle) jackpot, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1" or the battle production pattern "BP-
K-W2" battle production, or battle production pattern "BP-K-W3" battle production,
Alternatively, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W5", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W6", or Battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7", or battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8", or battle production pattern "BP-K-W9"
”, or the battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-K-W10”, or
Battle production pattern "BP-K-W11" or battle production pattern "B
PK-W12" battle effect is executed.

The battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W1" is, as shown in FIG. 13-4(B), weak title→medium title→strong title→start of strong battle→with character action→battle (win). It is a battle production of the production mode. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-K-W1”, a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, FIG. 13-5 (A)
is displayed), followed by a title suggesting the start of a middle battle (for example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5(B) is displayed),
Subsequently, a title suggesting the start of a strong battle is displayed (for example, a strong title image 011SHKT in FIG. 13-5 (C) is displayed), and during the strong battle, the movable body is shown in FIG. 13-5 (G). There is an operation of 011SH32, and victory is announced as a battle result (WI
N image 011SHKH2 is displayed).

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-K-W2” is shown in FIG. 13-4(B) in the form of medium title→strong title→strong battle start→character action present→battle (win). It's a battle performance. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W1" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W2" are different from the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W2".
-K-W1", weak titles are displayed, while weak titles are not displayed in the battle effect pattern "BP-KW2".

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-K-W3” is, as shown in FIG. be. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W2" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W3" are the same as the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W2".
While the middle title is displayed in the battle production pattern, the battle production pattern “BP-K
-W3” is different in that the middle title is not displayed in the battle production.

The battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4" is, as shown in FIG. is. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W1" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W4" are different from the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W4".
-K-W1", the movable body 011SH32 moves, whereas in the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4", the movable body 011SH32 does not move.

The battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-K-W5” is, as shown in FIG. 13-4(B), a battle effect in the form of medium title→strong title→strong battle start→battle (win). In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W2" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W5" are the same as the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W2".
The movable body 011SH32 is moved in the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W5", whereas the movable body 011SH32 is not moved in the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W5".

The battle effect of the battle effect pattern “BP-K-W6” is, as shown in FIG. 13-4(B), a battle effect of the mode of effect such as strong title→strong battle start→battle (win). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W3" and the battle production pattern "B
PK-W6" battle effect is that the action of the movable body 011SH32 is performed in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W3", while the battle effect pattern "BP-K-
W6" differs in that the movable body 011SH32 does not move in the battle presentation.

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-K-W7” is, as shown in FIG.
This is a battle production in the form of a rescue (win). In other words, the battle production pattern "BP-
K-W7", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, in Figure 1
3-5 (A) weak title image 011SHJT is displayed), followed by the display of a title suggesting the start of a middle battle (for example, the middle title image 011SHTT of FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed), followed by Then, a title suggesting the start of a strong battle is displayed (for example, Figure 13-5 (
C) strong title image 011SHKT is displayed), the movable body 011SH32 moves as shown in FIG. ) is displayed), followed by FIG. 13-5 (J
), a relief effect is executed.

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-K-W8” is, as shown in FIG. ) is a battle production in a production mode. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W7" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W8" are the weak titles in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W7". While the display is performed, the weak title is not displayed in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W8".

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-K-W9” is, as shown in FIG. It is a battle production of the mode. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W8" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W9" are different from the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W9".
-K-W8", middle titles are displayed, while in battle production pattern "BP-K-W9", middle titles are not displayed.

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-K-W10” is, as shown in FIG.
It is a battle production of such a production mode. In other words, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7"
and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W10", the action of the movable body 011SH32 is performed in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W7", whereas the battle effect pattern Movable body 011SH in the battle production of "BP-K-W10"
The difference is that the operation of 32 is not performed.

The battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W11" is shown in FIG. It's a battle performance. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W8" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W11" are different from the battle effect pattern "
BP-K-W8", the action of the movable body 011SH32 is performed, whereas the battle action of the battle presentation pattern "BP-K-W11" is different in that the action of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

The battle production of the battle production pattern “BP-K-W12” is, as shown in FIG. be. In other words, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W9" and the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W12" are different from the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W".
9", the action of the movable body 011SH32 is performed, whereas the action of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed in the battle presentation of the battle presentation pattern "BP-K-W12".

In addition, in the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 20), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1" or the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2"
or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W3", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4", or the battle production pattern "BP-K
-W5" battle production, or battle production pattern "BP-K-W6", or battle production pattern "BP-K-W7", or battle production pattern "
BP-K-W8" battle production, or battle production pattern "BP-K-W9", or battle production pattern "BP-K-W10", or battle production pattern "BP- K-W11" battle production or battle production pattern "BP-K-W
12" is executed, specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. The battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" is determined at a rate of 15%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K
-W3" at a rate of 15%, battle production pattern "BP-K-W4" at a rate of 9%, battle production pattern "BP-K-W5" at a rate of 8%, The battle production pattern "BP-K-W6" is determined at a rate of 8%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7" is determined.
” is determined at a rate of 6%, the battle production pattern “BP-K-W8” is determined at a rate of 6%, the battle production pattern “BP-K-W9” is determined at a rate of 6%, and the battle production pattern"
BP-K-W10" is determined at a rate of 4%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W11" is determined at a rate of 4%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-W12" is determined at a rate of 4%. decide and
Do whatever you decide.

According to Figure 13-6 (A), super reach (weak battle) lost (fluctuation pattern # 13
), the battle production (“BP-J-L2”) that does not include “with character action” is higher than the battle production (“BP-J-L1”) that includes “with character action” determined by On the other hand, in the super reach (weak battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 18), the battle production (“BP-J-W1”, “BP-J-W3”) including “role action” is more “role It is determined at a higher rate than the battle effects (“BP-J-W2”, “BP-J-W4”) that do not include “physical action”. Therefore, when the movable body 011SH32 moves during a weak battle, the expectation of winning (the expectation of a big hit) is higher than when the movable body 011SH32 does not move during a weak battle.

Similarly, according to FIG. 13-6(B), when the movable body 011SH32 moves during the middle battle, the win expectation (big hit) is higher than when the movable body 011SH32 does not move during the middle battle. expectations) are high. Also, according to FIG. 13-6(C), during the strong battle, the movable body 011
The degree of expectation for victory (the degree of expectation for a big hit) is higher when there is an action of SH32 than when there is no action of the movable body 011SH32 during a strong battle.

Further, according to FIG. 13-6 (B), in the super reach (medium battle) deviation (variation pattern # 14), the battle production (BP-T-L2, BP-T-L4
) is determined at a higher rate than the battle effects (BP-T-L1, BP-T-L3) including the “weak title”. On the other hand, super reach (medium battle) big hit (fluctuation pattern # 19
), battle productions including “weak titles” (BP-T-W1, BP-T-W3, BP-T
-W5, BP-T-W7) and battle effects that do not include "weak titles" (BP-T-W2,
BP-T-W4, BP-T-W6, BP-T-W8) do not differ in decision ratio. Therefore, if the start of a medium battle is suggested after the start of a weak battle is suggested and a medium battle is started (so-called, when a weak battle becomes a medium battle), it is better to start a medium battle from the beginning. The degree of expectation of victory (the degree of expectation of a big hit) is higher than in the case where a middle battle is started after being suggested.

Similarly, according to FIG. 13-6 (C), after the start of a weak battle is suggested, the start of a medium battle is suggested, and the start of a strong battle is suggested, and a strong battle is started (weak battle , medium battle, and strong battle), when the start of a strong battle is suggested after the start of a medium battle is suggested, and a strong battle is started (when a medium battle and strong battle occur) Winning expectation (expectation to be a big hit) is higher than that. Also, if the start of a strong battle is suggested after the start of a medium battle is suggested and a strong battle starts (if it becomes a medium battle, a strong battle), it is suggested that a strong battle will start from the beginning. The expectation of victory (expectation of a big hit) is higher than when a strong battle is started.

Further, according to FIG. 13-6 (A), in the super reach (weak battle) jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 18), the battle production (“BP-J-W1”, “BP -J
-W2”) is more of a battle production including “relief (win)” (“BP-J-W3”, “BP-J
-W4”) at a higher rate. Therefore, when winning in a weak battle,
Winning without relief is more frequent than winning with relief.

Similarly, according to FIG. 13-6(B), when winning in a middle battle, the frequency of winning without relief is higher than the frequency of winning via relief. Also, according to FIG. 13-6(C), when winning in a strong battle, the frequency of winning without relief is higher than the frequency of winning via relief.

FIG. 13-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining item image effects. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 011SH can execute an item image effect for displaying an item image.

As item images displayed in the item image effect, an up card image 011SHUPC as shown in FIG. 13-7(A) and a cancel card image 011SHCXLC as shown in FIG. 13-7(B) are prepared.

Up cards (and cancel cards as well) are not always acquired (obtained), but may or may not be acquired for each change. Acquired up cards (and cancel cards as well) are displayed (stocked and displayed) on the screen for later use.

As shown in FIG. 13-7(C), the acquisition timing of the up card (that is, the stock timing) is immediately after the fluctuation starts or immediately after the reach. The scene of using the up card is at the time of re-fluctuation in the case of pseudo-joint, or at the time of rise in the case of battle rising.

When the up card is used at the time of re-fluctuation in the case of pseudo-continuous, the movement when using the up-card is that the up-card acts on the temporary stop symbol (the stop symbol is UP to the pseudo-continuous symbol (re-fluctuation symbol) ( change)), and as a result, it is changed again (Fig. 13-9 (H4
) to Figure 13-9 (L4)). When the up card is used at the time of the rise when there is a battle rise, the movement when using the up card is that the up card affects the title ("weak title" or "medium title") UP (change) to things, and as a result, the battle production is established (Fig. 13-11 (C3
) to Figure 13-11 (F3)). In addition, whether or not to acquire an up card, acquisition timing,
A method of determining the use scene and the like will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 13-7(C), the acquisition timing of the cancel card (that is, the timing of stocking) is immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reach. The scene of using the cancel card is at the time of re-fluctuation in the case of pseudo-joint, at the time of rise in the case of battle rising, and at the time of relief in the case of relief.

When the cancel card is used at the time of re-fluctuation in the case of pseudo-joint, the movement when using the cancel card is that the cancel card acts on the temporarily suspended symbol (cancels the suspension of the symbol), resulting in a re-fluctuation. (Figure 13-9 (H5) to Figure 13-9
(see L5)). If the cancel card is used at the time of the rise when there is a battle rise, the movement when using the cancel card is the title (
("Weak title" or "Medium title") is affected (cancels the title), and as a result, the battle production is established (Fig. 13-11 (C4) to Fig. 13-11 (F
4) See). When the cancel card is used for relief when there is relief, the movement when using the cancel card affects the result of the battle (cancels the result of defeat), and as a result, the relief effect is executed. (Figure 13-12 (
C2) to FIG. 13-12 (G2)). The method of determining whether or not to obtain the cancellation card, the timing of obtaining the cancellation card, the scene of use, etc. will be described later.

FIG. 13-8 is an example of an effect operation related to the pseudo consecutive notice effect. FIG. 13-8 illustrates an example of the effect operation for three flows. First, Figure 13-8 (A) → Figure 13-
8 (B) → Figure 13-8 (C) → Figure 13-8 (D) → Figure 13-8 (E1) → Figure 13-8 (F
The flow of 1) is an example of the effect operation in the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols are stopped and pushed, but the pseudo consecutive symbols do not stop and are lost. Second, Figure 13-8 (A) → Figure 13-8 (B) → Figure 13-8 (C) → Figure 13-8 (D) → Figure 13-8 (E2) → Figure 13-8 ( The flow of F2) is an example of the effect operation in the case where the simulated consecutive symbols are urged to stop, but the simulated consecutive symbols do not stop and develop into super ready-to-win. Third, Figure 13-8 (A) → Figure 13-8 (B) → Figure 13-8 (C) → Figure 13-8 (D) → Figure 13-8 (E3) → Figure 13-8 ( The flow of F3) is an example of an effect operation in the case where the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped and the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped.

FIG. 13-8(A) shows the scene just before reaching the reach of symbol "7". Figure 13-8 (B)
is a scene where the reach of the symbol "7" is reached. FIG. 13-8(C) shows the scene just before the pseudo-continuous pattern stop-flashing is performed to see if the pseudo-continuous symbol "again" is stopped in the middle symbol. Figure 13-8 (
D) is a scene in which the simulated consecutive symbols are stopped and pushed to see if the pseudo consecutive symbols "again" will be stopped in the medium symbols.

Fig. 13-8 (E1) is a scene following Fig. 13-8 (D).
” is the scene just before it stops. FIG. 13-8 (F1) shows a scene in which the middle symbol "6" is stopped. In other words, this is the scene where the normal reach is lost. However, Figure 13-8
The scene of (F1) appears not only in a scene where normal reach is lost, but also in a scene where an item is used, as will be described later (see FIG. 13-9)).

Fig. 13-8 (E2) is another scene following Fig. 13-8 (D), in which the suspension of the pseudo-continuous symbol "Re" as the middle symbol is denied (the suspension of the symbol "6" is also denied). It is a scene. Figure 13-8 (
F2) is a scene in which the medium pattern fluctuates at high speed and develops into super reach.

FIG. 13-8 (E3) is another scene following FIG. 13-8 (D), which is the scene immediately before the stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol "again" as the middle symbol. FIG. 13-8 (F3) shows a scene in which the pseudo consecutive symbol "again" is stopped as the middle symbol. In other words, although not shown, re-variable display is performed following FIG. 13-8 (F3).

FIG. 13-9 is an example of an effect operation related to the pseudo consecutive notice effect. In Figure 13-9, Figure 13
As a scene following -8 (F1), an example of the effect operation is explained for two flows. First, Figure 13-9 (G4) → Figure 13-9 (H4) → Figure 1 following Figure 13-8 (F1)
The flow of 3-9 (I4) → FIG. 13-9 (J4) → FIG. 13-9 (K4) → FIG. 13-9 (L4) is an example of the performance operation when the up card is used and there is a change again. . Second, Figure 1
Following 3-8 (F1), Figure 13-9 (G5) → Figure 13-9 (H5) → Figure 13-9 (I5)
→ Fig. 13-9 (J5) → Fig. 13-9 (K5) → Fig. 13-9 (L5) is an example of the performance operation when the cancel card is used and the price changes again.

FIG. 13-9 (G4) is a scene subsequent to FIG. 13-8 (F1), in which an activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting activation (use) of the up card is displayed. In addition, Figure 13-8 when it does not follow Figure 13-9 (G4) (normal reach is lost)
The middle symbol "6" in (F1) definitely stops, but if it continues to FIG. 13-9 (G4) (
The middle symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) in FIG. 13-8 (F1) does not definitely stop (eg, slightly swaying, etc.). That is, the medium symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) following FIG. 13-9 (G4) is a temporary stop symbol.

FIG. 13-9 (H4) shows a scene in which the use of the up card is notified. Specifically, the up-card image 011SHUPC is displayed large in the center of the screen. Although the details will be described later, there are cases where upcards are used after being acquired (stocked) (that is, when stocked upcards are used), and they are used even though they are not acquired (stocked). (used when there is no stock of upcards).

FIG. 13-9 (I4) shows a scene in which the up card acts on the symbol "6" which is the temporary stop symbol. Specifically, an up-card image 011SHU is displayed on the symbol "6", which is the temporary stop symbol.
PCs are superimposed and displayed. Fig. 13-9 (J4) is a symbol "6" with an up card.
This is the scene where the FIG. 13-9 (K4) shows the scene immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol “again” stops. FIG. 13-9 (L4) shows a scene in which the pseudo-continuous symbol "again" is stopped. That is, Figures 13-9 (H4) to Figure 13-9 (L4) show the scene in which the up card acts on the temporary stop symbol "6" (the scene in which the stop symbol "6" is upgraded to the pseudo consecutive symbol "again"). is. Although not shown, re-variable display is performed following FIG. 13-9 (L4).

FIG. 13-9 (G5) is another scene following FIG. 13-8 (F1), in which an activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting activation (use) of the cancel card is displayed. In addition, if it does not continue to Figure 13-9 (G5) (if normal reach is lost), the middle pattern "6" in Figure 13-8 (F1) will definitely stop, but in Figure 13-9 (G5) In the following case (when a cancel card is used later), the middle symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) definitely does not stop (for example, slightly swaying, etc.). In other words, Figure 13-9 (G
The middle symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) following 5) is a temporary stop symbol.

FIG. 13-9 (H5) shows a scene in which the fact that the cancellation card will be used is notified. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHCXLC is displayed large in the center of the screen. Although the details will be described later, there are cases where a cancel card is used after being acquired (stocked) (that is, when a canceled card that has been stocked is used), or it is used even though it is not acquired (stocked). In some cases (used when there is no stock of cancellation cards).

FIG. 13-9 (I5) shows a scene in which the cancel card acts on the symbol "6" which is the temporary stop symbol. Specifically, the cancel card image 01 is displayed on the symbol "6" which is the temporary stop symbol.
1SHCXLC is superimposed. FIG. 13-9 (J5) shows the scene immediately before the symbol "6" affected by the cancel card is canceled (destroyed, etc.). FIG. 13-9 (K5) shows a scene in which the symbol "6" is canceled (destroyed, etc.). FIG. 13-9 (L5) shows a scene in which a pseudo-continuous symbol "again" is displayed in place of the canceled (destroyed, etc.) symbol "6".
In other words, in FIGS. 13-9 (H5) to 13-9 (L5), the cancel card is a temporary stop symbol “
6" (a scene where the stop of symbol "6" is canceled and replaced with pseudo-continuous symbol "again"). Although not shown, re-variable display is performed following FIG. 13-9 (L5).

It should be noted that the execution mode of the pseudo-continuous fanning effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the ready-to-win pattern (Fig. 1
In the example of 3-8 and Figure 13-9, the symbol "7") and the symbol one before the reach symbol (Figure 13-8
And in the example of FIG. 13-9, a pseudo-continuous symbol "re" is inserted between the symbols "6"), and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Therefore, for example, when the ready-to-win pattern is "3", a pseudo-ream pattern "re" is inserted between the ready-to-win pattern "3" and the symbol "2" one before the ready-to-win pattern, and a pseudo-reaming effect (for example, , the scene of FIG. 13-8(D) executes a production to incite whether the middle symbol becomes a pseudo-continuous symbol “again” or a symbol “2”).

FIG. 13-10 is an example of the effect operation related to the title display of the battle effect. Figure 13-1
0 describes an example of an effect operation for two types of flows. First, Figure 13-10
The flow from (A) to FIG. 13-10 (B1) is an example of an effect operation when a weak battle is started. Secondly, the flow of FIG. 13-10(A)→FIG. 13-10(B2)→FIG. 13-10(C2) is an example of the effect operation when a middle battle is started.

FIG. 13-10(A) shows a scene in which the weak title image 011SHJT is displayed. Figure 1
3-10 (B1) is a scene following FIG. 13-10 (A), a weak battle start image 011
This is the scene where SHJBS is displayed. Although not shown, a weak battle with character A is performed following FIG. 13-10 (B1).

FIG. 13-10(B2) is another scene following FIG. 13-10(A), and is a scene in which the medium title image 011SHTT is displayed. Fig. 13-10 (C2) is the middle battle start image 0
This is the scene where 11SHTBS is displayed. Although not shown, Fig. 13-10 (C2
), a medium battle with character B is performed. In other words, Fig. 13-10 (A) → Fig. 13-
The flow from 10 (B2) to FIG. 13-10 (C2) represents a scene where a weak battle progresses to a medium battle.

FIG. 13-11 shows an example of the effect operation related to the title display of the battle effect. Figure 13-1
In 1, as a scene following FIG. 13-10(A), an example of an effect operation is explained for two flows. First, Figure 13-11 (B3) following Figure 13-10 (A) → Figure 13-
11 (C3) → Figure 13-11 (D3) → Figure 13-11 (E3) → Figure 13-11 (F3) →
The flow of FIG. 13-11 (G3) is an example of an effect operation when an up card is used and a weak battle progresses to a medium battle. Second, Figure 13-1 following Figure 13-10(A)
1 (B4) → Figure 13-11 (C4) → Figure 13-11 (D4) → Figure 13-11 (E4) → Figure 13-11 (F4) → Figure 13-11 (G4) is used, and it is an example of the performance operation in the case of rising from a weak battle to a medium battle.

FIG. 13-11(B3) is another scene following FIG. 13-10(A), and is a scene in which an activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting activation (use) of the up card is displayed. FIG. 13-11 (C3) shows a scene in which the use of the up card is notified. Specifically, the up-card image 011SHUPC is displayed large in the center of the screen.

Figure 13-11 (D3) is a scene in which an up card acts on a weak title. Specifically, the up-card image 011SHUPC is superimposed on the weak title image 011SHJT.

Fig. 13-11 (E3) shows the scene where the weak title changed by the up card.
Specifically, instead of the weak title image 011SHJT, a weak medium title image 011SHJT is displayed.
showing T. Weak medium title image 011SHJTT is weak title image 011SHJ
T and the medium title image 011SHTT (on the way from the weak title image 011SHJT to the medium title image 011SHTT). That is, the weak title image 011SHJT indicates that the opponent in the battle is Character A and the expected degree of victory is 1 star, and the medium title image 011SHTT indicates that the opponent in the battle is Character B. The low-medium title image 011SHJTT displays that the opponent in the battle is Character A and that the expected degree of victory is 2 stars.

In addition, FIG. 13-11 (E3) shows a weak medium title image 01 between the weak title image 011SHJT and the medium title image 011SHTT when the up card acts on the weak title.
An example of displaying 1SHJTT is shown, but when the up card acts on the middle title, the middle strong title image 011SHTT between the middle title image 011SHTT and the strong title image 011SHKT (see FIG. 13-30 (F)) ) is displayed. That is, the medium title image 011SHTT displays that the opponent in the battle is Character B and that the expected degree of victory is 2 stars, and the strong title image 011SHKT displays that the opponent in the battle is Character C. It displays that the expected degree of victory is 3 stars, and the medium-strong title image 011SHTKT displays that the opponent in the battle is character B and that the expected degree of victory is 3 stars.

FIG. 13-11 (F3) shows a scene in which a middle title is displayed. Specifically, instead of the weak medium title image 011SHJTT, the medium title image 011SHTT is displayed. FIG. 13-11 (G3) is a scene in which the middle battle start image 011SHTBS is displayed. Although not shown, a middle battle with character B is performed following FIG. 13-11 (G3). That is, Fig. 13-10 (A) → Fig. 13-11 (B3) → Fig. 13-11 (C3) → Fig. 1
3-11 (D3) → Figure 13-11 (E3) → Figure 13-11 (F3) → Figure 13-11 (G3
) represents a scene in which an up card is used and a weak battle rises to a medium battle.

FIG. 13-11 (B4) is a scene subsequent to FIG. 13-10 (A), in which an activation image 011SHHD2 indicating that the cancel card will be activated (used) is displayed. FIG. 13-11 (C4) shows a scene in which the fact that the cancellation card will be used is notified. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHCXLC is displayed large in the center of the screen.

FIG. 13-11 (D4) is a scene in which a cancel card acts on a weak title. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHCXL is displayed on the weak title image 011SHJT.
C is superimposed and displayed.

FIG. 13-11 (E4) shows a scene in which a weak title is canceled by a cancel card. Specifically, it is a scene in which the weak title image 011SHJT is destroyed. FIG. 13-11 (F4) shows a scene in which a middle title is displayed. Specifically, instead of the destroyed weak title image 011SHJTT, the middle title image 011SHTT is displayed. FIG. 13-11 (G4) is a scene in which the middle battle start image 011SHTBS is displayed. Although not shown, a middle battle with character B is performed following FIG. 13-11 (G4). That is, Fig. 13-10 (A) → Fig. 13-11 (B4) → Fig. 13-11 (C
4) → Figure 13-11 (D4) → Figure 13-11 (E4) → Figure 13-11 (F4) → Figure 13-
The flow of 11 (G4) represents a scene where a cancel card is used and a weak battle rises to a medium battle.

FIGS. 13-12 are examples of effect operations related to relief effects. In FIGS. 13-12, examples of rendering operations are described for two flows. First, Fig. 13-12 (A) → Fig. 13-
12 (B1) → Figure 13-12 (C1) → Figure 13-12 (D1) → Figure 13-12 (E1) →
The flow of FIG. 13-12 (F1) is an example of effect operation when a relief effect is executed without using a cancel card (and without using an up card). Second, Figure 13
-12 (A) → Figure 13-12 (B2) → Figure 13-12 (C2) → Figure 13-12 (D2) →
The flow of FIG. 13-12 (E2)→FIG. 13-12 (F2)→FIG. 13-12 (G2) is an effect operation example when a cancel card is used and a relief effect is executed.

FIG. 13-12(A) shows a scene in which the LOSE image 011SHKH1 is displayed. Figure 1
3-12 (B1) is a scene following FIG. 13-12 (A), LOSE image 011SH
This is the scene where KH1 is destroyed. FIG. 13-12 (C1) shows a scene in which a friendly character stands up. FIG. 13-12 (D1) shows a scene in which a friendly character is counterattacking. FIG. 13-12 (E1) shows the scene after the ally character has delivered the final blow. Figure 1
3-12 (F1) is a scene in which the WIN image 011SHKH2 is displayed.

FIG. 13-12(B2) is another scene following FIG. 13-12(A), in which an activation image 011SHHD2 indicating that the cancel card is activated (used) is displayed. FIG. 13-12 (C2) shows a scene in which the fact that the cancellation card will be used is notified. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHCXLC is displayed large in the center of the screen.

FIG. 13-12 (D2) is a scene in which the cancel card acts on the LOSE image 011SHKH1. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHCXLC is superimposed on the LOSE image 011SHKH1. FIG. 13-12 (E2) shows LOSE image 0
This is the scene where 11SHKH1 is destroyed. FIG. 13-12 (F2) shows the scene after the ally character has delivered the final blow. FIG. 13-11 (G2) is the WIN image 011S
This is the scene where HKH2 is displayed.

FIG. 13-13 is an example of determination ratios such as presence/absence of items targeted for relief.
As described above, in the case of super reach (variation patterns # 13 to # 15, # 18 to #
20), a battle effect is performed (see FIG. 13-1), and the mode of the battle effect (battle effect pattern) is determined for each variation pattern (FIGS. reference)
. The battle production patterns including "relief (win)" are "BP-J-W3" and "BP-J-W4" in the super reach (weak battle) jackpot (fluctuation pattern #18) in Fig. 13-3 (B).
”, and the super reach (medium battle) jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 1 in Figure 13-3 (D)
9) "BP-T-W5" to "BP-T-W8" and "BP-K-W7" in the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 20) in Figure 13-4 (B) "~
It is six of "BP-K-W12". When these battle production patterns are determined, relief production is executed. FIG. 13-13 shows the case where the relief effect is executed (that is, “BP-
J-W3", "BP-J-W4", "BP-T-W5" to "BP-T-W8", "BP-
K-W7” to “BP-K-W12” are determined), the determination ratio (one example) of the presence or absence of items, etc. is shown.

In Fig. 13-13, "Used or not" in the "Whether or not to use, whether or not to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisition" column indicates whether or not items (up cards, cancel cards) are used in the execution of relief effects. be. "Not used" in the column of determination content indicates that the item is not used in executing the relief effect, and "Used" in the column of determination content indicates that the item is used in executing the relief effect.

In Fig. 13-13, "whether or not to acquire" in the "whether to use, whether to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisition" column indicates the acquisition (stock ). "No Acquisition" in the decision column indicates that the item to be used will not be acquired (stocked) when "use" is indicated, and "acquisition" in the decision column indicates whether or not the item will be used. indicates that the item to be used is to be acquired (stocked) when is "used".

In FIG. 13-13, "type" in the column "whether to use, whether to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" is the type of item used when acquiring the item to execute the relief effect. . "Up card" in the column of decision content indicates that an up card will be acquired when "use" is indicated for use and "acquired" for acquisition, and "cancellation card" is indicated in the column for decision content. indicates that a cancellation card is acquired when the usage status is "used" and the acquisition status is "acquired".

In Fig. 13-13, "Timing of acquisition" in the column "Whether or not to use, whether or not to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" is the timing of acquisition when an item to be used in executing the relief effect is acquired. is. "Immediately after the start of change" in the column of decision content indicates that acquisition will be made immediately after the start of change, and "Reach "Immediately after" indicates that it is acquired immediately after reach when the presence or absence of use is "used" and the presence or absence of acquisition is "acquired".

In Fig. 13-13, the "Number of Acquisitions" in the "Whether to Use, Whether to Acquire, Type, Timing of Acquisition, Number of Acquisitions" column is the number of acquisitions when acquiring items to be used when executing a relief effect. be. "1 card" in the decision details column indicates that one card (up card or cancellation card) will be acquired if the usage status is "used" and the acquisition status is "acquired". there is

In other words, the decision items in the decision content column (“not used”, “used, not acquired”, “used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card”, “used, acquired, up card , Immediately after reach, 1 card", "Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card", "Used, 1 card"
Acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card"), "not used" indicates that neither the up card nor the cancel card is used when the relief effect is executed. In other words, it indicates that the relief effect is simply executed without acquiring (stocking) items immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reach, and without using items when executing the relief effect. Fig. 13-12 (A) → Fig. 13-12 (B1) → Fig. 13-12 (C1) → Fig. 13-12
The flow of (D1)→FIG. 13-12 (E1)→FIG. 13-12 (F1) is an example of an effect operation when a relief effect is simply executed.

"Used, not acquired" indicates that the item is used when the relief effect is executed, but the item to be used is not acquired (stocked). In other words, it indicates that the item is used when executing the relief effect without acquiring (stocking) the item immediately after the start of the fluctuation or immediately after the reach. The item used is a cancel card.

"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is related to the execution of the relief effect,
It indicates that one up card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the variation, and the up card is used when executing the relief effect. However, the determination ratio is 0%.

"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" relates to the execution of the relief effect, acquires (stocks) one up card immediately after the reach, and uses the up card when executing the relief effect. It indicates that However, the determination ratio is 0%.

``Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of change, 1 card'' relates to execution of relief effect, acquires (stocks) one cancel card immediately after start of change, and when executing relief effect, cancels the cancel card is used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" relates to the execution of the relief effect, acquires (stocks) one cancel card immediately after the reach, and uses the cancel card when executing the relief effect. It indicates that

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-13, "not used" is determined at a rate of 1%, "used, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 9%, and "used, acquired, up card, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 sheet" is 0
Determined by % ratio, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" determined at 0% rate, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card" It is determined at a rate of 75%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 15%.

According to the example shown in FIGS. 13-13, the cancel card may be used when executing the relief effect, but the up card may not be used. In addition, neither the up card nor the cancel card may be used when executing the relief effect. In the case of executing the relief effect, when the relief effect is executed, the ratio of using the cancel card is 99%, the ratio of using the up card is 0%, and the ratio of using neither the up card nor the cancel card is 1.
%. That is, when the relief effect is executed, the cancel card is used with a very high frequency (99%) when the relief effect is executed.

In addition, the item (specifically, the cancellation card) used when executing the relief effect,
It may be acquired (stocked) or may not be acquired (used without being acquired). When using an item (cancel card) when executing a relief effect, the percentage of acquiring the item (cancelling card) is about 91% (90/99), and the percentage of not acquiring the item (cancelling card) is about 9% (9/99). In other words, when an item (cancel card) is used in executing the relief effect, the item (cancel card) is obtained at a very high frequency (approximately 91%).

Also, when obtaining an item (cancel card) used when executing a relief effect, the item (cancel card) may be obtained immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reach. Approximately 83% (75/90) of the items (cancellation cards) used to execute the relief effect are acquired immediately after the start of the fluctuation.
About 17% (15/90) get it right after reach. That is, when acquiring the item (cancel card) used when executing the relief effect, the frequency of acquisition immediately after the start of the fluctuation is higher than the frequency of acquisition immediately after the reach.

FIGS. 13 and 14 show an example of determination ratios for the presence/absence of items targeting battle risers. As described above, in the case of super reach (variation patterns # 13 to # 15
, #18 to #20), a battle effect is performed (see FIG. 13-1).
Battle effect pattern) is determined for each variation pattern (Fig. 13-3, Fig. 13-4, Fig. 1
3-6). The battle production pattern including "weak title → medium title" or "medium title → strong title" is "BP-T-L1 ”, “BP-T-L3”, and Figure 13-3 (D
) in the super reach (medium battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 19) "BP-TW
1”, “BP-T-W3”, “BP-T-W5”, and “BP-T-W7”, and FIG.
-4 (A) super reach (strong battle) out (variation pattern # 15) "BP
-K-L1", "BP-K-L2", "BP-K-L4", and "BP-K-L5", and the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (variation "BP-K-W1", "BP-K-W2", "BP-K-W4", "BP-K-W5" in pattern #20)
, "BP-K-W7", "BP-K-W8", "BP-K-W10", "BP-K-W1"
1” is eight. When these battle production patterns are determined, a battle rise is executed. FIGS. 13 and 14 show determination ratios (one example) of the presence/absence of items, etc. when a battle rise is executed.

FIG. 13-14(A) shows an example of determination ratios of the presence or absence of items, etc., when the number of times the battle has risen is 1 and no items have been acquired for the purpose of relief. Figure 13-1
4(B) is an example of the determination ratio of the presence or absence of items, etc., when the number of times the battle rises is 1, and the acquisition of items targeting relief is performed. Figure 13-14 (C)
This is an example of determination ratios for the presence or absence of items, etc., when the number of times the battle has risen is two and no items have been acquired for the purpose of relief. FIG. 13-14(D) is an example of determination ratios of the presence/absence of items, etc., in the case where the number of times the battle has risen is two, and items have been acquired for relief.

The number of times the battle rises once corresponds to a medium battle in which a weak title is displayed first, and a strong battle in which a medium title is displayed first. Specifically, two of "BP-T-L1" and "BP-T-L3" in the super reach (medium battle) loss (variation pattern # 14) in Figure 13-3 (C), and Figure 13-3 (D) Super reach (medium battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 19) “BP-T-W1”, “BP
-T-W3", "BP-T-W5", and "BP-T-W7", and "BP- KL2"
, two of "BP-K-L5" and "BP-K-W2", "BP-K-W5" in the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 20) of FIG. 13-4 (B), "BP-K
-W8” and “BP-K-W11”.

The number of times the battle rises twice corresponds to a strong battle, but a weak title is displayed first. Specifically, two of "BP-K-L1" and "BP-K-L4" in Figure 13-4 (A) super reach (strong battle) out (variation pattern # 15), and Figure 13-4 (B) in the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 20)
BP-K-W1", "BP-K-W4", "BP-K-W7", and "BP-K-W10".

Items that are not acquired with relief as a target correspond to cases where relief is not performed, and cases in which relief is performed but items are not acquired (stocked) with relief as a target.
Specifically, when you make a bailout but don't stock an item with the bailout as a target:
Decision items in Figure 13-13 (“not used”, “used, not acquired”, “used, acquired, up card, immediately after fluctuation, 1 card”, “used, acquired, up card, reach Immediately after, one
, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card", "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card"), "not used", "used, not acquired ” is determined.

Acquisition of items targeting salvage corresponds to the case of stocking salvage items. Specifically, the decision items in FIG. , Up card, immediately after reach, 1 card", "Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after fluctuation start, 1 card", "Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after reach, 1 card") Used, Acquired, Up Card, Immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card", "Used, Acquired, Up Card,
Immediately after reach, 1 card", "Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card", "
This is a case where "used", "acquired", "cancelled card", "immediately reached", and "one card" are determined. However, as described above, the decision ratios for "used, acquired, up card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card" and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" are both set to 0%. there is

In Figure 13-14, "Used or not" in the "Whether or not used, whether or not acquired, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquired" column indicates whether or not the item (up card, cancel card) is used during the battle. . "Not used" in the column of determination content indicates that the item is not used when the battle is established, and "Used" in the column of determination content indicates that the item is used when the battle is established.

In Figure 13-14, "whether to use, whether to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column "whether to acquire" indicates the amount of acquisition (stock) of the item when using the item at the time of the rise of the battle. Presence or absence. "Not acquired" in the decision content column indicates whether or not the use is "
In the case of "Used", it indicates that the item to be used is not acquired (stocked), and "Acquired" in the decision content column indicates that the item to be used is acquired (stocked) when the use is "Used". ).

In FIGS. 13-14, "Kind" in the column "Whether to use, whether to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" is the type of item used when acquiring an item to start a battle. "Up card" in the column of decision contents is "used",
Indicate that an up card will be acquired when the acquisition status is "acquired", and for the "cancellation card" in the decision details column, the usage status is "used" and the acquisition status is "acquired".
, it indicates that a cancellation card is to be obtained.

In Fig. 13-14, "Timing to acquire" in the column "Whether to use, whether to acquire, type, timing to acquire, number of acquisitions" is the timing to acquire the item to be used when the battle rises. . "Immediately after the start of change" in the column of decision content indicates that acquisition will be made immediately after the start of change, and "Reach Immediately after”, whether or not it is used is “used”, and whether or not it is acquired is “
In the case of “with acquisition”, it indicates that acquisition will be performed immediately after reach.

In FIGS. 13-14, the "number of acquisitions" in the "whether or not to use, whether or not to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column is the number of acquisitions when acquiring items to be used at the time of the rise of the battle. "1 card" in the decision content column indicates that one card (up card or cancel card) will be acquired when the usage status is "used" and the acquisition status is "acquired". "2 cards" in the decision details column means that 2 cards (2 up cards or 2 cancel cards) are used when "use" is used and "acquisition" is acquired. It indicates that it will be acquired.

13-14(A) (same for Up card, immediately after fluctuation starts, 1 card", "Used, acquired, Up card, immediately after reaching, 1 card", "Used, acquired, canceled card, Immediately after fluctuation starts, 1 card", "Used, Acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card"), "not used" indicates that neither the up card nor the cancel card is used in one battle. In other words, it indicates that the item will not be acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the fluctuation or immediately after reaching the reach, nor will the item be used for the rise of a single battle. . It should be noted that the flow of FIG. 13-10(A)→FIG. 13-10(B2)→FIG. 13-10(C2) is an example of an effect operation in the case where a single battle rise-up is executed.

"Used, not acquired" indicates that the item is used, but the item to be used is not acquired (stocked) in one battle. In other words, it indicates that the item is used at the time of the rise of one battle without acquiring (stocking) the item immediately after the start of the fluctuation or immediately after the reach. The item used is an up card.

"Used, Acquired, Upcard, Immediately after start of change, 1 card" relates to the rise of one battle, and acquires (stocks) one upcard immediately after the start of change, and at the start of one battle , indicates that the up card is to be used.

"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" relates to the rise of one battle, acquires (stocks) one up card immediately after reach, and when the battle rises once, It indicates that an up card is to be used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of change, 1 card" relates to the rise of one battle, and acquires (stocks) one cancel card immediately after the start of change, and at the start of one battle , indicates that the cancel card is to be used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" relates to the rise of one battle, acquires (stocks) one cancel card immediately after reach, and when the battle rises once, It indicates that a cancellation card is to be used.

Also, in FIG. 13-14 (C) (same for FIG. Up card, immediately after fluctuation starts, 1 card", "Used, acquired, Up card, immediately after reaching, 1 card", "Used, acquired, canceled card, Immediately after fluctuation starts, 1 card", "Used, Acquisition Yes, Cancel Card,
Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 2 cards”, “Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card”, “
"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards"), "not used" indicates that neither the up card nor the cancel card is used when the two battles start. In other words, without acquiring (stocking) items immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reach,
In addition, it indicates that the first and second battles are simply executed without using any items for the first and second battles.

"Used, not acquired" indicates that the item is used but the item to be used is not acquired (stocked) when the two battles are established. In other words, it indicates that the item is used at the first and second battles, without acquiring (stocking) the item immediately after the start of the fluctuation or immediately after the reach. The item used is the up card both the first time and the second time.

"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" relates to the rise of two battles, and acquires (stocks) one up card immediately after the start of fluctuation, and the first and second It indicates that an up card will be used when the battle rises. Specifically, immediately after the start of the fluctuation, stock one up card to be used when the first battle rises,
Do not stock up the 1 up card used for the second battle upstart.
Therefore, in the first battle upstart, the stocked up card is used,
In the second battle rise, up cards that are not stocked are used.

"Used, Acquired, Upcard, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" relates to the rise of two battles, and acquires (stocks) one upcard immediately after reach, and the first and second battles It indicates that an up card will be used in the event of an upstart. Specifically, immediately after reach, one up card to be used in the first battle is stocked, and one up card to be used in the second battle is not stocked. Therefore, the stocked up-card is used in the first battle, and the non-stocked up-card is used in the second battle.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of change, 1 card" relates to the rise of two battles, and acquires (stocks) one cancel card immediately after the start of change. It indicates that a cancel card will be used when the battle rises. Specifically, immediately after the start of the fluctuation, cancel card 1 to be used when the first battle rises
Stock up on 1 cancel card, and do not stock up on the 1 cancel card that will be used when the second battle rises. Therefore, the stocked cancel cards are used in the first battle, and the unstocked cancel cards are used in the second battle.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of change, 2 cards" relates to the rise of two battles, and acquires (stocks) two cancel cards immediately after the start of change, and the first and second It indicates that a cancel card will be used when the battle rises. Specifically, immediately after the start of the fluctuation, cancel card 1 to be used when the first battle rises
A total of 2 cards are stocked, 1 card and 1 cancel card to be used when the second battle rises. Therefore, in both the first battle rise and the second battle rise,
Stocked cancellation cards are used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reaching, 1 card" relates to the rise of two battles, and acquires (stocks) one cancel card immediately after reaching, and
It indicates that a cancel card will be used when the battle rises for the second time. Specifically, immediately after reach, one cancel card to be used in the first battle is stocked, and one cancel card to be used in the second battle is not stocked. Therefore, the stocked cancel cards are used in the first battle, and the unstocked cancel cards are used in the second battle.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reaching, 2" relates to the rise of two battles, and acquires (stocks) two cancel cards immediately after reaching, and
It indicates that a cancel card will be used when the battle rises for the second time. Specifically, immediately after reach, one cancel card to be used when the first battle rises,
Stock a total of 2 cards, including 1 cancel card that will be used when the second battle rises. Therefore, the stocked cancel card is used in both the first battle rise and the second battle rise.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (A), when the number of times the battle is started is 1 and no item is acquired for relief, ``not used'' is determined at a rate of 5%, and `` "used, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 40%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation,
1 card" is determined at a rate of 10%, and 'used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card'
is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after fluctuation starts, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 30%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card " to 1
Determined at a rate of 0%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (B), when the number of times the battle has risen is 1, and the acquisition of items targeting relief is possible, ``not used'' is determined at a rate of 5%, and `` "used, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 20%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation,
1 card" is determined at a rate of 10%, and 'used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card'
is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after fluctuation starts, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 40%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card " to 2
Determined at a rate of 0%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (C), when the number of times the battle has started up is 2 times and no item is obtained for relief, ``not used'' is determined at a rate of 5%, and `` "used, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 20%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation,
1 card" is determined at a rate of 10%, and 'used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card'
is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after fluctuation starts, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 25%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after fluctuation starts, 2 card” is determined at a rate of 5%, and 25
%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards" is determined at a rate of 5%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (D), when the number of battles has risen two times and the acquisition of items targeting relief is possible, ``not used'' is determined at a rate of 5%, and `` "used, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 20%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation,
1 card" is determined at a rate of 10%, and 'used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card'
is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after fluctuation starts, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after fluctuation starts, 2 2
Determined at a rate of 5%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is 5%
, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards" is determined at a rate of 25%.

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 13-14, the up card and the cancel card may be used in executing the battle rise. Also, neither the up card nor the cancel card may be used when executing the battle upstart. As an example, Figure 1
In the case of the example shown in 3-14 (A) (when the number of battle rises is 1 and no item is acquired for relief), when the battle rises up, when the battle rises up The rate of card usage is 55%, the rate of cancellation card usage is 40%, and the rate of neither up card nor cancellation card is used is 5%.

In addition, the items (up card, cancel card) used when executing the battle upstart may be acquired (stocked) or not acquired (used without being acquired). As an example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (A) (when the number of battle rises is 1 and no item is acquired for relief), an item (up card , cancellation card), the percentage of obtaining the item is about 58% (55/95), and the percentage of not obtaining the item is about 42%.
% (40/95).

Also, when acquiring items (up card, cancel card) used when executing a battle upstart, the item (up card, cancel card)
It may be obtained immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reach. As an example, FIG.
In the case of the example shown in -14 (A) (when the number of battle rises is 1 and there is no acquisition of items targeting relief), the item used when executing the battle rise (
Up card, cancel card), about 73% (40/55) get it immediately after the start of fluctuation, and about 27% (15/55) just after reach.

FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16 are examples of determination ratios such as presence/absence of items targeting pseudo-runs. As described above, the presence or absence of a pseudo-run and the number of times are determined according to the variation pattern (see FIG. 13-2). Figures 13-15 and 13-16 show determination ratios (examples) for the presence or absence of items when pseudo-running (1-time pseudo-running, 2-time pseudo-running, or 3-time pseudo-running) is determined. there is

FIG. 13-15(A) is an example of determination ratios of the presence/absence of items, etc., in the cases of normal reach (lost) and pseudo-joint. Figure 13-15 (B) is normal reach (jackpot)
, is an example of determination ratios of presence/absence of items, etc., in the case of pseudo-jointness. Figure 13-16 (
A) is an example of determination ratios for the presence or absence of items in the case of super reach (loss) and pseudo-joint. FIG. 13-16(B) is an example of determination ratios for the presence or absence of items, etc., in the case of super reach (big win), pseudo-joint, and the number of acquired cancel cards is 0 to 2. FIG. FIG. 13-16(C) is an example of determination ratios for the presence or absence of items, etc., in the case of super reach (big win), pseudo-joint, and the number of acquired cancel cards is 3. FIG.

"Number of canceled cards acquired" in Figure 13-16 (B) and Figure 13-16 (C)
is the number of acquired cancel cards, which is the sum of the acquired number of canceled cards targeting battle rising and the acquired number of canceled cards targeting relief. In other words, it is the number of acquired cancel cards acquired targeting players other than pseudo-runs. In the battle production in super reach (big hit), both the battle rising and the relief production may be executed. The number of cancel cards acquired for the target of battle rising is 0 to 2 (see Fig. 13-14), and the number of cancel cards acquired for the rescue target is 0 to 1 (see Fig. 13-13). In other words, super reach (jackpot)
In the case of , 0 to 3 cancel cards are acquired targeting non-pseudo-runs. If 3 cancel cards are obtained by targeting non-pseudo-runs and 1 cancel card is obtained by targeting pseudo-runs, the total number of cancel cards acquired is 4, but 4 cancel cards are obtained. Acquisition means acquisition of a cancel card targeting relief, and the fact that the relief effect will be executed is revealed at a relatively early stage. In order to prevent future leaks, as shown in Fig. 13-16 (B), "when the number of acquired cancel cards is 0 to 2", acquisition of cancel cards is permitted, while as shown in Fig. 13-16 (C) In the case of "when the number of acquired cancellation cards is 3", acquisition of cancellation cards is restricted (0%).

In the battle effect in Super Reach (lost), since no relief effect is executed, 0 to 2 cancel cards are acquired targeting players other than pseudo-runs. Therefore, there is no limit on the amount of money that can be used, since there is no chance of getting caught in the first place. Also, in normal reach (loss, big hit), since the battle production itself is not performed, there is no restriction.

In Figures 13-15 and 13-16, "use or not" in the column "whether or not to use, whether or not to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisition" is the item (up card, cancel card) in the simulated run. Whether it is used or not. "Not used" in the column of determination content indicates that the item is not used in executing the pseudo-continuation, and "Used" in the column of decision content indicates that the item is used in executing the pseudo-continuation.

In Figures 13-15 and 13-16, "whether to use, whether to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column indicates whether the item is used when executing a pseudo-run. It is the presence or absence of item acquisition (stock). "No Acquisition" in the decision column indicates that the item to be used will not be acquired (stocked) when "use" is indicated, and "acquisition" in the decision column indicates whether or not the item will be used. indicates that the item to be used is to be acquired (stocked) when is "used".

In Figures 13-15 and 13-16, "type" in the column "whether to use, whether to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" indicates the item to be used when executing the pseudo-continuation. The type of item. "Up card" in the column of decision content indicates that an up card will be acquired when "use" is indicated for use and "acquired" for acquisition, and "cancellation card" is indicated in the column for decision content. indicates that a cancellation card is acquired when the usage status is "used" and the acquisition status is "acquired".

In Figures 13-15 and 13-16, "Timing of acquisition" in the column "Whether or not to use, whether or not to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" is the case where the items used when executing the pseudo-continuation are acquired. is the timing of the acquisition of "Immediately after the start of change" in the column of decision content indicates that acquisition will be made immediately after the start of change, and "Reach "Immediately after" indicates that it is acquired immediately after reach when the presence or absence of use is "used" and the presence or absence of acquisition is "acquired".

In Figures 13-15 and 13-16, the "number of acquisitions" in the "whether or not to use, whether or not to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column indicates the number of is the quantity of the acquisition. "1 sheet" in the decision content column indicates whether or not it is used is "used"
, indicates that one card (up card or cancel card) is to be acquired when the presence or absence of acquisition is "acquired".

That is, Fig. 13-15 (A) (Fig. 13-15 (B), Fig. 13-16 (A) to Fig. 13-1
6 (C) as well), the decision items in the decision content column (“not used”, “used, not acquired”)
, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card", "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card", "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1
card", "Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after reach, 1 card"), "Not used"
indicates that neither the up card nor the cancel card is used when executing the pseudo-run. In other words, it simply indicates that the pseudo-run will be executed without acquiring (stocking) items immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reach, and without using items when executing the pseudo-run. Figure 13-8 (A) → Figure 13-8 (B) → Figure 13-8 (C) → Figure 13-8 (
The flow of D)→FIG. 13-8 (E3)→FIG. 13-8 (F3) is simply an example of the effect operation when a pseudo-continuation is executed.

In addition, in the super reach (Fig. 13-16 (A) to Fig. 13-16 (C)), there are cases where there are 2 pseudo-runs or 3 pseudo-runs (see Figure 13-2), but 2 pseudo-runs , simply execute the pseudo-run without using the item for the first or second time. In the case of three pseudo-runs, the first, second, and third pseudo-runs are simply executed without using any items.

"Used, not acquired" indicates that the item is used but the item to be used is not acquired (stocked) at the time of execution of the pseudo-continuation. In other words, it indicates that the item is not acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the fluctuation or immediately after the reach, but the item is used when executing the pseudo-reunion. The item used is an up card.

In addition, in the super reach (Fig. 13-16 (A) to Fig. 13-16 (C)), there are cases where there are 2 pseudo-runs or 3 pseudo-runs (see Figure 13-2), but 2 pseudo-runs In the case of , the pseudo-run is executed using the item (up card) the first time, and the pseudo-run is simply executed without using the item the second time. In the case of three pseudo-runs, the first pseudo-run is executed using the item (up card), and the second and third times are simply executed without using the item.

``Used, acquired, up card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card'' relates to the execution of pseudo-continuation,
It indicates that one up card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the fluctuation, and that up card is used when executing the pseudo-run.

In addition, in the super reach (Fig. 13-16 (A) to Fig. 13-16 (C)), there are cases where there are 2 pseudo-runs or 3 pseudo-runs (see Figure 13-2), but 2 pseudo-runs In the case of , the pseudo-run is executed using the stocked up cards for the first time, and the pseudo-run is simply executed without using the item for the second time. In the case of three pseudo-runs, the first pseudo-run is performed using the stocked up cards, and the second and third times are simply performed without using items.

"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" relates to the execution of a pseudo-run. is used.

In addition, in the case of "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card", as in the case of "used, acquired, up card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card", pseudo consecutive twice, In the case of three times, the pseudo-run is executed using the stocked up cards for the first time, and thereafter, the pseudo-run is simply executed without using the item.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of change, 1 card" relates to the execution of a pseudo-run. It indicates that a cancellation card is to be used.

In addition, in the super reach (Fig. 13-16 (A) to Fig. 13-16 (C)), there are cases where there are 2 pseudo-runs or 3 pseudo-runs (see Figure 13-2), but 2 pseudo-runs In the case of , the pseudo-run is executed using the stocked cancel cards for the first time, and the pseudo-run is simply executed without using the item for the second time. In the case of three pseudo-runs, the first pseudo-run is executed using the stocked cancel cards, and the second and third pseudo-runs are simply executed without using items.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" relates to the execution of a pseudo-run, in which one cancel card is acquired (stocked) immediately after a reach, and when the pseudo-run is executed, the cancel card is used.

In the case of "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card", as in the above case of "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card", pseudo consecutive 2 times, 3
In the case of times, the first time is to execute a pseudo-continuation using the cancellation card that is in stock,
After that, simply execute the pseudo-continuation without using the item.

According to the example shown in Figure 13-15 (A), in the case of normal reach (loss) and pseudo joint, "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 12% is determined by the ratio of
``Used, acquired, up card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card'' is determined at a rate of 26%, and ``used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card'' is determined at a rate of 47%, "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 2%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 8% .

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (B), in the case of normal reach (jackpot) and pseudo-joint, "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 15% is determined by the ratio of
``Used, acquired, up card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card'' is determined at a rate of 25%, and ``used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card'' is determined at a rate of 45%, "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 2%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 8% .

According to the example shown in Figure 13-16 (A), in the case of super reach (loss) and pseudo joint, "not used" is determined at a rate of 6%, and "used, not acquired" is 11 Determined by a percentage of the
``Used, acquired, up card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card'' is determined at a rate of 26%, and ``used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card'' is determined at a rate of 47%, "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 2%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 8% .

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-16 (B), super reach (jackpot), pseudo joint, and
If the number of cancellation cards obtained is 0 to 2, "not used" is determined at a rate of 6%,
"Used, acquired, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 14%, "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 25%, and "Used, acquired, up card" is determined at a rate of 25%. Card, immediately after reaching, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 45%, "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 2%, and "Used, acquired, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 2%. Cancel card, immediately after reach, 1
8%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-16 (C), super reach (jackpot), pseudo joint, and
If the number of cancellation cards acquired is 3, "not used" is determined at a rate of 6%, "used, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 14%, and "used, acquired, upgraded" is determined at a rate of 14%. Card, immediately after fluctuation start, 1 card” is determined at a rate of 25%, and “used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1
card” is determined at a rate of 55%, and “used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1
card” is determined at a rate of 0%, and “used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card”
is determined at a rate of 0%.

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 13-15 and 16, the up card and the cancel card may be used when executing pseudo-runs. In addition, neither the up card nor the cancel card may be used when executing a pseudo-run. As an example, Figure 13-15 (A)
In the case of the example shown in (normal reach (lost)), when executing a pseudo-run, the rate of using up cards is 85%, and the rate of using cancel cards is 10%. %, and the percentage that neither the up card nor the cancel card is used is 5%.

In addition, the items (up card, cancel card) used when executing the pseudo-run may be acquired (stocked) or may not be acquired (used without being acquired).
As an example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (A) (in the case of normal reach (loss)), when using an item (up card, cancel card) when executing a pseudo-run, the item is The percentage of acquiring the item is approximately 87% (83/95), and the percentage of not acquiring the item is approximately 13% (12/95).

Also, when acquiring the items (up card, cancel card) used when performing a pseudo-train, even if the item (up card, cancel card) is acquired immediately after the start of the fluctuation, it is acquired immediately after the reach. In some cases. As an example, Figure 13-15 (A
), in the case of normal reach (loss), when acquiring the items (up card, cancel card) used when performing pseudo-continuation, the percentage of acquisition immediately after the start of fluctuation is about 34 % (28/83), and about 66% (5
5/83).

13-17 and 13-18 are explanatory diagrams for explaining various timings. Specifically, FIGS. 13-17(A) and 13-17(B) are explanatory diagrams for explaining execution timings of various effects and the like in variable display that becomes super reach (loss). Figure 13-17
(B) is a continuation of FIGS. 13-17(A).

In FIG. 13-17(A), T0 is the start timing of the variable display. T1 "immediately after the start of fluctuation (Fig. 13-13 to Fig. 13-
16)” is the acquisition timing of the item (stock). Since the acquired item is displayed, T1 is also the timing of displaying the item when the item is acquired "immediately after the start of fluctuation". T2 is a reach timing. T3 is the acquisition timing of the item when the item is acquired "immediately after reach (see FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16)" (stock). Since the acquired item is displayed, T3, when acquiring the item "immediately after reach",
It is also the timing of displaying the item.

T4 is the timing at which symbols other than pseudo-continuous symbols (normal symbols, non-simulated-continuous symbols) are temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous notice effect using items is performed. When performing a pseudo-continuous notice effect using an item, since the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped by using the item, normal symbols are stopped before using the item (Fig. 13-8 (F1), (see Figure 13-9).

T5 to T6 are activation effects (activation image 011SHHD1 and activation image 0
Effect to display 11SHHD2. 13-9 (G4) and FIG. 13-9 (G5)). In the case of performing a pseudo consecutive notice effect using an item, the activation effect is executed before using the item. Note that FIG. 13-9 (G4) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect in the case where the pseudo consecutive notice effect using the up card is performed. Figure 13-9 (G
5) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect when the simulated consecutive notice effect using the cancel card is performed.

T7 to T8 are the period of use of the item when the pseudo consecutive notice effect using the item is performed. FIGS. 13-9 (H4) and 13-9 (I4) are display examples during the use period of the up card when the simulated consecutive notice effect using the up card is performed. Also, FIGS. 13-9 (H5) and 13-9 (I5) are display examples during the use period of the cancel card in the case where the pseudo consecutive notice effect using the cancel card is performed.

T9 is the timing at which the change (movement, destruction, etc.) of symbols other than the pseudo-continuous symbols starts when the pseudo-continuous notice effect using the item is performed. In other words, this is the timing at which the item used at T7-T8 acts on a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopped and displayed at T4, and the symbol starts to change (move, destroy, etc.). FIG. 13-9 (J4) is a display example when the up card acts on the symbol "6" other than the pseudo-continuous symbol and the symbol "6" is moving. Figure 13-9 (J5) shows that the cancel card is a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol "
This is a display example when the symbol "6" is destroyed.

T10 is the timing at which the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect is performed. In other words, this is the timing at which the first pseudo-run symbol in the pseudo-run (1-time pseudo-run, 2-time pseudo-run, 3-time pseudo-run) temporarily stops. FIG. 13-9 (L4) is a display example when the symbol "6", which is a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol, is moved by the action of the up card, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. FIG. 13-9 (L5) is a display example when the symbol "6", which is a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbols, is destroyed by the action of the cancel card, and the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped.

T11 is the timing at which the re-variable display is started when the pseudo consecutive notice effect is performed. In other words, it is the timing for re-variable display after the first temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern in the pseudo-continuous (1-time pseudo-run, 2-time pseudo-run, 3-time pseudo-run).

T12 is the timing at which the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect is performed. In other words, this is the timing at which the second pseudo-continuous symbol in the pseudo-continuous (two-time pseudo-continuous, three-time pseudo-continuous) temporarily stops. T13 is the timing at which the re-variable display is started when the pseudo consecutive notice effect is performed. In other words, it is the timing for re-variable display after the second temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the pseudo-continuous (2-time pseudo-run, 3-time pseudo-run).

T14 is the timing at which the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops when the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect is performed. That is, this is the timing at which the third pseudo-continuous pattern in the pseudo-continuous (three times of the pseudo-continuous) temporarily stops. T15 is the timing at which the re-variable display is started when the pseudo consecutive notice effect is performed. In other words, it is the timing for re-variable display after the third temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the pseudo-continuous (three times of pseudo-continuous). T16 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T17 is the timing to start displaying the title of the weak battle (weak title). In other words, T17 is the timing to start displaying weak titles when weak titles are displayed when weak battles are performed, or when medium or strong battles are performed and weak titles are displayed.

T18-T19 is an activation effect (activation image 011SHHD1 or activation image 011SHHD2 is displayed) that suggests that the item will be activated (used) when a battle using items (light battle → medium battle) is performed. Figure 13-11 (B3),
13-11 (B4)). Battle upstart using items (
When performing a weak battle → medium battle), the activation effect is executed before using the item. note that,
FIG. 13-11 (B3) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect when a battle rise using an up card is performed. FIG. 13-11 (B4) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect when the battle rises using the cancel card.

T20 to T21 is the item use period when a battle (weak battle→medium battle) using the item is performed. In addition, Figure 13-11 (C3) and Figure 1
3-11 (D3) is a battle rise using up cards (weak battle → medium battle)
10 is a display example during the use period of the up card when the up card is used. Also, Fig. 13
-11 (C4) and FIG. 13-11 (D4) are display examples during the use period of the cancel card when a battle (weak battle→medium battle) using the cancel card is performed.

T22 is the timing at which the weak title starts to change when a battle (low battle→medium battle) using items is performed. In other words, this is the timing at which the item used at T20 to T21 acts on the weak title displayed at T17, and the weak title starts to change. FIG. 13-11 (E3) is a display example when the up card acts on a weak title and the weak title changes to a weak medium title. Figure 13-
11 (E4) is a display example when a cancel card acts on a weak title and destroys the weak title.

T23 is the timing to start displaying the title of the middle battle (middle title). In other words, T23 is the timing to start displaying the middle title when the middle title is to be displayed, or when the middle title is to be displayed when the middle battle is to be executed.

T24-T25 is a period during which an activation effect is executed to suggest that the item will be activated (used) when a battle using the item (medium battle→hard battle) is performed. When performing a battle using items (medium battle → strong battle),
Execute the activation effect before using the item.

T26-T27 is the item use period when a battle (medium battle→heavy battle) using the item is performed.

T28 is the timing at which the middle title starts to change when a battle using items (medium battle→heavy battle) is performed. In other words, this is the timing at which the item used at T26-T27 acts on the middle title displayed at T23, and the middle title starts to change.

T29 is the timing to start displaying the title of the strong battle (strong title). That is, T29 is the timing to start displaying the strong title when the strong battle is executed.

T30 is the timing to start execution of the battle effect. T31 to T32 are role items (
This is the operation period of the movable body 011SH32). T41 is the timing to start displaying the result display (defeat) of the battle effect. T42 is the timing of ending the execution of the battle effect. T43 is the end timing of the variable display.

FIGS. 13-17(A) and 13-18(A) are explanatory diagrams for explaining execution timings of various effects and the like in a variable display (no relief effect) for super reach (big hit). FIG. 13-18(A) is a continuation of FIG. 13-17(A).

As shown in FIG. 13-17 (B) and FIG. 13-18 (A), a variable display that becomes super reach (loss) and a variable display that becomes super reach (big hit) (no relief effect). The display means that in the variable display that becomes super reach (loss), defeat is displayed as the result display of the battle production, and the loss pattern is displayed (T41, T4 in FIG. 13-17 (B)
2) In the variable display (no relief effect) that becomes super reach (big hit), victory is displayed as the result display of the battle effect, and the big win pattern is displayed (T41, T4 in FIG. 13-18 (A)).
2) They are different in point.

FIGS. 13-17(A) and 13-18(B) are explanatory diagrams for explaining execution timings of various effects in the variable display (with relief effects) for super reach (big hit). FIG. 13-18(B) is a continuation of FIG. 13-17(A).

As shown in FIG. 13-18 (A) and FIG. 13-18 (B), a variable display that becomes super reach (big hit) (no relief effect) and a variable display that becomes super reach (big hit) The presence or absence of display, effect, etc. from T33 to T40 differs from the variable display that is displayed (with relief effect).

In FIG. 13-18(B), T33 is the timing to start the display of the result of the battle effect (defeat) when relief using an item (specifically, a cancel card) is performed.

In T34-T35, execution of an activation rendering (a rendering of displaying an activation image 011SHHD2, see FIG. 13-12 (B2)) suggesting that the item will be activated (used) when relief using the item is performed. period. Note that FIG. 13-12 (B2) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect when relief is performed using a cancel card.

T36-T37 is the period of use of the item when relief using the item is performed. FIGS. 13-12(C2) and 13-12(D2) are display examples during the use period of the cancel card when relief is performed using the cancel card.

T38 displays the result of the battle effect (
Defeat) is the timing to start the change. In other words, this is the timing at which the item used at T36-T37 affects the display result (defeat) displayed at T33, and the display result (defeat) starts to change. FIG. 13-12 (E2) is a display example when the cancel card affects the display result (defeat) and destroys the display result (defeat).

A period from T39 to T40 is a period during which a relief effect is executed when a relief using an item is performed. FIG. 13-12 (F2) is a display example during the execution period of the relief effect when the relief using the cancel card is performed.

In addition, the result display (defeat) at T41 in Figure 13-17 (B) and Figure 13-18 (B)
It is preferable that the player cannot easily distinguish between the display of the result (defeat) at T33 and at least other than items. In other words, when the result display (defeat) of the battle production is displayed, the player decides whether the result display (defeat) is the result display (defeat) in the variable display that becomes super reach (loss) or super reach (big hit). ) is a variable display (with relief effect), and if the result display (defeat) in the variable display is determined by the presence or absence of items, it would be interesting if it could be determined by things other than items. It is preferable to make it indistinguishable because it reduces the .

For example, the time (T0 to T41) until the result display (defeat) in the variable display that becomes super reach (loss) and the result display (defeat) in the variable display that becomes super reach (jackpot) (with relief effect) ) to the time (T0 to T33) may be made so as not to be perceived visually. As an example, in the case of a weak battle super reach with a special figure fluctuation time of 130 seconds, in the case of the fluctuation pattern # 13 (weak battle (missing)) and the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1", the fluctuation starts Display the result display (defeat) after 125 seconds from
Variation pattern # 18 (weak battle (big hit)) and battle production pattern with relief "BP-
J-W3" may display the result display (defeat) 115 seconds after the start of the variation. Also, in the case of the super reach of the medium battle with a special figure fluctuation time of 140 seconds, in the case of the fluctuation pattern # 14 (medium battle (missing)) and the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1", from the start of fluctuation After 135 seconds, the result display (defeat) is displayed, and the variation pattern # 19 (weak battle (big hit)) and the battle production pattern “BP-J-W5” with relief is 1 from the start of the variation.
A result display (defeat) may be displayed after 25 seconds. In addition, the special figure fluctuation time is 150
In the case of a strong battle super reach that is seconds, variation pattern # 15 (strong battle (missing))
In addition, in the case of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1", the result display (defeat) is displayed 145 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern #20 (weak battle (big hit)) and battle production with relief. In the pattern "BP-J-W7", the result display (defeat) may be displayed 135 seconds after the start of the variation.

13-19 and 13-20 are specific examples of various timings. In FIG. 13-19, "variation pattern #14" is determined as the variation pattern (see FIG. 13-1(B)), and pseudo-runs (1 pseudo-run) are determined for pseudo-runs (see FIG. 13-2). ), and as the battle production pattern, "BP-T-L3 (weak title → medium title → start of medium battle → battle (lost))" is determined (see Fig. 13-3 (C) and Fig. 13-6 (B)). ), as items etc. targeting the rise of the battle, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined (see Fig. 13-14 (A)), and items etc. targeting pseudo-ren 13-16(A) shows various timings when "used, acquired, up card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined as (see FIG. 13-16(A)). Figure 13-19 (A) → Figure 13-19 (B)
is. 13-19, some or all of the contents explained in FIGS. 13-17 and 13-18 will be omitted.

In FIG. 13-19(A), T1 is the timing at which one up card targeting pseudo-run and one cancel card targeting battle rising are acquired (displayed).

In FIG. 13-19(A), T5-T6 is the execution period of the activation effect suggesting that the up card will be activated (used). T7-T8 is the usage period of the up card.
T9 is the timing at which the up card acts on a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol, and the symbol starts to change (move).

In FIG. 13-19(B), T18-T19 is the execution period of the activation effect suggesting that the cancel card will be activated (used). T20 to T21 is the usage period of the cancel card. T22 is the timing at which the cancel card acts on the weak title and the change (destruction) of the weak title starts.

Figure 13-20 determines "variation pattern #20" as the variation pattern (Figure 13-1 (
B)), a pseudo-continuation (three times of pseudo-continuation) is determined for the pseudo-continuation (see Fig. 13-2), and the battle production pattern is "BP-K-W8 (medium title → strong title → strong battle start → Role item action present → battle (loss) → relief (win))” (Fig. 13-4 (B), Fig. 13-6 (C
)), as items targeting relief, "use, acquisition, cancel card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined (see Figure 13-13), and items targeting the rise of the battle, such as " If "used, not acquired" is determined (see Fig. 13-14 (B)), and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined as an item targeting pseudo-ren ( 13-16(B)) shows various timings.
Note that FIG. 13-20(A)→FIG. 13-20(B). 13-20, part or all of the contents explained in FIGS. 13-17 and 13-18 will be omitted.

In FIG. 13-20(A), T1 is the timing at which one cancel card targeting relief is obtained (displayed). T3 is the timing at which one up card targeting the pseudo-run is acquired (displayed).

In FIG. 13-20(A), T5-T6 is the execution period of the activation effect suggesting that the up card will be activated (used). T7-T8 is the usage period of the up card.
T9 is the timing at which the up card acts on a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol, and the symbol starts to change (move).

In FIG. 13-20(B), T24-T25 is the execution period of the activation effect suggesting that the up card will be activated (used). T26-T27 is the use period of the up card. Note that the up card is not stocked.

In FIG. 13-20(B), T34-T35 is the execution period of the activation effect suggesting that the cancel card will be activated (used). T36-T37 is the usage period of the cancel card. T38 is the timing at which the cancel card acts on the result display (loss) and the change (destruction) of the result display (loss) starts.

13-21 and 13-22 show S171 in the production control process shown in FIG.
10 is a flowchart showing an example of effect determination processing executed in the variable display start setting processing of . 13-22 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 13-21.

In the production determination process shown in FIG. 13-21, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern is a non-reach (variation pattern #10, #11) or a small hit (variation pattern #16) (step 011 SHS100). When it is determined that the variation pattern is non-reach or small hit (step 011SHS100; YES), this flow chart ends. When it is determined that it is not a non-reach or a small hit (step 011SHS100; NO)
, The effect control CPU 120 has a variation pattern super reach (variation patterns # 13 to #
15, #18 to #20) (step 011SH101).

In step 011SH101, when it is determined that the variation pattern is not super reach (step 011SHS101; NO), that is, when it is determined that the variation pattern is normal reach (variation pattern #12, #17), the effect control CPU 120 is a pseudo continuous The presence or absence of pseudo-running is determined (step 011SHS102). Specifically, Figure 13-
2, the effect control CPU 120 determines pseudo-continuous at a rate of 80%, and determines pseudo-continuous (one pseudo-continuous) at a rate of 20%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination contents (presence or absence of a pseudo run, the number of pseudo runs) (step 011SHS103).

Following step 011SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a pseudo-continuation (step 011SHS104). That is, in step 011 SHS 102, it is determined whether or not it is determined to be pseudo-joint. If it is determined that there is no pseudo-continuation (step 011SHS104; NO), that is, if it is determined that there is no pseudo-continuation, this flow chart ends.

If it is determined in step 011SH104 that there is a pseudo run (step 01
1SHS104; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of an item targeting the pseudo-run based on the variation pattern (step 011SHS105). Specifically, when the variation pattern is normal reach (loss) (variation pattern #12), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG.
"Used, not acquired" is determined by 12%, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined by 26%, and "used "Yes, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 47%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 2%, and " Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after reach, 1 card” will be determined at a rate of 8%. Also, the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (
Jackpot) (fluctuation pattern #17), the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG.
As shown in 15 (B), "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, not acquired" is determined by 15
Determined by % ratio, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after fluctuation start, 1 sheet" is determined at a rate of 25%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 sheet" Determined at a rate of 45%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after fluctuation start, 1 card" determined at a rate of 2%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 8%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination contents (presence or absence of items targeting the pseudo-run, etc.) (step 011SHS106). Then, this flowchart ends.

In step 011SH101, when it is determined that the variation pattern is super reach (step 011SHS101; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of a pseudo-run and the number of pseudo-runs based on the variation pattern (Fig. 13-22). Step 011S of
HS110). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-2, when the variation pattern is super reach (weak battle) (variation pattern #13, #18), the effect control CPU 120 sets the pseudo-consecution to 30%. Determined at a rate of 40% of the pseudo-continuation (1 pseudo-continuation),
Pseudo-runs (2 pseudo-runs) are determined at a rate of 30%. In addition, the production control CPU 120
If the variation pattern is super reach (medium battle) (variation patterns #14, #19), the pseudo-continuous is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pseudo-continuous (once pseudo-continuous) is determined at a rate of 30%. , pseudo-continuous (2 pseudo-continuous) is determined at a rate of 30%, pseudo-continuous (3 pseudo-continuous) is determined at 20%
determined by the ratio of In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has a variation pattern of super reach (
strong battle) (fluctuation patterns #15, #20), pseudo-continuous is determined at a rate of 10%, pseudo-continuous (once pseudo-continuous) is determined at a rate of 20%, and pseudo-continuous is determined at a rate of 20%. 3 for yes (2 pseudo-runs)
It is determined at a rate of 0%, and pseudo-repetition (3 pseudo-repetitions) is determined at a rate of 40%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination contents (presence or absence of pseudo-continuation, number of pseudo-continuations) (step 01
1SHS 111).

Following step 011 SHS111, the effect control CPU 120 determines a battle effect pattern (see FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4) based on the variation pattern (step 01
1SHS 112). Specifically, when the variation pattern is Super Reach (Weak Battle) Loss (Variation Pattern #13), the effect control CPU 120 sets the battle effect pattern “BP -J-L1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the battle production pattern "BP-J-L2" is determined at a rate of 80%. Moreover, CPU120 for production control
, when the variation pattern is a super reach (weak battle) jackpot (variation pattern #18), as shown in FIG.
%, the battle production pattern "BP-J-W2" is determined at a rate of 30%, the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the battle production pattern "B
PJW4” is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variation pattern is super reach (medium battle) loss (variation pattern # 14),
As shown in 3-6 (B), the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1" is determined at a rate of 10%, the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the battle The production pattern "BP-T-L3" is determined at a rate of 30%, and the battle production pattern "BP-T-L4"
” at a rate of 40%. In addition, when the variation pattern is a super reach (medium battle) jackpot (variation pattern #19), the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 13-6 (B).
, the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1" is determined at a rate of 20%, the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the battle production pattern "BP-
TW3" is determined at a rate of 15%, the battle production pattern "BP-T-W4" is determined at a rate of 15%, and the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5" is determined at a rate of 10%. , The battle production pattern "BP-T-W6" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the battle production pattern "BP-
TW7" is determined at a rate of 5%, and the battle effect pattern "BP-TW8" is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, when the variation pattern is super ready (strong battle) lose (variation pattern #15), the effect control CPU 120 controls the battle effect pattern "BP-K- L1" is determined at a rate of 5%, and the battle production pattern "BP
-K-L2" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3" is 15%
, the battle production pattern "BP-K-L4" is determined at a rate of 15%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-L5" is determined at a rate of 25%, and the battle production pattern "BP
-K-L6" at a rate of 30%. In addition, when the variation pattern is a super reach (strong battle) big hit (variation pattern #20), the effect control CPU 120
As shown in -6 (C), the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1" is determined at a rate of 15%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" is determined at a rate of 15%, and the battle production The pattern "BP-K-W3" is determined at a rate of 15%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4"
is determined at a rate of 9%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W5" is determined at a rate of 8%,
The battle production pattern "BP-K-W6" is determined at a rate of 8%, and the battle production pattern "B
PK-W7" is determined at a rate of 6%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8" is determined at a rate of 6%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-W9" is determined at a rate of 6%. Decide, determine the battle production pattern "BP-K-W10" at a rate of 4%, battle production pattern "BP-K
-W11" is determined at a rate of 4%, and the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W12" is determined at a rate of 4%.

Following step 011SHS112, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content (battle effect pattern) (step 011SHS113).

Following step 011SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 is step 011S
It is determined whether or not the battle effect pattern determined in HS112 is a battle effect pattern including relief (battle effect pattern including "rescue (win)" in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4) (step 011SHS114). . In other words, at step 011SHS112, it is determined whether or not a battle effect pattern for executing a relief effect has been determined. In addition, Fig. 13
-3 and FIG. 13-4, two battle production patterns "BP-J-W3" and "BP-J-W4" in FIG. 13-3(B), FIG. 13-3 Four battle production patterns "BP-T-W5" to "BP-T-W8" in (D), battle production patterns "BP-K-W7" to "BP-K-" in Fig. 13-4 (B) W12" are battle effect patterns including relief.

At step 011SHS114, when it is determined that the battle effect pattern includes relief (step 011SHS114; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of an item targeting relief (step 011SHS115). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. used, acquired, up card,
"Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 0%, "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 0%, and "Used, acquired, canceled card" , immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card” is determined at a rate of 75%, and “used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card” is determined at a rate of 15%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the content of determination (the presence or absence of an item targeting relief, etc.) (step 011SHS116).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 011SHS114 that the pattern is not a battle effect pattern including relief (step 011SHS114; NO), step 011SHS115,
Without executing the processing of step 011SHS116, the process proceeds to step 011SHS117.

Subsequent to step 011SHS114 (NO) or step 011SHS116, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the battle effect pattern determined in step 011SHS112 is a battle effect pattern including a battle rise (Fig. (Step 011 SHS117). In other words, in step 011SHS112, it is determined whether or not a battle effect pattern for executing a battle rise has been determined. Incidentally, among the battle effect patterns shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, the battle effect patterns "BP-T-L1" and "BP-T-L3" in FIG. 13-3(C)
Two of the battle production patterns “BP-T-W1” and “BP-T-W3” in FIG. 13-3 (D)
”, “BP-T-W5”, “BP-T-W7”, battle production patterns “BP-K-L1”, “BP-K-L2”, “BP -K-L4", "BP-K-L
5”, battle production patterns “BP-K-W1”, “BP-K-
W2", "BP-K-W4", "BP-K-W5", "BP-K-W7", "BP-K-
W8", "BP-K-W10", and "BP-K-W11" are the battle production patterns including the rise of the battle. 13-3 and 13-4, the battle effect pattern in which the number of times the battle rises once is the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L1" in FIG. 13-3(C); Two of "BP-T-L3", battle production patterns "BP-T-W1", "BP-T-W3", "BP-T-W5", "
BP-T-W7", the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2" in FIG. 13-4 (A),
Two of "BP-K-L5", battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" of Figure 13-4 (B)
, “BP-K-W5”, “BP-K-W8”, and “BP-K-W11”. Also, there are two battle production patterns with the number of times the battle rises twice, the battle production patterns "BP-K-L1" and "BP-K-L4" in FIG. 13-4(A), and FIG. 13-4(B). Battle production pattern "BP-K-W1", "BP-K-W4", "BP-K-W7", "BP-K-
W10".

At step 011SHS117, when it is determined that the pattern is a battle production pattern including a rise in battle (step 011SHS117; YES), the production control CPU 120
determines the presence or absence of items targeting battle rise based on the battle production pattern (the number of battle rises) and items targeting relief (whether or not there is a cancel card) (step 011SHS118). Specifically, CP for production control
U120 determines "not used" at a rate of 5%, as shown in FIG. , ``used, not acquired'' is determined at a rate of 40%, ``used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card'' is determined at a rate of 10%, and ``used, acquired, Up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 5%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 30%, and "used, acquired" is determined at a rate of 30%. ，cancellation card，immediately after reach，
1 sheet" is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the number of times the battle has risen is 1 and the acquisition of items targeting relief,
As shown in 4 (B), "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, not acquired" is determined at 20%
Determined by the ratio of ``used, acquired, up card, immediately after fluctuation start, 1 card'' at a rate of 10%, and ``used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card'' is 5 %, ``used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card'' is determined at a rate of 40%, and ``used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card'' is determined. Determined at a rate of 20%. In addition, when the number of times the battle has been established is two and no item is acquired for the purpose of relief, the effect control CPU 120 sets the "no use" to 5%, as shown in FIG. 13-14(C). , "used, not acquired" is determined by 20%, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined by 10%, and "used ``Yes, with acquisition, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card'' is determined at a rate of 5%, and ``with use, with acquisition, cancellation card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card'' is determined at a rate of 25%, and `` Decide "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 2 cards" at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" at a rate of 25%, "Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after reach, 2 cards" is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the number of times the battle has risen is two times and the acquisition of the item for which relief is the target, as shown in FIG. Determined by percentage,
"Not acquired" is determined at a rate of 20%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1
card" is determined at a rate of 10%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after fluctuation starts, 1 sheet is 5
%, and 25
``Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card'' is determined at a rate of 5%, and ``used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards'' is 25 Determined by percentage. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination contents (the presence or absence of items targeting the rise of the battle, etc.) (step 011SHS119).

On the other hand, in step 011SHS117, if it is determined that the pattern is not a battle production pattern including a rising battle (step 011SHS117; NO), step 011S.
HS118, step 011SHS1 without executing the processing of step 011SHS119
Proceed to 24.

Following step 011SHS117 (NO) or step 011SHS119, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a pseudo-continuation (step 011SHS124).
That is, in step 011 SHS 110, it is determined whether or not it is determined to be pseudo-joint. If it is determined that there is no pseudo-continuation (step 011SHS124; NO), that is, if it is determined that there is no pseudo-continuation, this flow chart ends.

If it is determined in step 011SH124 that there is a pseudo run (step 01
1SHS124; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the variation pattern, the number of cancel cards acquired (the number of cancel cards acquired in determining the presence or absence of items targeting relief in step 011SHS115, and the success of the battle in step 011SHS118 as targets). Based on the total number of acquired cancel cards in determining the presence or absence of items, etc., the presence or absence of items targeting the pseudo-ren is determined (step 011SHS125). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, in the case of super reach (loss) (variation patterns #13, #14, #15), as shown in FIG. Regardless, "not used" is determined at a rate of 6%, and "
"Used, acquired, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 11%, "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 26%, and "Used, acquired, up card" is determined at a rate of 26%. , immediately after reach,
1 card” is determined at a rate of 47%, and “used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation,
1 card" is determined at a rate of 2%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 8%. In addition, in the case of super reach (loss), since there is no relief, the number of cancellation cards acquired will not be 3, so the number of cancellation cards acquired is 0 to 2 like super reach (big hit). There is no distinction between the case of 3 cancellation cards and the case of 3 cancellation cards. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, in the case of super reach (big hit) (variation patterns #18, #19, #20), and when the number of acquired cancel cards is 0 to 2, As shown in B), "not used" is determined at a rate of 6%, "used, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 14%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 25%, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 45%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation , 1 card” is determined at a rate of 2%, and “used, acquired, canceled card,
Immediately after reach, 1 sheet" is determined at a rate of 8%. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, in the case of super reach (big hit) (variation patterns #18, #19, #20), and when the number of acquired cancel cards is 3, as shown in 6
%, "used, not acquired" is determined by 14%, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined by 25%, and " Use used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 55%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 0%, "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 0%. Subsequently, the production control CPU 120
Set the content of the decision (whether or not there is an item targeting pseudo-ren) (step 011S
HS126). Then, this flowchart ends.

FIGS. 13-23 to 13-26 are diagrams showing examples of rendering operations related to the characteristic portion 011SH.
Specifically, FIGS. 13-23 to 13-26 are shown in FIGS.
) is shown as an example of the main scenes in the example shown in FIG. That is, the variation pattern is "variation pattern #14 (super reach (medium battle) lost)", and in the effect determination process (Figs. ), determine the battle production pattern “BP-T-L3 (weak title → medium title → medium battle start → battle (losing))”, and items targeting the rise of the battle “used, acquired If you decide "Yes, cancel card, immediately after the start of change, 1 card", and decide "used, acquired, up card, immediately after start of change, 1 card" for items targeting pseudo-ren, the main The scene is shown as an example.

In addition, in Figures 13-23 to 13-26, Figure 13-23 (A) → Figure 13-23 (B
) → Fig. 13-23 (C) → Fig. 13-23 (D) → Fig. 13-23 (E) →, …, Fig. 13-2
3 (H) → Figure 13-24 (A) → Figure 13-24 (B) → Figure 13-24 (C) → Figure 13-2
4 (D) → Fig. 13-24 (E) → , ..., Fig. 13-24 (H) → Fig. 13-25 (A) → Fig. 1
3-25 (B) → Fig. 13-25 (C) → Fig. 13-25 (D) → Fig. 13-25 (E) → …
, Figure 13-25 (H) → Figure 13-26 (A) → Figure 13-26 (B) → Figure 13-26 (C)
→Transition in the order of FIG. 13-26(D)→FIG. 13-26(E). In addition, Fig. 13-23 (A)
(The same applies to other figures. Reference numerals are omitted in the other figures.) Shows an active display area 011SHAHA, which is a display area for active display, and an active display 011SHAH displayed in the active display area 011SHAHA.

FIG. 13-23(A) shows a scene (T0 scene in FIG. 13-19(A)) in which the variable display is started. FIG. 13-23(B) shows a scene (stock) in which one up-card image 011SHUPC (one up-card) and one cancel-card image 011SHCXLC (one cancel-card) are displayed (stock). 19(A) T1 scene). FIG. 13-23(C) shows the scene of reach (T2 scene in FIG. 13-19(A)).

In Figures 13-23 (D) to 13-23 (F), a simulated consecutive pattern is performed, and a non-simulated consecutive symbol (normal symbol) "6", which is different from the simulated consecutive symbol "re", is stopped and displayed. Scene (Figure 13-19 (
A) from just before T4 to T4).

Figures 13-23 (G) to Figure 13-23 (H) show a scene where an activation effect is being performed that suggests that an up card will be activated (used) (T5 to T6 in Figure 13-19 (A) scene). Specifically, FIG. 13-23(G) is a scene in which an activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting activation of an up card is displayed. FIG. 13-23(H) is a scene (scene of T6 in FIG. 13-19(A)) in which the activation image 011SHHD1 is displayed. In FIG. 13-23(G), for example, the activated image 011SHHD1 is vaguely displayed (eg, defocused display, translucent display, monochromatic display, etc.). Figure 13-27
The same applies to (H) and the like. The same applies to the scene (FIG. 13-25(B), etc.) that prompts whether the activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting that the cancel card will be activated is displayed.

FIGS. 13-24(A) to 13-24(C) show scenes in which the up card is used (scenes of T7 to T8 in FIG. 13-19(A)). Specifically, FIG. 13-24(A) shows a scene in which the display mode of the stocked up-card image 011SHUPC has changed from the normal mode to the advance notice mode for notifying that the stock will be released. FIG. 13-24(B) shows a scene in which an up-card image 011SHUPC is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen as a notification that the up-card will be used. Regarding the change from FIG. 13-24 (A) to FIG. 13-24 (B), for example, the up-card image 011SHUPC at the position of FIG. ), the up-card image 011SHUPC may be displayed at the position of FIG.
) while enlarging the up-card image 011SHUPC. Figure 13-
24(C) is a scene in which the up-card image 011SHUPC acts on the symbol "6", which is the temporary stop symbol. Regarding the change from FIG. 13-24 (B) to FIG. 13-24 (C),
For example, once erase the up-card image 011SHUPC at the position of FIG. 13-24(B),
Simultaneously with erasing (or after erasing), an up-card image 011S is placed at the position shown in FIG. 13-24(C).
The HUPC may be displayed, or the up-card image 011SHUPC may be reduced and moved from the position shown in FIG. 13-24(B) to the position shown in FIG. 13-24(C).

Figures 13-24 (D) to Figure 13-24 (F) show the scene until the up card is used, the middle symbol is updated (UP) by one symbol, and the pseudo consecutive symbol "re" is temporarily stopped (Figure 13-19 (A) T9-T10 scene). Specifically, FIG. 13-24(D) shows an up-card image 0
This is the scene where the symbol "6" that 11SHUPC acted on started to move. Figure 13-24 (E)
This is the scene just before the pseudo-continuous pattern “again” stops. FIG. 13-24(F) shows a scene in which the pseudo-continuous symbol "again" is stopped.

FIG. 13-24(G) is a scene (scene of T11 in FIG. 13-19(A)) where the re-variable display is started. Figure 13-24 (H) shows the scene developed into super reach (Figure 13-19 (
This is the scene of T16 in A).

Figure 13-25 (A) shows a scene where the weak title image 011SHJT is displayed (Figure 13-1
9 (B) T17 scene).

Figures 13-25(B) to 13-25(C) show scenes where an activation effect is being performed that suggests that the cancel card will be activated (used) (T18 to T19 in Figure 13-19(B) scene). Specifically, FIG. 13-25(B) is a scene in which an activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting that the cancel card will be activated is displayed. Figure 13-25 (C
) is the scene (the scene of T19 in FIG. 13-19(B)) in which the activation image 011SHHD2 is displayed.

FIGS. 13-25(D) to 13-25(F) show scenes in which a cancel card is used (scenes from T20 to T21 in FIG. 13-19(B)). Specifically, Figure 13-25 (D
) is a scene in which the display mode of the stocked cancel card image 011SHCXLC changes from the normal mode to the advance notice mode for notifying that the stock will be released. Figure 13-25
(E) shows a cancel card image 011S as a notification that the cancel card will be used.
This is a scene in which HCXLC is displayed large in the center of the screen. In addition, from Figure 13-25 (D) to Figure 1
Regarding the change to 3-25 (E), for example, the cancel card image 011SHCXLC at the position of FIG.
A cancel card image 011SHCXLC may be displayed at the position of (E), or
Cancel card image 011SHCX from the position of 25 (D) to the position of Fig. 13-25 (E)
You may move while enlarging LC. Fig. 13-25 (F) is the cancel card image 01
This is the scene where 1SHCXLC acts on the weak title image 011SHJT. In addition, Fig. 13-
25(E) to FIG. 13-25(F), for example, the cancel card image 011SHCXLC at the position of FIG. The cancel card image 011SHCXLC may be displayed at the position of 25(F), or the cancel card image 011SHCXLC may be reduced and moved from the position of FIG. 13-25(E) to the position of FIG. 13-25(F). good too.

Figures 13-25 (G) to 13-25 (H) show scenes from when the cancel card is used, the weak title image 011SHJT is canceled, and the medium title image 011SHTT is displayed (Figure 13-19 (B) The scene from T22 to T23). Specifically, Figure 13-25 (
G) is a weak title image 011SH affected by the cancel card image 011SHCXLC
It is the scene where JT is destroyed. FIG. 13-25(H) shows a scene in which a middle title image 011SHTT is displayed in place of the destroyed weak title image 011SHJT.

FIG. 13-26(A) is a medium battle start image 011SHTBS that notifies the start of the medium battle
is displayed (the scene of T30 in FIG. 13-19(B)). FIG. 13-26(B) shows a scene of offense and defense between a friendly character and character B. FIG. FIG. 13-26(C) shows a scene in which a friendly character is defeated. Figure 13-26 (D) is the LOSE image 011SHKH that informs of defeat
1 is displayed (the scene of T41 in FIG. 13-19(B)). Figure 13-26 (E)
is a scene (scene T42 in FIG. 13-19(B)) in which the missing symbol is displayed.

FIGS. 13-27 to 13-32 are diagrams showing examples of rendering operations related to the characteristic portion 011SH.
Specifically, Figures 13-27 to 13-32 are
) is shown as an example of the main scenes in the example shown in FIG. That is, the variation pattern is "variation pattern #20 (super reach (strong battle) big hit)", and in the effect determination process (Figs. ) is determined, and “BP-K-W8 (medium title → strong title → start of strong battle → presence of character action → battle (loss) → relief (win))” is determined for the battle production pattern, and relief is the target. Decide "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of change, 1 card" for the items that have been used, and decide "used, not acquired" for items that target the rise of the battle, and target pseudo-ren. For items that have been used, "used, acquired, up card,
It shows an example of a main scene in the case where "immediately after reach, 1 sheet" is determined.

In addition, in Figures 13-27 to 13-32, Figure 13-27 (A) →, ..., Figure 13-2
7 (H) → Fig. 13-28 (A) →, ..., Fig. 13-28 (H) → Fig. 13-29 (A) →, ...
, Fig. 13-29 (H) → Fig. 13-30 (A) → , …, Fig. 13-30 (H) → Fig. 13-31
(A)→, . . . , FIG. 13-31(H)→FIG. 13-32(A)→, .

In the scenes of FIGS. 13-27 to 13-32, descriptions of the scenes that are common to the scenes of FIGS. 13-23 to 13-26 are omitted in whole or in part.

FIG. 13-27(A) is a scene (scene of T0 in FIG. 13-20(A)) in which the variable display is started. FIG. 13-27(B) shows one cancel card image 011SHCXLC(1
This is the scene (the scene of T1 in FIG. 13-20(A)) in which a number of cancellation cards) are displayed (stocked). FIG. 13-27(C) shows the scene of reach (T2 scene in FIG. 13-20(A)). FIG. 13-27(D) is a scene (scene of T3 in FIG. 13-20(A)) in which one up-card image 011SHUPC (one up-card) is displayed (stocked).

In Figures 13-27 (E) to 13-27 (G), a simulated consecutive pattern is performed, and a non-simulated consecutive symbol (normal symbol) "6", which is different from the simulated consecutive symbol "re", is stopped and displayed. Scene (Figure 13-20 (
A) from just before T4 to T4).

Figures 13-27 (H) to Figure 13-28 (A) show scenes in which an activation effect is being performed that suggests that an up card will be activated (used) (T5 to T6 in Figure 13-20 (A) scene).

FIGS. 13-28(B) to 13-28(D) show scenes in which the up card is used (scenes of T7 to T8 in FIG. 13-20(A)).

Figures 13-28 (E) to Figure 13-28 (G) show the scene until the up card is used, the middle symbol is updated (UP) by one symbol, and the pseudo consecutive symbol "re" is temporarily stopped (Figure 13-20 (A) scene from T9 to T10).

FIG. 13-28(H) is a scene (scene of T11 in FIG. 13-20(A)) where the re-variable display is started.

Figures 13-29 (A) to 13-29 (B) show scenes in which the simulated continuous pattern "again" is stopped and displayed (T11 to T12 in Figure 13-20 (A) scene). Figure 1
3-29 (C) is the scene where the re-variable display is started (the scene of T13 in Fig. 13-20 (A))
is. Figures 13-29 (D) to Figure 13-29 (E) show scenes in which a pseudo-continue swaying effect is performed and the pseudo-continue pattern "again" is displayed stopped (T13 to T14 in Figure 13-20 (A) scene). FIG. 13-29(F) is a scene (scene of T15 in FIG. 13-20(A)) where the re-variable display is started. Figure 13-29 (G) shows the scene developed into super reach (Figure 13-20 (
This is the scene of T16 in A).

Figure 13-29 (H) shows a scene where the middle title image 011SHTT is displayed (Figure 13-2
0 (B) T23 scene).

Figures 13-30(A) to 13-30(B) show a scene where an activation effect is being performed that suggests that an up card will be activated (used) (T24 to T25 in Figure 13-20(B) scene)
is. Specifically, FIG. 13-30(A) is a scene in which an activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting activation of an up card is displayed. FIG. 13-30(B) is a scene (the scene of T25 in FIG. 13-20(B)) in which the activation image 011SHHD1 is displayed.

Figures 13-30(C) to 13-30(E) show scenes (scenes from T26 to T27 in Figure 13-20(B)) in which up cards (non-stock) are used. Specifically, FIG.
-30(C) is a scene in which an emergency activation message 011 SHEMA is displayed to announce that an up card that is not stocked will be used (activated) in a special (emergency) manner. Figure 13-
30(D) displays an up-card image 011SHU as a notification that the up-card will be used.
This is a scene where the PC is displayed large in the center of the screen. FIG. 13-30(E) is a scene in which the up-card image 011SHUPC acts on the middle title image 011SHTT.

FIGS. 13-30(F) to 13-30(G) show a scene in which the up card is used, the medium title image 011SHTT is updated (UP) by one level, and the strong title image 011SHKT is displayed (FIG. 13 -20 (B) T28-T29 scene). Specifically, FIG.
−30 (F) is a scene in which a medium-strong title image 011SHKT (an intermediate image between the medium-strength title image 011SHTT and the strong title image 011SHKT) is displayed. Regarding the change from the medium title image 011SHTT to the medium strong title image 011SHTKT, for example, the medium title image 011SHTT may be temporarily erased, and at the same time (or after the erase), the medium strong title image 011SHTKT may be displayed. The state (process) of increasing the number of stars from 2 to 3 may be displayed in an easily recognizable manner, for example, by blinking the third star for a certain period of time. FIG. 13-30(G) shows a scene in which a strong title image 011SHTKT is displayed. Regarding the change from the medium-strong title image 011SHTKT to the strong title image 011SHTKT, for example, the medium-strong title image 011SHTKT may be temporarily erased, and at the same time (or after the erasure), the strong title image 011SHKT may be displayed. The state (process) of changing the enemy character name may be displayed in an easily recognizable manner, for example, by blinking the changed enemy character name for a certain period of time.

FIG. 13-30 (H) is a strong battle start image 011SHKBS that notifies the start of a strong battle
is displayed (the scene of T30 in FIG. 13-20(B)). FIG. 13-31(A) shows a scene of offense and defense between a friendly character and character C. FIG. Fig. 13-31(B) shows the movable body 011S
This is the scene in which H32 is operating (the scene from T31 to T32 in FIG. 13-20(B)). Figure 1
3-31 (C) is a scene in which the friendly character is defeated. FIG. 13-31(D) is a scene (scene of T33 in FIG. 13-20(B)) in which the LOSE image 011SHKH1 for notifying of the defeat is displayed.

Figures 13-31 (E) to 13-31 (F) show scenes where an activation effect is being performed that suggests that the cancel card will be activated (used) (T34 to T35 in Figure 13-20 (B) scene). Specifically, FIG. 13-31(E) is a scene in which an activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting that the cancel card will be activated is displayed. Figure 13-31 (F
) is the scene (the scene of T35 in FIG. 13-20(B)) in which the activation image 011SHHD2 is displayed.

FIGS. 13-31(G) to 13-32(A) show scenes in which a cancel card is used (scenes of T36 to T37 in FIG. 13-20(B)). Specifically, Figure 13-31 (G
) is a scene in which the display mode of the stocked cancel card image 011SHCXLC changes from the normal mode to the advance notice mode for notifying that the stock will be released. Figure 13-31
(H) shows a cancel card image 011S as a notification that the cancel card will be used.
This is a scene in which HCXLC is displayed large in the center of the screen. FIG. 13-32(A) shows a scene where the cancel card image 011SHCXLC acts on the LOSE image 011SHKH1.

FIG. 13-32(B) shows LOSE affected by cancel card image 011SHCXLC
This is the scene where the image 011SHKH is destroyed (scenes from T38 to T39 in FIG. 13-20(B)). FIG. 13-32(C) shows a scene in which a friendly character counterattacks character C. FIG. Figure 13
-32 (D) is a scene in which the friendly character wins. FIG. 13-32(E) is a scene (the scene of T41 in FIG. 13-20(B)) in which the WIN image 011SHKH2 announcing the victory is displayed. FIG. 13-32(F) is a scene (scene of T42 in FIG. 13-20(B)) in which the jackpot symbols are displayed.

In addition, the examples shown in Figures 13-30(A) to 13-30(E) are items used without stock (up cards used in "Used, not acquired" in Figure 13-14) and,
Since the item in stock (cancellation card) is a different type of item, naturally the item in stock (cancellation card) does not change. Although illustration etc. are omitted,
Even if the item used without stock and the item in stock are of the same type (upcard), the item in stock (upcard) is similarly unchanged. In other words, the up card in stock is used without being consumed. Emergency activation message 011SHE in Figures 13-30(C) to 13-30(E)
MA notifies the use of items that are used without stock. It also informs non-consumption of (up card).

Also, although not shown, when displaying (stocking) items of the same type, the quantity may be displayed, for example. As an example, "x2" may be displayed for two sheets, and "x3" may be displayed for three sheets.

(Regarding Modified Example of Game Machine Related to Characteristic Part 011SH)
Next, a modified example of the game machine related to the characteristic portion 011SH will be described.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above example, in the "determination ratio of whether or not there is an item targeting pseudo-ren", the determination ratio of "no use" is the same (5%) for both normal reach (loss) and normal reach (jackpot). (Figure 13-15), normal reach (jackpot)
In the case of , the determination ratio of "unused" may be higher than in the case of normal reach (loss). Similarly, in the above, even in the case of super reach (loss),
In the case of , an example is explained in which the percentage of decisions for “not used” is the same (6%) (Fig. 13-16
), the determination ratio of "not used" may be higher in the case of super reach (big hit) than in the case of super reach (lost).

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above example, in the "decision ratio of whether or not there is an item targeting pseudo-ren", the decision ratio of "used, not acquired" is higher in the case of normal reach (jackpot) than in the case of normal reach (lost) (Figs. 13-15), the decision ratio of "no use" may be the same for normal reach (lose) and normal reach (big hit). Similarly, in the above case of super reach (jackpot)
It explains an example in which the decision rate of “used, not acquired” is higher than in the case of (Figure 13-16)
In the case of super reach (lose) and super reach (big win), the determination ratio of "used, not obtained" may be the same.

(Modification 3 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above example, an activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting activation of the up card is displayed before activation (use) of the up card, and an activation image 011 SHHD2 suggesting activation of the cancel card is displayed before activation of the cancel card (i.e. , an example in which different activation effects are executed according to the item to be activated), but a common activation effect may be executed regardless of the item to be activated. In other words, the type of item to be activated may not be specified depending on the presentation mode of the activation presentation.

(Modification 4 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above, an example was explained in which the activation image 011SHHD1 is always displayed when the activation image 011SHHD1, which suggests that the up card is to be activated, is displayed (
Figure 13-23 (G) → Figure 13-23 (H), Figure 13-27 (H) → Figure 13-28 (A),
FIG. 13-30(A)→FIG. 13-30(B)), there may be a case where the activation image 011SHHD1 is not displayed after prompting whether or not the activation image 011SHHD1 is to be displayed (fake deception). In other words, even if the activation image 011SHHD1 is not displayed (in the case of falsehood), it may be possible to encourage the display of the activation image 011SHHD1. Similarly, in the above, an example was described in which the activation image 011SHHD2 is always displayed when the activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting that the cancel card is activated is displayed (Fig. 13-25 (
B) → Figure 13-25 (C), Figure 13-31 (E) → Figure 13-31 (F)), Activation image 01
There may be a case where the activation image 011SHHD2 is not displayed after prompting whether or not 1SHHD2 is to be displayed (false hype). In other words, even if the activation image 011SHHD2 is not displayed (in the case of falsehood), it may be possible to encourage the display of the activation image 011SHHD2.

(Modification 5 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above, an example of executing the activation effect even when using an item that has not been obtained (stocked) has been described (T24 to T27 in Figure 13-20 (B), Figure 13-30 (A) to
(See FIG. 13-30(E)). When using an item that has not been acquired (stocked), the activation effect may not be executed.

(Modification 6 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above, regardless of whether the target is a pseudo-continuity (1 pseudo-continuation) to a pseudo-continuation (3 pseudo-continuations), both the up card and the cancel card can be obtained as items used as targets. Although an example has been described, the items that can be obtained may vary depending on the number of pseudo-runs. For example, if a pseudo-run (1 pseudo-run) is targeted, only an up card can be obtained, and a pseudo-run (2 pseudo-runs) or a pseudo-run (3 pseudo-runs) can be acquired.
times), both the up card and the cancel card may be acquired (that is, if the cancel card is used with the pseudo-run as the target, two or more pseudo-runs should be confirmed. may be used).

(Modification 7 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above, when an up card is used with a pseudo-run as a target, the up-card may or may not be acquired (stocked). is always acquired (stocked) (i.e., an item that is used without a stock and targets pseudo-ren is always an up card) (see Figures 13-15 and 13-16). Instead of or in addition to the card, a cancel card may be used without a stock, targeting pseudo-runs. Further, the reliability of the big win may be different between the case where the up card is used without the stock with the pseudo-run as the target and the case where the cancel card is used without the stock with the pseudo-run as the target.

(Modification 8 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above, when an item is used with a pseudo-run as a target, whether it is a pseudo-run (2 pseudo-runs) or a pseudo-run (3 pseudo-runs), a pseudo-run (1 pseudo-run) time), the example of using the item in the first pseudo run (when the first pseudo run symbol “again” stops) was explained (for example, see FIG. 13-17 (A)) , The timing to use the item does not have to be the first pseudo-run. For example, in the case of pseudo-continuation (pseudo-continuation twice),
The item may be used in the second pseudo-run without using the item in the first pseudo-run. In addition, in the case of pseudo-continuation (three pseudo-continuations), the first pseudo-continuation does not use the item, and the pseudo-continuation 2
You may use the item for the first time (or the third pseudo-run). Also, the reliability of the big win may differ depending on when the item is used.

(Modification 9 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above example, when using an item targeting a pseudo-run, the item is used once regardless of whether it is a pseudo-run (1 pseudo-run) or a pseudo-run (3 pseudo-runs). As explained (see Fig. 13-17(A)), in the case of a pseudo-continuation (two pseudo-continuations), the item may be used twice (twice: the first pseudo-continuation and the second pseudo-continuation). . Also, pseudo-continuation (3 pseudo-continuations)
In the case of , the item may be used 3 times (3 times from the 1st pseudo-continuation to the 3rd pseudo-continuation),
It may be used twice (two of the first pseudo-run to the third pseudo-run). Also, the reliability of the big win may differ depending on how many times the item has been used.
You may

(Modification 10 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above, when an up card is used with a battle rise as a target, the up card may or may not be acquired (stocked), whereas when a cancel card is used with a battle rise as a target, the cancel card is always acquired (stocked) (that is, an example in which an item used without a stock is always an upcard targeting the rise of a battle) (see Figures 13-14), but instead of an upcard or In addition, the cancel card may be used without a stock, targeting battle risers. In addition, the reliability of the big win may differ between the case where the up-card is used without stock and the battle rise-up is targeted, and the case where the cancel card is used without stock with the battle rise-up as the target.

(Modification 11 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above, whether one up card is used to target the rise of the battle, or one cancel card is used to target the rise of the battle, the degree of rise is the same for both (both "low title → medium title" or (See Figure 13-17 (B)), but the extent to which an up card is used and a cancel card are used will differ in the degree of success. You can let
For example, as a battle production pattern for a strong battle, in addition to a battle production pattern including one stage "weak title → medium title" and "medium title → strong title", two stages "weak title →
Prepare a battle production pattern including "strong title", for example, if the up card is used while the weak title is displayed, the weak title will always rise to the medium title, while when the weak title is displayed If a cancel card is used in the , it may be possible to have a weak title rise to a medium title and a weak title to a strong title (Note that when a weak title is displayed, the cancel card A weak title may always rise to a strong title when used).

(Modification 12 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above, an example of executing the battle rise before the start of the battle (an example of updating the title of the battle) has been described (for example, see FIG. 13-17 (A)). Upstart may be performed after the battle begins. For example, in the middle of a weak battle, a medium battle may occur. For example, in the middle of a weak battle with character A, the opponent may change to character B in a medium battle.

(Modification 13 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above description, the number of cancellation cards to be acquired (the number of stocks) is limited, but the limit may not be set. In other words, if you acquire a cancel card (1 card) with relief as a target and acquire a cancel card (2 cards) with a battle upstart as a target, you can target the fourth pseudo-ream (1 cancel card). number) is restricted (see FIG. 13-16(C)), but the restriction may not be set. Even if there is no limit on the number of cancel cards obtained, the frequency of obtaining 4 cancel cards will depend on the execution ratio of relief effects and the decision ratio of the presence or absence of items targeting pseudo-ren. not many.

(Modification 14 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above example, the action (movement) caused by the use of the item is not an action unique to the use of the item (a dedicated action by the use of the item). However, pseudo-continuous notice effects, battle rises, and relief effects are performed even when items are not used (Fig. 13-8, Fig. 13-10,
13-12))), but it is also possible to have a dedicated effect by using the item. As an example, the relief effect may be a dedicated action by using an item. Concretely, in the decision ratio of the presence/absence of an item targeting salvage (FIG. 13-13), the decision ratio of "unused" may be set to 0%. Alternatively, acquire an item (stock) →
There may be a dedicated effect due to its use. As an example, the relief effect may be a dedicated action by obtaining and using an item. Specifically, in the decision ratio of the presence/absence of items targeted for salvage (FIG. 13-13), both the decision ratios of "not used" and "used/not acquired" may be set to 0%.

(Modification 15 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above, when acquiring (stocking) items, an example of simply displaying immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reach was explained (for example, Figure 13-23 (B), Figure 13-27 (B), Figure 13-2
7 (D)), an effect (item acquisition effect) may be executed when an item is acquired.
As an item acquisition effect, for example, options such as "up card x 1", "up card x 2", "up card x 1, cancel card x 1", "... (missing)" (display content is the result of item acquisition determination roulette production using roulette with ),
Destroy the wall with "Up card x 1" → "Cancel card x 1" → "Up card x 1, Cancel card x 1" etc. It may be repeated pressing of a go button. Any one of multiple types of item acquisition effects can be executed, and depending on the type of item acquisition effect to be executed, the degree of expectation (percentage of obtaining 1 or more items, specific items (e.g. cancel Cards) can be obtained at different rates)).

(Modification 16 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above, an example was explained in which the acquisition (stock) timing of items is immediately after the start of fluctuation and immediately after reach (eg, see FIG. 13-17 (A)), but items may be acquired at other timings. The acquisition timing may be one, or may be three or more. The acquisition timing may differ depending on the type of item. Also, the remaining time until the item is used (activated) may be notified by a timer.

(Modification 17 of characteristic portion 011SH)
Although an example in which one item is used for one scene (timing) has been described above, two or more items may be used for one scene. As an example, 1
Two or more items of the same type may be used for one scene.
Actions (movements) caused by use may differ between when one item is used and when two or more items are used. Specifically, for example, two up cards (or two cancel cards) may be used in a scene where a "weak title" is displayed. If 2 up cards (or 2 cancel cards) are used in the scene where the ``weak title'' is displayed, the ``weak title'' will start at once (without going through the ``medium title''). You may make it rise to "strong title." As another example, two or more items of different types may be used for one scene. Specifically, for example, an up card (one card) and a cancel card (one card) may be used in a scene where a "weak title" is displayed. In the scene where "weak title" is displayed, the up card (
1 card) and a cancellation card (1 card) are used, from the "weak title" to "
You may make it rise to "strong title." When the up card and cancel card are used as described above, a special effect may be executed. For example, when an up-card is used for a "weak title" (when an up-card image 011SHUPC is displayed superimposed on a weak title image 011SHJT (see Fig. 13-11 (D3)), a weak-medium title After displaying the image 011SHJTT (see Fig. 13-11 (E3)), display the middle title image 011SHTT (see Fig. 13-11 (F3)), and when the cancel card is used for the "weak title" (weak When the cancel card image 011SHCXLC is superimposed on the title image 011SHJT (see Fig. 13-11 (D4)), after destroying the weak title image 011SHJT (see Fig. 13-11 (E4)), the middle Although the title image 011SHTT is displayed (see FIG. 13-11 (F4)), when the up card and cancel card are used for the "weak title", the weak title image 011SH
A lightning bolt hits JT directly, and the lightning strike causes the weak title image 011 SHJT to shine (white out), and when the light subsides (recovers from the white out), a weak title image 011
A strong title image 011SHKT may be displayed instead of SHJT.

(Modification 18 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above, an example in which there are two types of items (up card and cancel card) has been described, but the number of types of items may be three or more. For example, in addition to the up card and the cancel card, the character card corresponding to the action of the character (movable body 011SH32) is acquired,
You may make it so that it may be used. In other words, there may be cases where the role item card is used and acquired with the role item as the target. In addition, there are multiple timings for the action timing of the character, and the timing of the action (at which of the multiple timings the action is performed) and the number of times the action is performed (how many of the multiple timings the action is performed at).
The degree of expectation for a big hit (the degree of expectation for winning the battle) may differ depending on the situation.

(Modification 19 of characteristic portion 011SH)
Although an example in which an item does not change to another type after being displayed (stocked) has been described above, an item may change to another type after being displayed (stocked). For example, an up card may be displayed immediately after the change starts, and the up card may change to a cancel card immediately after the reach. In addition, the possibility that the displayed (stocked) item may change to another item may be suggested. For example, as the display mode of the up card, a normal mode and a special mode (blinking mode, rocking mode, etc.) different from the normal mode are prepared, and when the display mode of the up card is the special mode, the normal mode is used. You may make it easy to change to a cancellation card compared with time.

(Modification 20 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above example, the item type (up card, cancel card) can be identified when the item is displayed (starting stock). good. For example, the types of some or all of the displayed cards may be made indistinguishable at the start of display, and may be made identifiable at any timing until they are used. For example, at the timing of the start of display, the back side of the common pattern where the card type cannot be identified is displayed, and at the timing after the execution of the activation effect, the front side where the card type can be identified (Fig. 13-7 (A) (B )) may be displayed. In addition to displaying the up card and cancel card on the back side, the fake card (the display mode on the front side is "..." etc., but the display mode on the back side is the same common pattern as the up card and cancel card. card) may be displayed on the back. A fake card may be deleted when it becomes identifiable as a fake card (after the face is displayed). In addition, there may be a case where the variation of the false card is terminated (deleted at the end of the variation) while the back side remains.

(Modification 21 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above description, the item (up card, cancel card) is displayed in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, but it may be displayed in another position. For example, the vicinity of the active display area 011SHAHA (see FIGS. 13-23) (for example, active display 011SH
AH, etc.). The display position may be changed according to the type of item and the number of acquired (stock) items.

(Modification 22 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above description, examples where items (up cards, cancel cards) are used in pseudo-continuous effects, battle upheavals, and relief effects (see FIG. 13-7(C)) have been described. In addition, items may be used in other scenes. In other words, in the above, examples of using and acquiring items targeting simulated events, rising battles, and salvation have been described (Figs. 13-13 to 13-16), but items are used and acquired with other events as targets. You may do so. For example, items may be used and acquired by targeting changes in active display or pending display. In other words, the active display or the like may be changed depending on the use of an up card or the like. In addition, the item to be used directly affects the active display, etc. (for example, an effect is executed in which the up-card, etc. is reduced and displayed over the active display, etc.), and the display mode of the active display, etc. is changed. Alternatively, the item to be used indirectly affects the active display, etc. (for example, an arrow appears by using an up card, etc., and the arrow pierces the active display, etc.), and the active display is performed. You may change the display mode, such as. The latter aspect (indirectly acting aspect) is
It can also be said that items are used and acquired with the execution of action effects that change the active display or pending display as the target. Also, for example, a color that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit (the color of the entire background during battle production, the color of the periphery, the game effect lamp 9, etc.). high, etc.), items may be used and acquired as targets. That is, the color change may be performed by using an up card or the like. Also, for example, an item may be used and acquired by targeting an operation (operation valid period) by operation means (including various buttons, operation rods, guns, swords, etc.).
In other words, an effect including an operation by the operating means may be executed by using an up card or the like. Also, the item may be used after the variable display ends. For example, an item may be used and acquired with a promotion effect (a round promotion effect, a variable promotion effect) as a target.

(Modification 23 of characteristic portion 011SH)
Although the description is omitted above, items may be used and acquired in connection with setting value suggestion. As an example, setting values may be suggested based on the frequency of item use or acquisition. For example, depending on the setting value (for example, depending on whether the setting value is “1” or the setting value is “2” or more, whether the setting value is “3” or less or the setting value is “4” or more) depending on whether the set value is even or odd), the rate at which the item is used (for example, "used" or "used" in some or all of FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16). ratio of decisions of “no”, etc.)
, or the rate at which items are displayed (stocked) (for example, Figures 13-13 to 13-16
(e.g., the decision ratio of “with acquisition” and “without acquisition” in part or all of ) may be different. As another example, setting values may be suggested based on the result of using the item.
For example, in the above description, if the cancel card is used after the defeat is notified in the battle production, the relief production is always executed (example of winning and winning), but after the defeat is announced in the battle production There are cases where the relief effect is not executed even if the cancel card is used (when it is lost while losing), and if the rescue effect is not executed even if the cancel card is used after the defeat is reported in the battle effect may be suggested (for example, an image or the like suggesting the set value may be displayed). It should be noted that an item (setting suggestion card) to be acquired may be prepared by using the execution of the setting value suggestion effect that suggests the setting value as a target. For example, when an eye-catching image (an eye-catching image in a normal display mode common to the set values) is displayed (when definitively notifying that the super reach has been lost), the setting suggestion card may be activated (used) to change the display mode of the eye-catching image being displayed (normal display mode common to set values) to a special display mode (suggestive display mode suggesting set values).

(Modification 24 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above, an example in which the item is a card (up card, cancel card) has been described, but the item may not be a card. For example, medals (for example, multiple types of individually identifiable medals) may be displayed and obtained as items, or gachas (for example, multiple types of gachas that can identify which content is included). may be displayed.

(Modification 25 of characteristic portion 011SH)
In the above description, items and the like are determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (see FIGS. 9, 13-21, and 13-22). etc. may be determined. When determining the item etc. in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), instead of the variation pattern,
Pattern designation command (production control command indicating whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the judgment result of the jackpot type (probable variation, non-probability variation, or sudden probability)) and variation category specification command (category (type) of the determined variation pattern You may decide about an item etc. based on the content of production|presentation control command) which shows ). A plurality of items may be collectively determined in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one item may be decided in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of each start winning. That is, one variation may be associated with a plurality of items, or each variation may be associated with one item.

(Application to other equipment)
In the above, an example of application to a pachinko game machine has been described, but application to a slot machine is also possible. In a certain state (for example, a non-advantageous state), for example, periodically (every fixed number of games, every number of games within a predetermined range), another state (for example, an advantageous state. For example, bonus game, AT, ART , RT, etc.) may be used as an enemy.

(011SH slot machine)
For example, it is possible to execute multiple types of specific effects that suggest being controlled in an advantageous state,
Before the specific effect is executed, it is possible to execute multiple types of suggested effects related to the execution of the specific effect, and the multiple types of specific effects are performed at a predetermined timing (for example, each game within a fixed number of games). A first specific effect that can be executed in a game (each game before the final battle is selected, etc.) (For example, an experience value acquisition effect that can acquire experience values, etc. Any final battle with a different percentage of winning (Selected according to experience. The more experience you have, the easier it is to choose a favorable final battle.)
, a second specific effect that can be executed at a timing after a predetermined timing (for example, one or more games in which the final battle is selected) (the once selected final battle can be changed to a more advantageous final battle A plurality of suggestive effects, including a rising effect) and a third specific effect (rescue effect leading to victory from defeat) that can be executed at a timing after a predetermined timing (for example, the last game of the final battle). includes a first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card, etc.) and a second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card, etc.) that is controlled to be in a more advantageous state than the first suggestion effect. When the first suggestive effect is continuously executed until a predetermined timing, a first specific effect can be executed in relation to the first suggestive effect, and the first suggestive effect is performed at a timing later than the predetermined timing. A second specific effect can be executed in relation to the first suggestive effect when the second suggestive effect is continuously executed until a predetermined timing, and when the second suggestive effect is continuously executed until a predetermined timing, the second suggestive effect can be executed. When the first specific effect can be executed in relation to the above, and the second suggestive effect is continuously executed until a timing after a predetermined timing,
A third specific effect can be executed in relation to the second suggestive effect, and when the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are executed at the predetermined timing, at least the first suggestive effect is associated with the predetermined timing. A first pattern (for example, each game within a fixed number of games, If the up card and cancel card are stocked in each game before the final battle is selected, the up card is used to execute the experience value acquisition effect in each game, and the game in which the final battle is selected is canceled. a pattern of executing a rise performance using a card), a first specific performance is executed in relation to the first suggestive performance at a predetermined timing, and a second suggestive performance is executed in relation to the second suggestive performance at a timing later than the predetermined timing. A second pattern that executes a third specific effect (for example, if an up card and a cancel card are stocked in each game before the final battle is selected in each game within the fixed number of games, in each game A pattern in which an up card is used to perform an experience value acquisition effect, and in the final game of the final battle, a cancel card is used to perform a relief effect),
and the timing of executing the third specific effect (relief effect) may be the timing after the timing of executing the second specific effect (upstart effect). In addition, the battle production of pachinko machine 1 has different degrees of reliability, "weak battle", "medium battle",
There are multiple types such as "strong battle" (see Figures 13-1, 13-3 to 13-4),
It is assumed that there are a plurality of types of final battles with different degrees of reliability in the above-mentioned slot machine, and the second specific effect is an effect that leads to a final battle with a higher degree of reliability. If you win the final battle, you will be controlled in an advantageous state.

(012SH slot machine)
For example, it is possible to execute multiple types of specific effects that suggest being controlled in an advantageous state,
Before the specific effect is executed, it is possible to execute multiple types of suggestive effects related to the execution of the specific effect, and the multiple types of specific effects are the first specific effect (for example, losing in the final battle). Relief production that leads to victory from ), and a second specific production that is controlled in a more advantageous state than the first specific production, and a second specific production that has a lower expectation etc.), and when the suggestive effect (for example, the effect by a cancel card, etc.) is being executed at the first timing (for example, the last game of the final battle, etc.), the first specified in relation to the suggestive effect Effect can be executed, and suggestive effect (for example, effect by cancel card, up card, etc.) is executed at a second timing (for example, one or more games in which the final battle is selected, etc.) before the first timing. When being performed, the second specific performance can be executed in relation to the suggestive performance, and the second specific performance is executed once in relation to the suggestive performance (for example, performance by cancel card, up card, etc.). Executed with the first pattern (one rise-up pattern) and the second pattern (twice rise-up pattern) that is executed multiple times in relation to suggestive effects (for example, effects using cancel cards and up cards). It is possible, and the case where the second specific effect is executed in the second pattern is the second pattern in the first pattern.
It is sufficient if the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when the specific production is executed (if the final battle goes up twice, it will be the final battle corresponding to the "strong battle", so the expectation high). In addition, there are multiple types of battle effects of the pachinko machine 1, such as "weak battle", "medium battle", and "strong battle" with different degrees of reliability (Figs. 4
See), it is assumed that there are multiple types of final battles with different degrees of reliability in the above-mentioned slot machine, and that the second specific effect is an effect leading to a final battle with a higher degree of reliability.
If you win the final battle, you will be controlled in an advantageous state.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 011SH)
(Means 1 related to characteristic portion 011SH)
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.) capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state, bonus game, etc.), and providing a plurality of types of specific effects suggesting control to the advantageous state. It is executable, and before the execution of the specific effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggested effects related to the execution of the specific effect, and the plurality of types of the specific effects are executed at a predetermined timing. A first specific effect that can be executed (for example, the simulated consecutive notice effects shown in FIGS. 13-8 and 13-9, etc.) 13-10, effects such as the rise of the battle shown in FIG.
2, etc.), and the plurality of types of suggestive effects include a first suggestive effect (for example, an upcard effect shown in FIG. 13-7 (A), etc.) and the first and a second suggestive effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card shown in FIG. , production by up card, etc.) is continuously executed until a predetermined timing, the first suggestive production (
For example, it is possible to execute the first specific effect (for example, pseudo-continuous advance notice effect, etc.) in relation to the effect by up card, etc.), and the first suggestive effect continues until the timing after the predetermined timing. When executed, it is possible to execute the second specific effect (for example, effect of rising battle etc.) in relation to the first suggestive effect (for example, effect by up card etc.) (for example, FIG. 13-7 (C), Figure 13-9 (G4) to Figure 13-9 (L4), Figure 13-
11 (B3) ~ Figure 13-11 (G3), Figure 13-14, Figure 13-15, Figure 13-16, Figure 13-17, Figure 13-22, etc.), the second suggestion effect (for example, cancel card ) is continuously executed until a predetermined timing, the first specific effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice effect, etc.) is performed in relation to the second suggestive effect (for example, effect by cancel card, etc.). In addition to being executable, when the second suggestive effect is continuously executed until a timing after a predetermined timing, the third suggestive effect (for example, effect by a cancel card, etc.) is associated with the second suggestive effect. A specific effect (for example, relief effect, etc.) can be executed (for example, FIG. 13-7 (C), FIG. 13-9 (G5) to FIG. 13-9 (L5), FIG. 13-12 (G2), Figure 13-13, Figure 13-15, Figure 13-16, Figure 13-17, Figure 1
3-22, etc.), when the first suggestive effect (for example, the effect by an up card) and the second suggestive effect (for example, the effect by a cancel card, etc.) are executed at a predetermined timing, at least a predetermined At the timing, the first specific effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice effect, etc.) is executed in relation to the first suggestive effect (for example, effect by up card, etc.), and at the timing after the predetermined timing, the second specific effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice effect) is executed. In a first pattern (for example, a pseudo continuous effect, a battle effect pattern including a battle rise) that executes the second specific effect (for example, a battle rising effect, etc.) in relation to a suggestive effect (for example, a cancel card effect, etc.) , When the up card is determined with the simulated continuous effect as the target, and the cancel card is determined with the battle rising as the target (see Figures 13-14 and 13-16).
pattern, etc.), and at a predetermined timing, the first specific effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice effect, etc.) is executed in relation to the first suggestive effect (for example, effect by up card, etc.), and at a predetermined timing A second pattern (for example, a pseudo continuous effect, a relief effect, etc.) that executes the third specific effect (for example, a relief effect, etc.) in relation to the second suggestive effect (for example, a cancel card effect, etc.) at a later timing. In the battle effect pattern including, the case where the up card is determined with the pseudo continuous effect as the target and the cancel card is determined with the relief effect as the target (patterns of FIGS. 13-13 and 13-16), and the specific effect can be executed, and the timing at which the third specific effect (for example, relief effect, etc.) is executed is the timing after the timing at which the second specific effect (for example, effect for rising up of the battle, etc.) is executed. Yes (Figs. 13-17, etc.).

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to improve amusement in the game. In other words, in each of the different types of suggestive images, individual specific effects (first specific effect, second specific effect) and common specific effect (third specific effect) are executed, so scenes where suggestive images can be displayed. Without excessively limiting the variation of the presentation, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 2 related to characteristic part 011SH)
The gaming machine of the above-described means 1 executes the first specific effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice effect, etc.) in relation to the first suggestive effect (for example, effect by up card, etc.), and the second When executing the first specific effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice effect, etc.) in relation to the suggestive effect (for example, effect by cancel card, etc.), the first specific effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice effect, etc.) is performed in a different manner production, etc.) is executed (Fig. 13-9).

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(Means 3 related to characteristic portion 011SH)
In the gaming machines of the above means 1 and 2, the first suggestive effect (for example, effect by up card, etc.) and the second suggestive effect (for example, effect by cancel card, etc.) are executed at a predetermined timing. case, and at a predetermined timing, the second suggestion effect (for example,
The ratio of whether the second suggestive effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card, etc.) is continuously executed until the timing after the predetermined timing is different between the case where only the effect by the cancel card, etc.) is executed. (Figures 13-13 to 13-16). For example, before the start of the pseudo-continuous effect, if the up card and the cancel card are stocked, or if only the cancel card is stocked, after the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the cancel card is stocked. are not the same (Figures 13-13 to 13-16
are intentionally not the same). Alternatively, the up card is unlikely to be determined as a target for the rise of the battle, and the cancel card is unlikely to be determined as a target for the pseudo-continuous effect, so if the up card and the cancel card are stocked before the start of the pseudo-continuous effect , there is a high possibility that the up card is the target of the pseudo-continuous effect, and there is a high possibility that the cancel card is stocked at the end of the pseudo-continuous effect. On the other hand, if only the cancel card is stocked before the start of the pseudo-continuous effect, the frequency of occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect is higher than the rise of the battle (since the pseudo-continuous effect is executed even in normal reach), The possibility that the cancel card is the target of the pseudo-continuous effect is relatively high, and the possibility that the cancel card will be stocked at the end of the pseudo-continuous effect is not high.

According to the gaming machine, it is possible to draw attention to the type of suggestive effect when the first specific effect is executed.

(Means 4 related to characteristic portion 011SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 1 to 3, when executing the first specific effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice effect etc.), is related to the first suggestive effect (for example, effect by up card The ratio of execution differs from the ratio of execution related to the second suggestive effect (for example, effect by cancel card, etc.) (FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16).

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to execute the first specific effect in relation to the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect in accordance with the player's psychology.

(Means 5 related to characteristic portion 011SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 1 to 4 is capable of executing a notification effect (for example, the activation effect shown in FIGS. 13 to 17) for notifying that the specific effect will be executed in relation to the suggestive effect. Yes (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-23(H) to 13-24(F), in connection with the up card being stocked (i.e., the stocked up card being used) ) can display an activation image 011SHHD1 that notifies that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed.Also, as shown in FIGS. It is possible to display an activation image 011SHHD2 that notifies that the battle will be executed in relation to being stocked (that is, in relation to the use of the stocked cancel card). -28 (A) to Figure 13-23 (G)
, an activation image 011SHHD1 notifying that a pseudo-continuous effect will be executed in relation to the stock of up cards (that is, in relation to the use of the stock up cards). can be displayed. In addition, Figure 13-31 (F) ~ Figure 13-
As shown in 32(E), activation to notify that a relief effect will be executed in relation to the cancellation card being stocked (that is, in relation to the use of the stocked cancellation card). image 011SHHD2 can be displayed), and the notification effect can be executed even when the suggestion effect is not executed (for example, FIG. 13-30 (B
) ~ As shown in Fig. 13-30 (G), even if the up card is not stocked (that is, when the up card is used as an emergency activation), the activation image 011SHHD
1 can be displayed), and when the notification effect is executed when the suggestive effect is not executed, the specific effect equal to or greater than a predetermined expected value is executed. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 13-15, the determination ratio of making the target of the pseudo-continuous effect without stocking up cards is 12% for normal reach (loss) and 15% for normal reach (big hit). Yes, the percentage of decisions to stock up cards and target pseudo-continuous effects is 73% (26% + 47%) for normal reach (loss) and 70% for normal reach (jackpot).
% (25%+45%). Therefore, the reliability of the pseudo-continuous effect when an unstocked upcard is used and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is Higher than performance reliability. In other words, when an unstocked upcard is used and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the reliability of the jackpot by the pseudo-continuous effect is a predetermined expected value (a pseudo-continuous effect when the stocked upcard is used). Reliability of the big hit by the pseudo-continuous effect when is executed) or more.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest. For example, a card that is not stocked may be used, a specific effect may be executed (a specific effect is executed as a surprise), and the specific effect (a specific effect that occurs as a surprise) is a predetermined expected value or more. For,
It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to lack of stock.

(Means 6 related to characteristic portion 011SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1 to 5, the suggestive effect can be started at a plurality of types of timing, and at which timing the execution is started according to the type of the suggestive effect (For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16, the ratio of determining the timing to be displayed (stocked) differs depending on the type of card. Also, depending on the type of card, the used timing (i.e. target) decision percentages are different).

According to the gaming machine, since the suggestive effect is executed at various timings during the game,
A sense of anticipation can be given at various timings.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 012SH)
(Means 1 related to characteristic portion 012SH)
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.) capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state, bonus game, etc.), and providing a plurality of types of specific effects suggesting control to the advantageous state. before the specific effect is executed, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects related to the execution of the specific effect, and the plurality of types of the specific effects are performed in accordance with a first specific effect Effects (for example, relief effects shown in FIGS. 13-12, etc.) and second specific effects (for example, FIGS. 13-10,
13-11, etc.), and the suggestive effect (for example, effect by cancel card, etc.) is the first timing (for example, "LOSE image 011S
HKH1” is displayed), the first specific effect (for example, relief effect, etc.) can be executed in relation to the suggestive effect, and the suggestive effect (for example, up card, cancel card, etc.) is executed at a second timing (for example, a scene where the title of the battle production is displayed, etc.) before the first timing, in relation to the suggestive production It is possible to execute the second specific effect (for example, production of rising battle, etc.), and the second specific production (for example, production of rising battle, etc.)
is executed once in relation to the suggestive effect (for example, effect by up card or cancel card, etc.)
pattern to run times, etc. 13-14), and a second pattern that is executed multiple times in relation to the suggestive effect (for example, effect by up card or cancel card, etc.) patterns, etc. (see FIGS. 13-14), and when the second specific effect is executed in the second pattern, the second specific effect is executed in the first pattern. than the case, the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is high (the two battle rises are strong battles, so the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is high (FIGS. 13-1, 13-3, Figure 13-4).

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game. In other words, when the second specific performance with a lower degree of expectation than the first specific performance is executed, the degree of expectation is increased by executing it repeatedly, so that the expectation of the player is heightened. Alternatively, it can be sustained to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 2 related to characteristic part 012SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1, the second specific effect (for example, a battle rising effect, etc.) is related to the suggestive effect (for example, an effect by an up card or a cancel card, etc.), and the first pattern (for example, A pattern in which the stocked cards are used one by one and the battle is performed once.Here, a pattern in which two stocked cards are used and the battle is performed twice.In other words, the first battle is also the second time. The case where the second specific effect is executed in the second pattern in relation to the suggestive effect (for example, the stocked 1 The first specific effect (for example, the relief effect, etc.) is executed rather than the pattern of executing the battle upsurge twice using a single card, etc. That is, the pattern of executing the second upsurge without using the stock, etc.). Cheap. For example, in the case of two upstarts shown in FIGS.
-14 (D))” includes “In case of no acquisition of items targeting relief (Fig. 13-1
4 (C))”, the frequency of executing the first and second upstarts using stock (that is, “used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after fluctuation starts, 2 cards” Yes, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards)) is high,
The second upstart is the frequency of execution without using the stock
The ratio of determining "one card" immediately after reach) is low. Therefore, when both the first upstart and the second upstart are executed using the stock, the relief performance is more likely to be executed than when the second upstart is executed without using the stock. Figure 13-14 (
As shown in A) and Fig. 13-14(B), even in the case of one rise, the case where the rise is executed using the stock is higher than the case where the rise is executed without using the stock. Also, it is easy to perform a relief effect. In other words, if the upstart is executed without using the stock, it becomes difficult for the relief effect to be executed.

According to the above-described gaming machine, when the first pattern with a low degree of expectation is executed, the probability of executing the first specific effect time is high, so the sense of expectation can be maintained.

(Means 3 related to characteristic part 012SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1 and 2, the suggestive effect (for example, the effect by the up card or the cancel card, etc.) The previous third timing (for example, the scene immediately after reach),
It is possible to start execution at the fourth timing (for example, the scene immediately after the start of fluctuation) before the third timing (for example, the scene immediately after the start of fluctuation, the scene immediately after the reach, etc.). at which timing, the third timing (for example, the scene immediately after the reach) or the fourth timing (for example, the scene immediately after the start of fluctuation, etc.) Depending on, the ratio of whether the second specific effect (for example, the effect of the rise of the battle, etc.) is executed in the first pattern or the second pattern differs (for example, FIGS. 13-14 reference).

According to the gaming machine, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timing of starting execution of the suggestive effect.

(Means 4 related to characteristic part 012SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1 to 3, the second specific effect (for example, a battle rising effect, etc.) is the first This is an effect that changes from a mode to a second mode with a higher degree of expectation than the first mode (for example, see FIGS. 13-11).

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to improve interest.

(Means 5 related to characteristic portion 012SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1 to 4, the second specific effect after the first time executed in the second pattern is executed regardless of the suggestive effect. For example, Figures 13-14
(C), in the number of times the battle rises twice shown in FIG. If "immediately, 1 card" is decided, use 1 cancel card and perform 2 upstarts. Specifically, the stocked cancel cards are consumed at the time of the first upstart. Therefore, the second upstart is executed without consuming the stocked cancel cards (that is, regardless of the stock of the cancel cards).

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to improve interest. In other words, since the cards are used without a stock, the sense of surprise is conspicuous and the interest can be enhanced.

(Means 6 related to characteristic portion 012SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1 to 5, the suggestive effect can be started at a plurality of types of timing, and at which timing the execution is started according to the type of the suggestive effect (For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16, the ratio of determining the timing to be displayed (stocked) differs depending on the type of card. Also, depending on the type of card, the used timing (i.e. target) decision percentages are different).

According to the gaming machine, since the suggestive effect is executed at various timings during the game,
A sense of anticipation can be given at various timings.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A game machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects that suggest being controlled to the advantageous state,
Before the specific effect is executed, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggested effects related to the execution of the specific effect,
ending the suggestive effect related to execution of the specific effect when the specific effect is executed;
The plurality of types of specific effects are
A first specific effect that can be executed at a predetermined timing;
a second specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing;
and a third specific effect that can be executed at a timing after the predetermined timing,
The plurality of types of suggested productions are
The first suggestion production and
a second suggestive effect in which the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first suggestive effect,
When the first suggesting effect is continuously executed until the predetermined timing, the first specific effect can be executed in relation to the first suggesting effect, and the first suggesting effect is started from the predetermined timing. When it is continuously executed until a later timing, it is possible to execute the second specific effect in relation to the first suggestive effect,
When the second suggestive effect is continuously executed until the predetermined timing, the first specific effect can be executed in relation to the second suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is started from the predetermined timing. When the execution continues until a later timing, the third specific effect can be executed in relation to the second suggestive effect,
When the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are executed at the predetermined timing, at least
a second suggestive continuation pattern for executing the first specific effect in relation to the first suggestive effect, ending the first suggestive effect, and continuing the second suggestive effect;
The specific effect can be executed in a first suggestive continuation pattern in which the first specific effect is executed in relation to the second suggestive effect, the second suggestive effect is terminated, and the first suggestive effect is continued. can be,
The second suggestive continuation pattern is
The first specific effect is executed in relation to the first suggestive effect at the predetermined timing, and the second specific effect is executed in relation to the second suggestive effect after the predetermined timing. 1 pattern and
The first specific effect is executed in relation to the first suggestive effect at the predetermined timing, and the third specific effect is executed in relation to the second suggestive effect at a timing later than the predetermined timing. 2 patterns, and
When executing the first specific effect in relation to the first suggestive effect, a plurality of execution periods of the first suggestive effect are provided until the first specific effect is executed, and a plurality of the first suggestive effects are provided. Controllable to the advantageous state regardless of which execution period is selected from among the execution periods of the suggestive effect ,
The first suggestive effect can be changed to the second suggestive effect during execution of the first suggestive effect,
The first suggestive effect includes a normal mode and a special mode,
The first suggestive effect of the special mode has a higher rate of change to the second suggestive effect than the first suggestive effect of the normal mode,
When executing the first specific effect, the ratio of executing the first specific effect in relation to the first suggestive effect, and the ratio of executing the first specific effect in relation to the second suggestive effect. is different,
The suggestive effect can be started at any one of a plurality of timings, and the ratio of which timing to start differs depending on the type of the suggestive effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images